CN117203696A - display device - Google Patents
display device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN117203696A CN117203696A CN202280028422.2A CN202280028422A CN117203696A CN 117203696 A CN117203696 A CN 117203696A CN 202280028422 A CN202280028422 A CN 202280028422A CN 117203696 A CN117203696 A CN 117203696A
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- transistor
- wiring
- layer
- gate
- source
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Landscapes
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
Abstract
提供一种新颖的显示装置。一种显示装置,该显示装置包括具有驱动电路的第一层、具有多个像素电路的第二层及具有多个发光元件的第三层,在第一层上设置第二层,在第二层上设置第三层,在驱动电路与多个像素电路之间设置导电层。驱动电路具有控制多个像素电路的工作的功能。多个像素电路之一与多个发光元件之一电连接。像素电路具有控制发光元件的发光亮度的功能。
A novel display device is provided. A display device, the display device includes a first layer with a driving circuit, a second layer with a plurality of pixel circuits, and a third layer with a plurality of light-emitting elements, a second layer is provided on the first layer, and the second layer is A third layer is disposed on the third layer, and a conductive layer is disposed between the driving circuit and the plurality of pixel circuits. The driver circuit has the function of controlling operations of multiple pixel circuits. One of the plurality of pixel circuits is electrically connected to one of the plurality of light-emitting elements. The pixel circuit has the function of controlling the brightness of the light-emitting element.
Description
技术领域Technical field
本发明的一个方式涉及一种显示装置。One aspect of the present invention relates to a display device.
注意,本发明的一个方式不局限于上述技术领域。作为本说明书等公开的本发明的一个方式的技术领域的例子,可以举出半导体装置、显示装置、发光装置、蓄电装置、存储装置、电子设备、照明装置、输入装置、输入输出装置、它们的驱动方法或它们的制造方法。Note that one aspect of the present invention is not limited to the above technical field. Examples of the technical fields of one aspect of the present invention disclosed in this specification and the like include semiconductor devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, power storage devices, storage devices, electronic equipment, lighting devices, input devices, input-output devices, and the like. driving methods or their manufacturing methods.
背景技术Background technique
近年来,智能手机及平板终端等具备显示装置的电子设备广泛普及。作为显示装置,典型地可以举出液晶显示装置、具备有机EL(Electro Luminescence)元件、发光二极管(LED:Light Emitting Diode)等发光元件的发光装置、以电泳方式等进行显示的电子等。In recent years, electronic devices equipped with display devices, such as smartphones and tablet terminals, have become widely popular. Typical examples of display devices include liquid crystal display devices, light-emitting devices including light-emitting elements such as organic EL (Electro Luminescence) elements and light-emitting diodes (LED: Light Emitting Diode), and electronic devices that perform display by electrophoresis or the like.
例如,有机EL元件的基本结构是在一对电极之间夹有包含发光性有机化合物的层的结构。通过对该元件施加电压,可以得到来自发光性有机化合物的发光。由于应用上述有机EL元件的显示装置不需要液晶显示装置等所需要的背光源,所以可以实现薄型、轻量、高对比度且低功耗的显示装置。例如,专利文献1公开了使用有机EL元件的显示装置的例子。For example, the basic structure of an organic EL element is a structure in which a layer containing a light-emitting organic compound is sandwiched between a pair of electrodes. By applying a voltage to this element, light emission from the luminescent organic compound can be obtained. Since a display device using the above-mentioned organic EL element does not require a backlight required for a liquid crystal display device or the like, a thin, lightweight, high-contrast, and low-power consumption display device can be realized. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses an example of a display device using an organic EL element.
另外,在专利文献2中公开了如下电路结构,即在控制有机EL元件的发光亮度的像素电路中,按每个像素校正晶体管的阈值不均匀,而提高显示装置的显示品质。In addition, Patent Document 2 discloses a circuit structure in which, in a pixel circuit that controls the emission brightness of an organic EL element, the threshold unevenness of the transistor is corrected for each pixel, thereby improving the display quality of the display device.
[先行技术文献][Advanced technical documents]
[专利文献][Patent Document]
[专利文献1]日本专利申请公开第2002-324673号公报[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2002-324673
[专利文献2]日本专利申请公开第2015-132816号公报[Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-132816
发明内容Contents of the invention
发明所要解决的技术问题The technical problem to be solved by the invention
另一方面,根据有机EL元件的结构,驱动有时需要高电压。为了驱动这种有机EL元件,需要设置用来生成高电压的电源。On the other hand, depending on the structure of the organic EL element, high voltage may be required for driving. In order to drive such an organic EL element, it is necessary to provide a power source for generating high voltage.
本发明的一个方式的目的之一是提供一种实现小型化的显示装置。另外,本发明的一个方式的目的之一是提供一种实现高颜色再现性的显示装置。另外,本发明的一个方式的目的之一是提供一种高清晰的显示装置。另外,本发明的一个方式的目的之一是提供一种可靠性高的显示装置。另外,本发明的一个方式的目的之一是提供一种功耗得到降低的显示装置。另外,本发明的一个方式的目的之一是提供一种新颖的显示装置。One object of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a display device that achieves miniaturization. In addition, one of the objects of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a display device that achieves high color reproducibility. In addition, one of the objects of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a high-definition display device. In addition, one of the objects of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a display device with high reliability. In addition, one of the objects of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a display device with reduced power consumption. In addition, one of the objects of one aspect of the present invention is to provide a novel display device.
注意,这些目的的记载不妨碍其他目的的存在。注意,本发明的一个方式并不需要实现所有上述目的。另外,可以从说明书、附图、权利要求书等的记载抽出上述以外的目的。Note that the recording of these purposes does not prevent the existence of other purposes. Note that an embodiment of the invention does not need to achieve all of the above objectives. In addition, purposes other than the above may be extracted from descriptions in the specification, drawings, claims, etc.
解决技术问题的手段Means of solving technical problems
(1)本发明的一个方式是一种包括第一及第二晶体管、第一至第五开关、第一至第三电容器以及显示元件的半导体装置,其中,第一晶体管包括背栅极,第一晶体管的栅极与第一开关电连接,在第一晶体管的栅极与源极之间包括第二开关及第一电容器,第一晶体管的背栅极与第三开关电连接,在第一晶体管的背栅极与源极之间包括第二电容器,第一晶体管的源极与第四开关及第二晶体管的漏极电连接,第二晶体管的栅极与第五开关电连接,在第二晶体管的栅极与源极之间包括第三电容器,并且,第二晶体管的源极与显示元件的一个端子电连接。(1) One aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device including first and second transistors, first to fifth switches, first to third capacitors, and a display element, wherein the first transistor includes a back gate, and the The gate of a transistor is electrically connected to the first switch. A second switch and a first capacitor are included between the gate and the source of the first transistor. The back gate of the first transistor is electrically connected to the third switch. In the first A second capacitor is included between the back gate and the source of the transistor. The source of the first transistor is electrically connected to the fourth switch and the drain of the second transistor. The gate of the second transistor is electrically connected to the fifth switch. In the A third capacitor is included between the gate and the source of the second transistor, and the source of the second transistor is electrically connected to one terminal of the display element.
此外,在(1)中,第一开关也可以具有选择第一布线与第一晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。此外,第二开关也可以具有选择第一晶体管的栅极与源极间的导通或非导通的功能。此外,第三开关也可以具有选择第二布线与第一晶体管的背栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。第四开关也可以具有选择第三布线与第一晶体管的源极间的导通或非导通的功能。第五开关也可以具有选择第四布线与第二晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。Furthermore, in (1), the first switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the first wiring and the gate of the first transistor. In addition, the second switch may also have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the gate electrode and the source electrode of the first transistor. In addition, the third switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the second wiring and the back gate of the first transistor. The fourth switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the third wiring and the source of the first transistor. The fifth switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the fourth wiring and the gate of the second transistor.
另外,在(1)中,作为第一至第五开关可以使用晶体管。第四开关及第五开关也可以为p沟道型晶体管。此外,第四开关及第五开关也可以为在形成沟道的半导体层中包含硅的晶体管。In addition, in (1), transistors may be used as the first to fifth switches. The fourth switch and the fifth switch may be p-channel transistors. In addition, the fourth switch and the fifth switch may be transistors in which the semiconductor layer forming the channel contains silicon.
(2)本发明的另一个方式是一种半导体装置,该半导体装置包括第一及第二晶体管、第一至第五开关、第一至第三电容器、第一显示元件以及第二显示元件,其中,第一晶体管包括背栅极,第一晶体管的栅极与第一开关电连接,在第一晶体管的栅极与源极之间包括第二开关及第一电容器,第一晶体管的背栅极与第三开关电连接,在第一晶体管的背栅极与源极之间包括第二电容器,第一晶体管的源极与第四开关及第二晶体管的漏极电连接,第二晶体管的栅极与第五开关电连接,在第二晶体管的栅极与源极之间包括第三电容器,并且,第二晶体管的源极与第一显示元件的一个端子及第二显示元件的一个端子电连接。(2) Another aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device including first and second transistors, first to fifth switches, first to third capacitors, a first display element, and a second display element, Wherein, the first transistor includes a back gate, the gate of the first transistor is electrically connected to the first switch, a second switch and a first capacitor are included between the gate and the source of the first transistor, and the back gate of the first transistor The electrode of the first transistor is electrically connected to the third switch, and a second capacitor is included between the back gate and the source of the first transistor. The source of the first transistor is electrically connected to the fourth switch and the drain of the second transistor. The second transistor The gate is electrically connected to the fifth switch, a third capacitor is included between the gate and the source of the second transistor, and the source of the second transistor is connected to a terminal of the first display element and a terminal of the second display element. Electrical connection.
此外,在(2)中,第一开关也可以具有选择第一布线与第一晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。第二开关也可以具有选择第一晶体管的栅极与源极间的导通或非导通的功能。第三开关也可以具有选择第二布线与第一晶体管的背栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。第四开关也可以具有选择第三布线与第一晶体管的源极间的导通或非导通的功能。第五开关也可以具有选择第四布线与第二晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。Furthermore, in (2), the first switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the first wiring and the gate of the first transistor. The second switch may also have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the gate electrode and the source electrode of the first transistor. The third switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the second wiring and the back gate of the first transistor. The fourth switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the third wiring and the source of the first transistor. The fifth switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the fourth wiring and the gate of the second transistor.
此外,在(2)中,第一电容器也可以具有保持第一晶体管的栅极与源极间的电位差的功能。第二电容器也可以具有保持第一晶体管的背栅极与源极间的电位差的功能。第三电容器也可以具有保持第二晶体管的栅极与源极间的电位差的功能。Furthermore, in (2), the first capacitor may have a function of maintaining a potential difference between the gate and the source of the first transistor. The second capacitor may also have a function of maintaining a potential difference between the back gate and the source of the first transistor. The third capacitor may also have a function of maintaining the potential difference between the gate and the source of the second transistor.
此外,在(2)中,第一晶体管的漏极也可以与第五布线电连接。例如,第一显示元件的另一个端子也可以与第六布线电连接,第二显示元件的另一个端子也可以与第七布线电连接。Furthermore, in (2), the drain of the first transistor may be electrically connected to the fifth wiring. For example, the other terminal of the first display element may be electrically connected to the sixth wiring, and the other terminal of the second display element may be electrically connected to the seventh wiring.
此外,也可以将(2)中记载的多个半导体装置配置为矩阵状来构成显示装置。例如,第一显示元件配置在奇数行,第二显示元件配置在偶数行。通过在奇数帧期间使第一显示元件发光且在偶数帧期间使第二显示元件发光,可以实现具有进行隔行扫描驱动的功能的显示装置。In addition, a plurality of semiconductor devices described in (2) may be arranged in a matrix to form a display device. For example, the first display elements are arranged in odd-numbered rows, and the second display elements are arranged in even-numbered rows. By causing the first display element to emit light during odd-numbered frame periods and the second display element to emit light during even-numbered frame periods, a display device having a function of interlaced scanning driving can be realized.
(3)本发明的另一个方式是一种半导体装置,该半导体装置包括第一至第八晶体管、第一至第三电容器以及显示元件,其中,第一晶体管的栅极及第六晶体管的栅极与第一布线电连接,第三晶体管的栅极及第四晶体管的栅极与第二布线电连接,第七晶体管的栅极与第三布线电连接,第八晶体管的栅极与第四布线电连接,第一晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个与第五布线电连接,第一晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个与第二晶体管的栅极、第三晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个及第一电容器的一个端子电连接,第二晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个与第六布线电连接,第四晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个与第七布线电连接,第四晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个与第二电容器的一个端子电连接,第二晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个与第三晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个、第一电容器的另一个端子、第二电容器的另一个端子、第五晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个及第六晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个电连接,第七晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个与第七布线电连接,第五晶体管的栅极与第七晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个、第八晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个及第三电容器的一个端子电连接,第六晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个及第八晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个与第八布线电连接,第五晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个与第三电容器的另一个端子及显示元件的一个端子电连接,显示元件的另一个端子与第九布线电连接,第二晶体管包括背栅极,背栅极与第四晶体管的源极和漏极中的另一个及第二电容器的一个端子电连接。(3) Another aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device including first to eighth transistors, first to third capacitors, and a display element, wherein the gate of the first transistor and the gate of the sixth transistor The gate electrode of the third transistor and the fourth transistor are electrically connected to the second wiring. The gate electrode of the seventh transistor is electrically connected to the third wiring. The gate electrode of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the fourth wiring. The wiring is electrically connected, one of the source and drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the fifth wiring, and the other of the source and drain of the first transistor is connected to the gate of the second transistor and the source of the third transistor. One of the drain electrodes and one terminal of the first capacitor are electrically connected, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the second transistor is electrically connected to the sixth wiring, and one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the fourth transistor is electrically connected to the seventh wiring. The wiring is electrically connected, the other of the source and drain of the fourth transistor is electrically connected to one terminal of the second capacitor, and the other of the source and drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to the source and drain of the third transistor. The other of the first capacitor, the other terminal of the second capacitor, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the fifth transistor, and one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the sixth transistor are electrically connected. One of the source and drain of the seven transistors is electrically connected to the seventh wiring, the gate of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to the other of the source and drain of the seventh transistor, and the source and drain of the eighth transistor are electrically connected to each other. One is electrically connected to one terminal of the third capacitor, the other of the source and drain of the sixth transistor and the other of the source and drain of the eighth transistor are electrically connected to the eighth wiring, and the source of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to the eighth wiring. The other of the electrode and the drain is electrically connected to the other terminal of the third capacitor and one terminal of the display element. The other terminal of the display element is electrically connected to the ninth wiring. The second transistor includes a back gate, and the back gate is electrically connected to the ninth wiring. The other one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the fourth transistor is electrically connected to one terminal of the second capacitor.
此外,在(3)中,作为第二晶体管也可以使用形成沟道的半导体包含氧化物半导体的晶体管。第二晶体管包括源极和漏极中的一个、源极和漏极中的另一个、栅极及背栅极。第二晶体管可以具有根据源极和漏极中的另一个的电位变化而使栅极电位及背栅极电位变化的功能。Furthermore, in (3), a transistor in which the semiconductor forming the channel includes an oxide semiconductor may be used as the second transistor. The second transistor includes one of a source electrode and a drain electrode, the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode, a gate electrode, and a back gate electrode. The second transistor may have a function of changing the gate potential and the back gate potential according to the potential change of the other of the source and the drain.
此外,在(3)中,作为第五晶体管也可以使用形成沟道的半导体包含氧化物半导体的晶体管。第五晶体管包括源极和漏极中的一个、源极和漏极中的另一个及栅极。第五晶体管可以具有根据源极和漏极中的另一个的电位变化而栅极电位变化的功能。In (3), a transistor in which the semiconductor forming the channel includes an oxide semiconductor may be used as the fifth transistor. The fifth transistor includes one of the source electrode and the drain electrode, the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode, and a gate electrode. The fifth transistor may have a function of changing the gate potential according to the potential change of the other of the source and the drain.
(4)本发明的另一个方式是一种包括第一及第二晶体管、第一至第六开关、第一至第三电容器以及显示元件的半导体装置,其中,第一晶体管包括背栅极,第一晶体管的栅极与第一开关电连接,在第一晶体管的栅极与源极之间包括第二开关及第一电容器,第一晶体管的背栅极与第三开关电连接,在第一晶体管的背栅极与源极之间包括第二电容器,第一晶体管的源极与第四开关及第二晶体管的漏极电连接,第二晶体管的栅极与第五开关及第六开关电连接,在第二晶体管的栅极与源极之间包括第三电容器,并且,第二晶体管的源极与显示元件电连接。(4) Another aspect of the present invention is a semiconductor device including first and second transistors, first to sixth switches, first to third capacitors, and a display element, wherein the first transistor includes a back gate, The gate of the first transistor is electrically connected to the first switch. A second switch and a first capacitor are included between the gate and the source of the first transistor. The back gate of the first transistor is electrically connected to the third switch. A second capacitor is included between the back gate and the source of a transistor. The source of the first transistor is electrically connected to the fourth switch and the drain of the second transistor. The gate of the second transistor is connected to the fifth switch and the sixth switch. The electrical connection includes a third capacitor between the gate and the source of the second transistor, and the source of the second transistor is electrically connected to the display element.
此外,在(4)中,第一开关也可以具有选择第一布线与第一晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能,第二开关也可以具有选择第一晶体管的栅极与源极间的导通或非导通的功能,第三开关也可以具有选择第二布线与第一晶体管的背栅极间的导通或非导通的功能,第四开关也可以具有选择第三布线与第一晶体管的源极间的导通或非导通的功能,第五开关也可以具有选择第二布线与第二晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能,第六开关也可以具有选择第三布线与第二晶体管的栅极间的导通或非导通的功能。In addition, in (4), the first switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the first wiring and the gate of the first transistor, and the second switch may have a function of selecting between the gate of the first transistor and The third switch may also have the function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the second wiring and the back gate of the first transistor. The fourth switch may also have the function of selecting the conduction or non-conduction between the second wiring and the back gate of the first transistor. The fifth switch may also have the function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the second wiring and the gate of the second transistor. The sixth switch may also have the function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the second wiring and the gate of the second transistor. The switch may have a function of selecting conduction or non-conduction between the third wiring and the gate of the second transistor.
此外,在(4)中,第一电容器也可以具有保持第一晶体管的栅极与源极间的电位差的功能,第二电容器也可以具有保持第一晶体管的背栅极与源极间的电位差的功能,第三电容器也可以具有保持第二晶体管的栅极与源极间的电位差的功能。In addition, in (4), the first capacitor may have the function of maintaining the potential difference between the gate and the source of the first transistor, and the second capacitor may have the function of maintaining the potential difference between the back gate and the source of the first transistor. The third capacitor may also have the function of maintaining the potential difference between the gate and the source of the second transistor.
另外,在(1)、(2)、(3)及(4)中,氧化物半导体优选包含铟和锌中的至少一个。显示元件也可以使用单结构的有机EL元件或串联结构的有机EL元件。In addition, in (1), (2), (3) and (4), the oxide semiconductor preferably contains at least one of indium and zinc. The display element may also use a single-structure organic EL element or a tandem-structure organic EL element.
(5)本发明的另一个方式是一种显示装置,该显示装置包括具有驱动电路的第一层、具有多个像素电路的第二层以及具有多个发光元件的第三层,其中,第二层设置在第一层上,第三层设置在第二层上,驱动电路具有控制多个像素电路的工作的功能,多个像素电路之一与多个发光元件之一电连接,像素电路具有控制发光元件的发光亮度的功能,在驱动电路与多个像素电路之间包括导电层。(5) Another aspect of the present invention is a display device including a first layer having a driving circuit, a second layer having a plurality of pixel circuits, and a third layer having a plurality of light emitting elements, wherein the third layer The second layer is arranged on the first layer, and the third layer is arranged on the second layer. The driving circuit has the function of controlling the operation of multiple pixel circuits. One of the multiple pixel circuits is electrically connected to one of the multiple light-emitting elements. The pixel circuit It has the function of controlling the luminance of the light-emitting element and includes a conductive layer between the driving circuit and the plurality of pixel circuits.
此外,在(5)中,上述导电层及多个像素电路优选具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,上述导电层也可以呈网状。Furthermore, in (5), it is preferable that the conductive layer and the plurality of pixel circuits have regions overlapping each other. In addition, the above-mentioned conductive layer may also be in a mesh shape.
此外,在(5)中,驱动电路例如也可以包括Si晶体管。此外,像素电路例如也可以包括OS晶体管。发光元件例如可以为有机EL元件。此外,发光元件也可以为串联结构的发光元件。Furthermore, in (5), the driver circuit may include a Si transistor, for example. In addition, the pixel circuit may include an OS transistor, for example. The light-emitting element may be an organic EL element, for example. In addition, the light-emitting element may also be a light-emitting element having a tandem structure.
发明效果Invention effect
根据本发明的一个方式,可以提供一种实现小型化的显示装置。另外,可以提供一种实现高颜色再现性的显示装置。另外,可以提供一种高清晰的显示装置。另外,可以提供一种可靠性高的显示装置。另外,可以提供一种功耗得到降低的显示装置。另外,可以提供一种新颖的显示装置。According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a miniaturized display device. In addition, a display device achieving high color reproducibility can be provided. In addition, a high-definition display device can be provided. In addition, a highly reliable display device can be provided. In addition, a display device with reduced power consumption can be provided. In addition, a novel display device can be provided.
注意,这些效果的记载不妨碍其他效果的存在。注意,本发明的一个方式并不需要具有所有上述效果。另外,可以从说明书、附图、权利要求书等的记载抽出上述以外的效果。Note that the description of these effects does not prevent the existence of other effects. Note that an aspect of the present invention does not necessarily have all of the above effects. In addition, effects other than those described above can be extracted from descriptions in the specification, drawings, claims, etc.
附图简要说明Brief description of the drawings
图1是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 1 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图2是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 2 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图3是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 3 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图4是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 4 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图5是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 5 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图6是说明半导体装置的平面布局的图。FIG. 6 is a diagram explaining the plan layout of the semiconductor device.
图7是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 7 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图8是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 8 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图9是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 9 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图10是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 10 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图11是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图12是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 12 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图13是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图14是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 14 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图15是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 15 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图16A至图16C是示出晶体管的电路图符号的图。16A to 16C are diagrams showing circuit diagram symbols of transistors.
图17是说明半导体装置的工作的时序图。FIG. 17 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图18是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 18 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图19是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 19 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图20是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 20 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图21是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 21 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图22是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 22 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图23是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 23 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图24是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 24 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图25是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 25 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图26是说明半导体装置的工作的时序图。FIG. 26 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图27是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 27 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图28是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 28 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图29是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 29 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图30是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 30 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图31是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 31 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图32是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 32 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图33是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 33 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图34是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 34 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图35是说明半导体装置的工作的时序图。FIG. 35 is a timing chart explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图36是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 36 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图37是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 37 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图38是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 38 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图39是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 39 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图40是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 40 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图41是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 41 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图42是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 42 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图43是说明半导体装置的工作的图。FIG. 43 is a diagram explaining the operation of the semiconductor device.
图44是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 44 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图45是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 45 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图46是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 46 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图47是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 47 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图48是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 48 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图49A及图49B是说明半导体装置的图。49A and 49B are diagrams illustrating a semiconductor device.
图50A及图50B是说明半导体装置的图。50A and 50B are diagrams illustrating a semiconductor device.
图51是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 51 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图52是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 52 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图53是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 53 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图54是说明半导体装置的图。FIG. 54 is a diagram explaining a semiconductor device.
图55A是说明显示装置的图。图55B1至图55B7是说明像素的结构例子的图。FIG. 55A is a diagram explaining the display device. 55B1 to 55B7 are diagrams illustrating structural examples of pixels.
图56是说明像素的结构例子的图。FIG. 56 is a diagram explaining an example of the structure of a pixel.
图57A1、图57A2、图57B及图57C是说明像素的结构例子的图。57A1, 57A2, 57B, and 57C are diagrams illustrating structural examples of pixels.
图58A至图58D是说明发光元件的结构例子的图。58A to 58D are diagrams illustrating structural examples of light-emitting elements.
图59A至图59D是示出发光元件的结构例子的图。59A to 59D are diagrams showing structural examples of light-emitting elements.
图60A至图60D是示出发光元件的结构例子的图。60A to 60D are diagrams showing structural examples of light-emitting elements.
图61A及图61B是示出发光元件的结构例子的图。61A and 61B are diagrams showing structural examples of light-emitting elements.
图62A至图62C是示出发光元件的结构例子的图。62A to 62C are diagrams showing structural examples of light-emitting elements.
图63A及图63B是显示装置的立体图。63A and 63B are perspective views of the display device.
图64A是显示装置的立体图。图64B是显示装置的平面图。Fig. 64A is a perspective view of the display device. Fig. 64B is a plan view of the display device.
图65是显示装置的立体图。Fig. 65 is a perspective view of the display device.
图66A是显示装置的立体图。图66B及图66C是示出导电层的一个例子的图。Fig. 66A is a perspective view of the display device. 66B and 66C are diagrams showing an example of a conductive layer.
图67是显示装置的立体图。Fig. 67 is a perspective view of the display device.
图68A及图68B是显示装置的立体图。68A and 68B are perspective views of the display device.
图69A至图69C是显示模块的立体示意图。69A to 69C are three-dimensional schematic views of the display module.
图70是示出显示装置的一个例子的截面图。FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
图71是示出显示装置的一个例子的截面图。FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
图72是示出显示装置的一个例子的截面图。FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
图73是示出显示装置的一个例子的截面图。FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
图74是示出显示装置的一个例子的截面图。FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
图75是示出显示装置的一个例子的截面图。FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a display device.
图76A是显示装置的方框图。图76B是说明显示装置的工作的时序图。Fig. 76A is a block diagram of a display device. FIG. 76B is a timing chart explaining the operation of the display device.
图77A是显示装置的方框图。图77B是说明显示装置的工作的时序图。Fig. 77A is a block diagram of a display device. FIG. 77B is a timing chart explaining the operation of the display device.
图78A是显示装置的方框图。图78B是说明显示装置的工作的时序图。Fig. 78A is a block diagram of a display device. FIG. 78B is a timing chart explaining the operation of the display device.
图79A是示出晶体管的结构例子的俯视图。图79B及图79C是示出晶体管的结构例子的截面图。FIG. 79A is a plan view showing a structural example of a transistor. 79B and 79C are cross-sectional views showing structural examples of transistors.
图80A是说明结晶结构的分类的图。图80B是说明CAAC-IGZO膜的XRD谱的图。图80C是说明CAAC-IGZO膜的纳米束电子衍射图案的图。FIG. 80A is a diagram explaining the classification of crystal structures. Figure 80B is a diagram illustrating the XRD spectrum of the CAAC-IGZO film. Figure 80C is a diagram illustrating the nanobeam electron diffraction pattern of the CAAC-IGZO film.
图81A至图81F是说明电子设备的一个例子的图。81A to 81F are diagrams illustrating an example of electronic equipment.
图82A至图82F是说明电子设备的一个例子的图。82A to 82F are diagrams illustrating an example of electronic equipment.
图83A及图83B是说明电子设备的一个例子的图。83A and 83B are diagrams illustrating an example of electronic equipment.
图84是说明电子设备的一个例子的图。FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of electronic equipment.
图85A至图85C是示出晶体管的Id-Vd特性的评价结果的图。85A to 85C are diagrams showing evaluation results of Id-Vd characteristics of transistors.
图86是示出晶体管的绝缘耐压的评价结果的图。FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the evaluation results of the dielectric breakdown voltage of the transistor.
实施发明的方式Mode of carrying out the invention
以下,参照附图说明实施方式。注意,实施方式可以以多个不同形式来实施,由此所属技术领域的普通技术人员可以很容易地理解一个事实,就是其方式和详细内容可以在不脱离其宗旨及范围的条件下被变换为各种各样的形式。因此,本发明不应该被解释为仅限定在以下实施方式所记载的内容中。Hereinafter, embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the embodiments can be implemented in a plurality of different forms, and those of ordinary skill in the art can easily understand the fact that the manner and details can be changed without departing from the spirit and scope thereof. Various forms. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited only to the contents described in the following embodiments.
在本说明书等中,半导体装置是指利用半导体特性的装置,是指包括半导体元件(晶体管、二极管、光电二极管等)的电路、包括该电路的装置等。此外,半导体装置是指能够利用半导体特性而发挥作用的所有装置。例如,作为半导体装置的例子,有集成电路、包括集成电路的芯片或封装中容纳有芯片的电子构件。此外,存储装置、显示装置、发光装置、照明装置以及电子设备等本身是半导体装置,且有时包括半导体装置。In this specification and others, a semiconductor device refers to a device that utilizes the characteristics of a semiconductor, and refers to a circuit including a semiconductor element (transistor, diode, photodiode, etc.), a device including the circuit, and the like. In addition, a semiconductor device refers to any device that can function by utilizing the characteristics of a semiconductor. For example, as examples of the semiconductor device, there are an integrated circuit, a chip including the integrated circuit, or an electronic component housing the chip in a package. In addition, storage devices, display devices, light-emitting devices, lighting devices, electronic equipment, etc. themselves are semiconductor devices, and sometimes include semiconductor devices.
此外,在本说明书等中,当记载为“X与Y连接”时,表示在本说明书等中公开了如下情况:X与Y电连接的情况;X与Y在功能上连接的情况;以及X与Y直接连接的情况。因此,不局限于附图或文中所示的连接关系,例如其他的连接关系也在附图或文中所记载的范围内记载。X、Y是对象物(例如,装置、元件、电路、布线、电极、端子、导电膜或层等)。In addition, in this specification and the like, when it is described as "X and Y are connected", it means that the following are disclosed in the specification and the like: X and Y are electrically connected; X and Y are functionally connected; and Directly connected to Y. Therefore, the invention is not limited to the connection relationships shown in the drawings or the text. For example, other connection relationships are also described within the scope of the drawings or the text. X and Y are objects (for example, devices, components, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films or layers, etc.).
作为X和Y电连接的情况的一个例子,可以在X和Y之间连接一个以上的能够电连接X和Y的元件(例如,开关、晶体管、电容元件、电感器、电阻元件、二极管、显示器件、发光器件或负载等)。As an example of a case where X and Y are electrically connected, more than one element capable of electrically connecting X and Y (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitive element, an inductor, a resistive element, a diode, a display device, light-emitting device or load, etc.).
作为X与Y在功能上连接的情况的一个例子,可以在X与Y之间连接有一个以上的能够在功能上连接X与Y的电路(例如,逻辑电路(反相器、NAND电路、NOR电路等)、信号转换电路(数字模拟转换电路、模拟数字转换电路、伽马校正电路等)、电位电平转换电路(电源电路(升压电路、降压电路等)、改变信号的电位电平的电平转移电路等)、电压源、电流源、切换电路、放大电路(能够增大信号振幅或电流量等的电路、运算放大器、差分放大电路、源极跟随电路、缓冲电路等)、信号产生电路、存储电路、控制电路等)。注意,例如,即使在X与Y之间夹有其他电路,当从X输出的信号传送到Y时,就可以说X与Y在功能上是连接着的。As an example of a case where X and Y are functionally connected, there may be connected between X and Y more than one circuit capable of functionally connecting X and Y (for example, a logic circuit (inverter, NAND circuit, NOR circuits, etc.), signal conversion circuits (digital-to-analog conversion circuits, analog-to-digital conversion circuits, gamma correction circuits, etc.), potential level conversion circuits (power supply circuits (boost circuits, buck circuits, etc.), changing the potential level of signals level shift circuits, etc.), voltage sources, current sources, switching circuits, amplifier circuits (circuits that can increase signal amplitude or current, operational amplifiers, differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signals Generating circuits, storage circuits, control circuits, etc.). Note that, for example, even if there are other circuits sandwiched between X and Y, when the signal output from X is transmitted to Y, X and Y can be said to be functionally connected.
此外,当明确地记载为“X与Y电连接”时,包括如下情况:X与Y电连接的情况(换言之,以中间夹有其他元件或其他电路的方式连接X与Y的情况);以及X与Y直接连接的情况(换言之,以中间不夹有其他元件或其他电路的方式连接X与Y的情况)。In addition, when it is clearly stated that "X and Y are electrically connected", it includes the following cases: the case where X and Y are electrically connected (in other words, the case where X and Y are connected with other components or other circuits sandwiched between them); and The case where X and Y are directly connected (in other words, the case where X and Y are connected without any other components or other circuits in between).
例如,可以表达为“X、Y、晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)与晶体管的漏极(或第二端子等)互相电连接,X、晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)、晶体管的漏极(或第二端子等)与Y依次电连接”。或者,可以表达为“晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)与X电连接,晶体管的漏极(或第二端子等)与Y电连接,X、晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)、晶体管的漏极(或第二端子等)与Y依次电连接”。或者,可以表达为“X通过晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)及晶体管的漏极(或第二端子等)与Y电连接,X、晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)、晶体管的漏极(或第二端子等)、Y依次设置”。通过使用与这种例子同样的表达方法规定电路结构中的连接顺序,可以区分晶体管的源极(或第一端子等)与漏极(或第二端子等)而决定技术范围。注意,这种表达方法是一个例子,不局限于上述表达方法。在此,X、Y是对象物(例如,装置、元件、电路、布线、电极、端子、导电膜或层等)。For example, it can be expressed as "X, Y, the source (or first terminal, etc.) of the transistor and the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor are electrically connected to each other, and X, the source (or first terminal, etc.) of the transistor , the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y in sequence." Or, it can be expressed as "the source (or first terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to X, the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y, and ), the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor and Y are electrically connected in sequence." Alternatively, it can be expressed as “X is electrically connected to Y through the source (or first terminal, etc.) of the transistor and the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor, and The drain (or second terminal, etc.) and Y of the transistor are set in order." By specifying the connection sequence in the circuit structure using the same expression method as in this example, the technical scope can be determined by distinguishing the source (or first terminal, etc.) and drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor. Note that this expression method is an example and is not limited to the above expression method. Here, X and Y are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films or layers, etc.).
此外,即使在电路图上独立的构成要素彼此电连接,也有时一个构成要素兼有多个构成要素的功能。例如,在布线的一部分用作电极时,一个导电膜兼有布线和电极的两个构成要素的功能。因此,本说明书中的“电连接”的范畴内还包括这种一个导电膜兼有多个构成要素的功能的情况。Furthermore, even if independent components are electrically connected to each other on the circuit diagram, one component may have the functions of multiple components. For example, when a part of the wiring is used as an electrode, one conductive film has the functions of both components of the wiring and the electrode. Therefore, the category of “electrical connection” in this specification also includes the case where one conductive film has the functions of a plurality of constituent elements.
在本说明书等中,“电容元件”例如可以包括具有高于0F的静电电容值的电路元件、具有高于0F的静电电容值的布线的区域、寄生电容或晶体管的栅极电容等。因此,在本说明书等中,“电容元件”不局限于包括一对电极及在该电极之间的介电体的电路元件,还包括产生在布线和布线之间的寄生电容或产生在晶体管的源极和漏极中的一个与栅极之间的栅极电容等。此外,“电容元件”、“寄生电容”或“栅极电容”等可以称为“电容器”等,与此相反,“电容器”可以称为“电容元件”、“寄生电容”或“栅极电容”等。此外,“电容器”的“一对电极”可以称为“一对导电体”、“一对导电区域”或“一对区域”等。静电电容值例如可以为0.05fF以上且10pF以下。此外,例如,还可以为1pF以上且10μF以下。In this specification and the like, the "capacitive element" may include, for example, a circuit element having an electrostatic capacitance value higher than 0F, a wiring region having an electrostatic capacitance value higher than 0F, a parasitic capacitance, a gate capacitance of a transistor, and the like. Therefore, in this specification and the like, a "capacitive element" is not limited to a circuit element including a pair of electrodes and a dielectric between the electrodes, but also includes parasitic capacitance generated between wirings or capacitance generated in a transistor. The gate capacitance between one of the source and drain electrodes and the gate, etc. In addition, "capacitive element", "parasitic capacitance" or "gate capacitance" etc. can be called "capacitor" etc., and conversely, "capacitor" can be called "capacitive element", "parasitic capacitance" or "gate capacitance". "wait. In addition, the "pair of electrodes" of the "capacitor" may be referred to as a "pair of conductors", a "pair of conductive regions", a "pair of regions", etc. The electrostatic capacitance value may be, for example, 0.05 fF or more and 10 pF or less. In addition, for example, it may be 1 pF or more and 10 μF or less.
在本说明书等中,晶体管包括栅极、源极以及漏极这三个端子。栅极用作控制流在源极与漏极之间的电流量的控制端子。用作源极或漏极的两个端子是晶体管的输入输出端子。根据晶体管的导电型(n沟道型或p沟道型)及对晶体管的三个端子施加的电位的高低,两个输入输出端子中的一方用作源极而另一方用作漏极。因此,在本说明书等中,“源极”和“漏极”可以相互调换。在本说明书等中,在说明晶体管的连接关系时,使用“源极和漏极中的一个”(第一电极或第一端子)或“源极和漏极中的另一个”(第二电极或第二端子)的表述。此外,根据晶体管的结构,有时除了上述三个端子以外还包括背栅极。在此情况下,在本说明书等中,有时将晶体管的栅极和背栅极中的一个称为第一栅极,将晶体管的栅极和背栅极的另一个称为第二栅极。并且,在相同晶体管中,有时可以将“栅极”与“背栅极”相互调换。此外,在晶体管包括三个以上的栅极时,在本说明书等中,有时将各栅极称为第一栅极、第二栅极或第三栅极等。In this specification and others, a transistor includes three terminals: a gate, a source, and a drain. The gate serves as a control terminal that controls the amount of current flowing between the source and drain. The two terminals used as source or drain are the input and output terminals of the transistor. Depending on the conductivity type of the transistor (n-channel type or p-channel type) and the level of potential applied to the three terminals of the transistor, one of the two input and output terminals serves as the source and the other serves as the drain. Therefore, in this specification and the like, "source" and "drain" may be interchanged with each other. In this specification and others, when describing the connection relationship of a transistor, "one of the source and the drain" (the first electrode or the first terminal) or "the other of the source and the drain" (the second electrode) is used. or second terminal) expression. In addition, depending on the structure of the transistor, a back gate may be included in addition to the above three terminals. In this case, in this specification and the like, one of the gate electrode and the back gate electrode of the transistor may be called a first gate electrode, and the other of the gate electrode and the back gate electrode of the transistor may be called a second gate electrode. In addition, in the same transistor, the "gate" and "back gate" can sometimes be interchanged. In addition, when a transistor includes three or more gates, each gate may be referred to as a first gate, a second gate, a third gate, etc. in this specification and the like.
此外,在本说明书等中,“节点”可以根据电路结构或器件结构等称为“端子”、“布线”、“电极”、“导电层”、“导电体”或“杂质区域”等。此外,“端子”或“布线”等可以称为“节点”。In addition, in this specification and the like, a "node" may be called a "terminal", "wiring", "electrode", "conductive layer", "conductor" or "impurity region" depending on the circuit structure or device structure. In addition, "terminals" or "wirings" etc. may be called "nodes".
此外,在本说明书等中,“第一”、“第二”或“第三”等序数词是为了避免构成要素的混淆而附加上的。因此,该序数词不限制构成要素的个数。此外,该序数词不限制构成要素的顺序。例如,本说明书等的实施方式之一中附有“第一”的构成要素有可能在其他的实施方式或权利要求书等中附有“第二”的构成要素。此外,例如,在本说明书等中,一个实施方式中的“第一”所指的构成要素有可能在其他实施方式或权利要求书等中被省略。In addition, in this specification and the like, ordinal numbers such as "first", "second", or "third" are added to avoid confusion of constituent elements. Therefore, this ordinal number does not limit the number of constituent elements. In addition, this ordinal word does not limit the order of the constituent elements. For example, a "first" component attached to one of the embodiments in this specification may be appended to a "second" component in another embodiment or claim. Furthermore, for example, in this specification and the like, a component referred to as "first" in one embodiment may be omitted in other embodiments or claims.
另外,在本说明书等中,为了方便起见,有时使用“上”、“下”、“上方”或“下方”等表示配置的词句以参照附图说明构成要素的位置关系。此外,构成要素的位置关系根据描述各结构的方向适当地改变。因此,不局限于说明书等中所说明的词句,根据情况可以适当地换词句。例如,在“位于导电体的顶面的绝缘体”的表述中,通过将所示的附图的方向旋转180度,也可以称为“位于导电体的底面的绝缘体”。In addition, in this specification and the like, for the sake of convenience, the positional relationship of the constituent elements may be described with reference to the drawings by using words such as "upper", "lower", "upper" or "lower" to indicate the arrangement. In addition, the positional relationship of the constituent elements is appropriately changed depending on the direction in which each structure is described. Therefore, it is not limited to the words and phrases described in the specification, etc., and the words and phrases may be appropriately changed depending on the circumstances. For example, in the expression "insulator located on the top surface of the conductor", by rotating the direction of the drawing shown by 180 degrees, it may also be called "insulator located on the bottom surface of the conductor".
此外,“上”及“下”这样的术语不限定于构成要素的位置关系为“正上”或“正下”且直接接触的情况。例如,关于“绝缘层A上的电极B”的表述,不一定必须在绝缘层A上直接接触地形成有电极B,也可以包括在绝缘层A与电极B之间包括其他构成要素的情况。In addition, the terms "upper" and "lower" are not limited to the case where the positional relationship of the constituent elements is "right above" or "right below" and they are in direct contact. For example, the expression "electrode B on insulating layer A" does not necessarily mean that electrode B is formed on insulating layer A in direct contact, and may include other components between insulating layer A and electrode B.
此外,在本说明书等中,“重叠”等术语不限定于构成要素的叠层顺序等的状态。例如,关于“与绝缘层A重叠的电极B”的表述,不一定必须在绝缘层A上形成有电极B,也可以包括在绝缘层A下形成有电极B的状态或在绝缘层A的右侧(或左侧)形成有电极B的状态等。In addition, in this specification and the like, terms such as "overlapping" are not limited to the state of the stacking order of the constituent elements. For example, the expression "electrode B overlapping with insulating layer A" does not necessarily mean that electrode B is formed on insulating layer A. It may also include a state in which electrode B is formed under insulating layer A or to the right of insulating layer A. The electrode B is formed on the side (or left side).
此外,在本说明书等中,“相邻”及“接近”这样的术语不限定于构成要素直接接触的情况。例如,关于“相邻于绝缘层A的电极B”的表述,不一定必须直接接触地形成有绝缘层A和电极B,也可以包括在绝缘层A与电极B之间包括其他构成要素的情况。In addition, in this specification and the like, the terms "adjacent" and "close" are not limited to the case where the constituent elements are in direct contact. For example, the expression "electrode B adjacent to insulating layer A" does not necessarily require that the insulating layer A and the electrode B are formed in direct contact, and may include other components between the insulating layer A and the electrode B. .
此外,在本说明书等中,根据状况,可以互相调换“膜”或“层”等词句。例如,有时可以将“导电层”变换为“导电膜”。例如,有时可以将“绝缘膜”变换为“绝缘层”。此外,根据状况,有时可以使用其他词句代替“膜”或“层”等词句。例如,有时可以将“导电层”或“导电膜”变换为“导电体”。此外,有时可以将“导电体”变换为“导电层”或“导电膜”。例如,有时可以将“绝缘层”或“绝缘膜”变换为“绝缘体”。此外,有时可以将“绝缘体”变换为“绝缘层”或“绝缘膜”。In addition, in this specification and the like, words such as "film" and "layer" may be interchanged depending on the situation. For example, "conductive layer" may sometimes be converted into "conductive film". For example, "insulating film" may sometimes be converted into "insulating layer". In addition, depending on the situation, other words and phrases can sometimes be used instead of words such as "membrane" or "layer". For example, "conductive layer" or "conductive film" may sometimes be converted into "conductor". In addition, "conductive body" may sometimes be converted into "conductive layer" or "conductive film". For example, "insulating layer" or "insulating film" may sometimes be converted into "insulator". In addition, "insulator" may sometimes be converted into "insulating layer" or "insulating film".
注意,在本说明书等中,“电极”、“布线”、“端子”等词句不在功能上限定其构成要素。例如,有时将“电极”用作“布线”的一部分,反之亦然。再者,“电极”或“布线”还包括多个“电极”或“布线”被形成为一体的情况等。此外,例如,有时将“端子”用作“布线”或“电极”的一部分,反之亦然。再者,“端子”的词句还包括多个“电极”、“布线”、“端子”等被形成为一体的情况等。因此,例如,“电极”可以为“布线”或“端子”的一部分。此外,例如,“端子”可以为“布线”或“电极”的一部分。此外,“电极”、“布线”、“端子”等的词句有时置换为“区域”等词句。Note that in this specification and the like, words such as "electrode", "wiring" and "terminal" do not functionally limit the constituent elements. For example, "electrodes" are sometimes used as part of "wiring" and vice versa. In addition, “electrode” or “wiring” also includes a case where a plurality of “electrodes” or “wiring” are formed into one body. Furthermore, for example, "terminal" is sometimes used as a part of "wiring" or "electrode" and vice versa. In addition, the term "terminal" also includes the case where a plurality of "electrodes", "wirings", "terminals", etc. are formed into one body. Thus, for example, an "electrode" may be part of a "wiring" or a "terminal". Furthermore, for example, a "terminal" may be a part of a "wiring" or an "electrode". In addition, words and phrases such as "electrode", "wiring" and "terminal" may be replaced by words and phrases such as "region".
在本说明书等中,根据状况,有时可以互相调换“布线”、“信号线”或“电源线”等词句。例如,有时可以将“布线”变换为“信号线”。此外,例如有时可以将“布线”变换为“电源线”。反之亦然,有时可以将“信号线”、“电源线”变换为“布线”。此外,有时可以将“电源线”变换为“信号线”。反之亦然,有时可以将“信号线”变换为“电源线”。此外,根据状况,有时可以将施加到布线的“电位”变换为“信号”。反之亦然,有时可以将“信号”变换为“电位”。In this manual, etc., the words "wiring", "signal line" or "power line" may be interchanged depending on the situation. For example, sometimes "wiring" can be transformed into "signal line". In addition, for example, "wiring" may be converted into "power line". Vice versa, sometimes "signal lines" and "power lines" can be transformed into "wiring". In addition, sometimes the "power line" can be converted into a "signal line". Vice versa, sometimes a "signal line" can be transformed into a "power line". In addition, depending on the situation, the "potential" applied to the wiring may be converted into a "signal". Vice versa, sometimes "signal" can be transformed into "potential".
另外,在本说明书等中,“开关”包括多个端子,且具有切换(选择)端子间的导通和非导通的功能。例如,在开关包括两个端子且该两个端子间导通的情况下,该开关处于“导通状态”或“开启状态”。另外,在该两个端子间非导通的情况下,该开关处于“非导通状态”或“关闭状态”。注意,“被切换为导通状态和非导通状态中的一个状态”或者“该开关维持导通状态和非导通状态中的一个状态”有时被称为“控制导通状态”。In addition, in this specification and the like, a "switch" includes a plurality of terminals, and has a function of switching (selecting) conduction or non-conduction between terminals. For example, when a switch includes two terminals and there is conduction between the two terminals, the switch is in a "conducting state" or an "on state." In addition, when there is no conduction between the two terminals, the switch is in a "non-conduction state" or a "closed state". Note that "being switched to one of a conducting state and a non-conducting state" or "the switch maintains one of a conducting state and a non-conducting state" is sometimes referred to as a "controlled conduction state".
就是说,开关是指具有控制是否使电流流过的功能的元件。或者,开关是指具有选择并切换电流路径的功能的元件。作为一个例子,可以使用电开关或机械开关等。换言之,开关只要可以控制电流,就不局限于特定的元件。That is, a switch is a component that has the function of controlling whether or not current flows. Alternatively, a switch refers to a component that has the function of selecting and switching a current path. As an example, an electrical switch or a mechanical switch or the like may be used. In other words, switches are not limited to specific components as long as they can control current.
作为开关的一个例子,有晶体管(例如双极晶体管、MOS(Metal OxideSemiconductor:金属氧化物半导体)晶体管等)、二极管(例如PN二极管、PIN二极管、肖特基二极管、金属-绝缘体-金属(MIM;Metal Insulator Metal)二极管、金属-绝缘体-半导体(MIS;Metal Insulator Semiconductor)二极管、二极管接法的晶体管等)或者组合这类元件的逻辑电路等。当作为开关使用晶体管时,晶体管的“导通状态”是指晶体管的源电极与漏电极在电性上短路的状态。另外,晶体管的“非导通状态”是指晶体管的源电极与漏电极在电性上断开的状态。当仅将晶体管用作开关时,对晶体管的极性(导电型)没有特别的限制。Examples of switches include transistors (such as bipolar transistors, MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor: Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, etc.), diodes (such as PN diodes, PIN diodes, Schottky diodes, metal-insulator-metal (MIM); Metal Insulator Metal) diodes, metal-insulator-semiconductor (MIS; Metal Insulator Semiconductor) diodes, diode-connected transistors, etc.) or logic circuits that combine such components. When a transistor is used as a switch, the "on state" of the transistor refers to a state in which the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor are electrically short-circuited. In addition, the “non-conducting state” of a transistor refers to a state in which the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor are electrically disconnected. When using a transistor only as a switch, there is no particular restriction on the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor.
作为机械开关的例子,可以举出利用了MEMS(微电子机械系统)技术的开关。该开关具有以机械方式可动的电极,通过移动该电极来选择导通或非导通。Examples of mechanical switches include switches utilizing MEMS (microelectromechanical systems) technology. The switch has a mechanically movable electrode that is moved to select conduction or non-conduction.
在本说明书中,“平行”是指两条直线形成的角度为-10°以上且10°以下的状态。因此,也包括该角度为-5°以上且5°以下的状态。”大致平行”是指两条直线形成的角度为-30°以上且30°以下的状态。此外,“垂直”是指两条直线形成的角度为80°以上且100°以下的状态。因此,也包括该角度为85°以上且95°以下的状态。”大致垂直”是指两条直线形成的角度为60°以上且120°以下的状态。In this specification, "parallel" refers to a state in which the angle formed by two straight lines is -10° or more and 10° or less. Therefore, the state where the angle is -5° or more and 5° or less is also included. "Approximately parallel" refers to a state where the angle formed by two straight lines is -30° or more and 30° or less. In addition, "vertical" refers to a state where the angle formed by two straight lines is 80° or more and 100° or less. Therefore, the state where the angle is 85° or more and 95° or less is also included. "Approximately perpendicular" refers to a state where the angle formed by two straight lines is 60° or more and 120° or less.
此外,在本说明书等中,除非特别叙述,在关于计数值及计量值提到“同一”、“相同”、“相等”或“均匀”(包括它们的同义词)等的情况下,它们包括±20%的误差。In addition, in this specification and the like, unless otherwise stated, when "the same", "identical", "equal" or "uniform" (including their synonyms) are mentioned regarding count values and measurement values, they include ± 20% error.
参照附图说明本说明书所记载的实施方式。注意,实施方式可以以多个不同形式来实施,由此所属技术领域的普通技术人员可以很容易地理解一个事实,就是其方式和详细内容可以在不脱离其宗旨及范围的条件下被变换为各种各样的形式。因此,本发明不应该被解释为仅限定在实施方式所记载的内容中。注意,在实施方式的发明的结构中,有时在不同的附图中共同使用相同的附图标记来表示相同的部分或具有相同功能的部分,而省略反复说明。此外,当表示具有相同功能的部分时有时使用相同的阴影线,而不特别附加附图标记。为了明确起见,在立体图或俯视图等中,有时省略部分构成要素的图示。The embodiment described in this specification will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the embodiments can be implemented in a plurality of different forms, and those of ordinary skill in the art can easily understand the fact that the manner and details can be changed without departing from the spirit and scope thereof. Various forms. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited only to the description of the embodiments. Note that in the structure of the invention according to the embodiment, the same reference numerals may be commonly used in different drawings to denote the same parts or parts having the same functions, and repeated descriptions may be omitted. In addition, when indicating parts having the same function, the same hatching is sometimes used without specifically attaching a reference numeral. For the sake of clarity, illustration of some components may be omitted in perspective views, plan views, etc.
在本说明书的附图等中,为便于清楚地说明,有时夸大表示大小、层的厚度或区域。因此,并不局限于附图中的尺寸或纵横比等。此外,在附图中,示意性地示出理想的例子,因此本发明不局限于附图所示的形状或数值等。例如,可以包括因噪声或定时偏差等所引起的信号、电压或电流的不均匀等。In the drawings and the like of this specification, the size, thickness of a layer, or area may be exaggerated for clarity of explanation. Therefore, it is not limited to the dimensions, aspect ratio, etc. in the drawings. In addition, in the drawings, ideal examples are schematically shown, and therefore the present invention is not limited to the shapes, numerical values, etc. shown in the drawings. For example, this may include unevenness of signals, voltages, or currents caused by noise or timing deviations.
此外,有时在根据本说明书的附图等中附上表示X方向、Y方向以及Z方向的箭头。在本说明书等中,“X方向”是指沿着X轴的方向,除了明确指出的情况以外,有时不区分正方向和反方向。“Y方向”及“Z方向”也与“X方向”相同。另外,X方向、Y方向以及Z方向是彼此交叉的方向。更具体而言,X方向、Y方向以及Z方向是彼此正交的方向。在本说明书等中,有时将X方向、Y方向和Z方向中的一个称为“第一方向”。此外,有时将其他另一个称为“第二方向”。另外,有时将剩下的一个称为“第三方向”。In addition, arrows indicating the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction may be attached to the drawings and the like according to this specification. In this specification and others, the "X direction" refers to the direction along the X-axis, and unless otherwise specified, the forward direction and the reverse direction may not be distinguished in some cases. "Y direction" and "Z direction" are also the same as "X direction". In addition, the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are directions that cross each other. More specifically, the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction are directions orthogonal to each other. In this specification and the like, one of the X direction, the Y direction, and the Z direction may be referred to as the "first direction." In addition, the other is sometimes referred to as the "second direction". In addition, the remaining one is sometimes called the "third direction".
在本说明书等中,在多个构成要素使用同一符号并且需要区分它们时,有时对符号附加“A”、“b”、“_1”、“[n]”、“[m,n]”等用于识别的符号。In this specification, etc., when the same symbol is used for multiple components and it is necessary to distinguish them, "A", "b", "_1", "[n]", "[m, n]", etc. may be added to the symbol. Symbols used for identification.
(实施方式1)(Embodiment 1)
说明本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A。可以将本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A例如用于显示装置的像素。A semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used, for example, in a pixel of a display device.
<结构例子><Structure example>
图1示出半导体装置100A的电路结构例子。半导体装置100A包括像素电路51A及发光元件61。像素电路51A包括晶体管M1至晶体管M8及电容器C1至电容器C3。在本实施方式等中,除非特别叙述,晶体管M1至晶体管M8为增强型(常关闭型)的n沟道型场效应晶体管。因此,其阈值电压(也称为“Vth”)大于0V。FIG. 1 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100A. The semiconductor device 100A includes a pixel circuit 51A and a light-emitting element 61 . The pixel circuit 51A includes transistors M1 to M8 and capacitors C1 to C3. In this embodiment and others, unless otherwise stated, the transistors M1 to M8 are enhancement-type (normally-off) n-channel field effect transistors. Therefore, its threshold voltage (also called "Vth") is greater than 0V.
晶体管M1的栅极与布线GLa电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线DL电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M2的栅极电连接。晶体管M1具有选择使晶体管M2的栅极与布线DL间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M1 is electrically connected to the wiring GLa, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring DL, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M2. The transistor M1 has a function of selecting whether the gate of the transistor M2 and the wiring DL are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
此外,晶体管M2的栅极与电容器C1的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线101电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C1的另一个端子电连接。另外,晶体管M2包括背栅极。晶体管M2的背栅极与电容器C2的一个端子电连接。此外,电容器C2的另一个端子与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接。Furthermore, the gate of the transistor M2 is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C1, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 101, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C1. In addition, transistor M2 includes a back gate. The back gate of transistor M2 is electrically connected to one terminal of capacitor C2. In addition, the other terminal of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M2.
晶体管M3的栅极与布线GLb电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与电容器C1的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C1的另一个端子电连接。晶体管M3具有选择使晶体管M2的栅极与源极间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M3 is electrically connected to the wiring GLb, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C1, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C1. The transistor M3 has a function of selecting whether the gate and the source of the transistor M2 are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
晶体管M4的栅极与布线GLb电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线102电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C2的一个端子电连接。晶体管M4具有选择使布线102与电容器C2的一个端子间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M4 is electrically connected to the wiring GLb, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 102, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C2. The transistor M4 has a function of selecting whether the wiring 102 and one terminal of the capacitor C2 are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
晶体管M5的栅极与电容器C3的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接。此外,晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C3的另一个端子及发光元件61的一个端子(例如,阳极端子)电连接。此外,发光元件61的另一个端子(例如,阴极端子)与布线104电连接。The gate of the transistor M5 is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C3, and one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2. In addition, the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M5 is electrically connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C3 and one terminal (eg, anode terminal) of the light emitting element 61 . In addition, the other terminal (eg, cathode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61 is electrically connected to the wiring 104 .
晶体管M6的栅极与布线GLa电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103电连接。晶体管M6具有选择使晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M6 is electrically connected to the wiring GLa, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 103. The transistor M6 has a function of selecting whether the other of the source and drain of the transistor M2 and the wiring 103 is in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
晶体管M7的栅极与布线GLc电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线102电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M5的栅极电连接。晶体管M7具有选择使晶体管M5的栅极与布线102间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M7 is electrically connected to the wiring GLC, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 102, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M5. The transistor M7 has a function of selecting whether the gate of the transistor M5 and the wiring 102 are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
晶体管M8的栅极与布线GLd电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与晶体管M5的栅极电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103电连接。晶体管M8具有选择使晶体管M5的栅极与布线103间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M8 is electrically connected to the wiring GLd, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M5, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 103. The transistor M8 has a function of selecting whether the gate of the transistor M5 and the wiring 103 are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
另外,电容器C1的另一个端子、电容器C2的另一个端子、晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个、晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的另一个、晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的一个以及晶体管M6的源极和漏极中的一个电连接的区域也被称为节点ND1。In addition, the other terminal of the capacitor C1, the other terminal of the capacitor C2, the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2, the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M3, the source and the drain of the transistor M5 The region where one of the source and the drain of the transistor M6 are electrically connected is also referred to as node ND1.
另外,电容器C2的一个端子、晶体管M2的背栅极及晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接的区域也被称为节点ND2。In addition, a region in which one terminal of the capacitor C2, the back gate of the transistor M2, and the other one of the source and drain of the transistor M4 are electrically connected is also referred to as node ND2.
另外,晶体管M1的源极和漏极中的另一个、晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的一个、电容器C1的一个端子及晶体管M2的栅极电连接的区域也被称为节点ND3。In addition, a region where the other of the source and drain of the transistor M1, one of the source and the drain of the transistor M3, one terminal of the capacitor C1, and the gate of the transistor M2 are electrically connected is also called node ND3.
另外,晶体管M5的栅极、电容器C3的一个端子、晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的另一个以及晶体管M8的源极和漏极中的一个电连接的区域也被称为节点ND4。In addition, a region where the gate of the transistor M5, one terminal of the capacitor C3, the other of the source and drain of the transistor M7, and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M8 are electrically connected is also called node ND4.
电容器C1具有在节点ND3处于浮动状态时保持晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M2的栅极的电位差的功能。电容器C2具有在节点ND2处于浮动状态时保持晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M2的背栅极的电位差的功能。电容器C3具有在节点ND4处于浮动状态时保持晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M5的栅极的电位差的功能。The capacitor C1 has a function of maintaining the potential difference between the other one of the source and drain of the transistor M2 and the gate of the transistor M2 when the node ND3 is in the floating state. The capacitor C2 has a function of maintaining a potential difference between the other one of the source and drain of the transistor M2 and the back gate of the transistor M2 when the node ND2 is in a floating state. The capacitor C3 has a function of maintaining the potential difference between the other one of the source and drain of the transistor M5 and the gate of the transistor M5 when the node ND4 is in the floating state.
本发明的一个方式的像素电路51A可以使用包含各种半导体的晶体管。例如,可以使用在沟道形成区域中包含单晶半导体、多晶半导体、微晶半导体或非晶半导体的晶体管。注意,不局限于主要成分由单一元素构成的单个半导体(例如,硅(Si)或锗(Ge)),可以使用化合物半导体(例如,硅锗(SiGe)或砷化镓(GaAs))或氧化物半导体等。The pixel circuit 51A according to one embodiment of the present invention can use transistors including various semiconductors. For example, a transistor including a single crystal semiconductor, a polycrystalline semiconductor, a microcrystalline semiconductor, or an amorphous semiconductor in the channel formation region may be used. Note that the invention is not limited to a single semiconductor whose main component is composed of a single element (for example, silicon (Si) or germanium (Ge)). A compound semiconductor (for example, silicon germanium (SiGe) or gallium arsenide (GaAs)) or an oxide semiconductor may be used. Material semiconductors, etc.
另外,在本实施方式等中,示出使用n沟道型晶体管构成半导体装置100A的例子,但是本发明的一个方式不局限于此。构成半导体装置100A的晶体管的一部分或全部也可以使用p沟道型晶体管。In addition, in this embodiment and the like, an example is shown in which the semiconductor device 100A is configured using n-channel transistors, but one aspect of the present invention is not limited to this. Some or all of the transistors constituting the semiconductor device 100A may use p-channel transistors.
作为一个例子,图2示出构成像素电路51A的晶体管中将p沟道型晶体管用作晶体管M6至晶体管M8的半导体装置100A的电路结构例子。在图2所示的电路结构中,晶体管M6的栅极与布线GLe电连接。As an example, FIG. 2 shows an example of the circuit structure of a semiconductor device 100A using p-channel transistors as transistors M6 to M8 among the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51A. In the circuit structure shown in FIG. 2 , the gate of the transistor M6 is electrically connected to the wiring GLe.
另外,作为本发明的一个方式的像素电路51A中可以使用各种结构的晶体管。例如,可以使用平面型、FIN(鳍)型、TRI-GATE(三栅)型、顶栅型、底栅型或双栅型(在沟道上下配置有栅极的结构)等各种结构的晶体管。另外,作为本发明的一个方式的晶体管可以使用MOS型晶体管、接合型晶体管或双极晶体管等。In addition, transistors of various structures can be used in the pixel circuit 51A as one embodiment of the present invention. For example, various structures such as planar type, FIN (fin) type, TRI-GATE (tri-gate) type, top gate type, bottom gate type, or double gate type (structure with gates arranged above and below the channel) can be used. transistor. In addition, as a transistor according to one embodiment of the present invention, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used.
例如,作为构成像素电路51A的晶体管,优选使用OS晶体管(在形成沟道的半导体层中包含氧化物半导体的晶体管。氧化物半导体的带隙为2eV以上,由此关态电流极少。For example, as the transistor constituting the pixel circuit 51A, it is preferable to use an OS transistor (a transistor including an oxide semiconductor in a semiconductor layer forming a channel. The band gap of the oxide semiconductor is 2 eV or more, so the off-state current is extremely small.
室温下的每沟道宽度1μm的OS晶体管的关态电流值可以为1aA(1×10-18A)以下、1zA(1×10-21A)以下或1yA(1×10-24A)以下。注意,室温下的每沟道宽度1μm的Si晶体管(在形成沟道的半导体层中包含硅的晶体管)的关态电流值为1fA(1×10-15A)以上且1pA(1×10-12A)以下。因此,也可以说,OS晶体管的关态电流比Si晶体管的关态电流低10位左右。The off-state current value of an OS transistor with a channel width of 1 μm at room temperature can be below 1aA (1×10 -18 A), below 1zA (1×10 -21 A), or below 1yA (1×10 -24 A) . Note that the off-state current value of a Si transistor (a transistor containing silicon in the semiconductor layer forming the channel) of 1 μm per channel width at room temperature is 1 fA (1×10 -15 A) or more and 1 pA (1×10 - 12 A) below. Therefore, it can also be said that the off-state current of the OS transistor is about 10 bits lower than that of the Si transistor.
当作为构成像素电路51A的晶体管使用OS晶体管时,可以长期间保持写入到各节点的电荷。例如在显示不需要按每个帧进行改写的静态图像的情况下,即使停止外围驱动电路的工作,也可以继续显示图像。这种在显示静态图像时停止外围驱动电路的工作的驱动方法也被称为“空转停止(IDS:idling stop)驱动”。通过进行空转停止驱动,可以降低显示装置的功耗。When an OS transistor is used as a transistor constituting the pixel circuit 51A, charges written to each node can be retained for a long period of time. For example, when displaying a static image that does not need to be rewritten for each frame, the image can be continued to be displayed even if the operation of the peripheral drive circuit is stopped. This driving method of stopping the operation of the peripheral driving circuit while displaying a static image is also called "idling stop (IDS: idling stop) driving". By performing idling stop driving, the power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
另外,即使在高温环境下,OS晶体管的关态电流也几乎不增加。具体而言,即使在室温以上且200℃以下的环境温度下,OS晶体管的关态电流也几乎不增加。此外,即使在高温环境下,OS晶体管的通态电流也不容易下降。包括OS晶体管的半导体装置即使在高温环境下也稳定地工作并具有高可靠性。In addition, even in a high-temperature environment, the off-state current of the OS transistor hardly increases. Specifically, even at ambient temperatures above room temperature and below 200°C, the off-state current of the OS transistor hardly increases. In addition, even in a high-temperature environment, the on-state current of the OS transistor does not decrease easily. Semiconductor devices including OS transistors operate stably and have high reliability even in high-temperature environments.
另外,在OS晶体管中,源极和漏极之间的绝缘耐压很高。通过作为构成像素电路51A的晶体管使用OS晶体管,在电位Va与电位Vc的电位差很大的情况下也工作稳定,由此OS晶体管可以实现可靠性良好的半导体装置。尤其是,优选对晶体管M2和晶体管M5中的一方或双方使用OS晶体管。In addition, in OS transistors, the insulation withstand voltage between the source and drain is very high. By using the OS transistor as the transistor constituting the pixel circuit 51A, the OS transistor can operate stably even when the potential difference between the potential Va and the potential Vc is large. This allows the OS transistor to realize a highly reliable semiconductor device. In particular, it is preferable to use an OS transistor for one or both of the transistor M2 and the transistor M5.
OS晶体管的半导体层例如优选包含铟、M(M为选自镓、铝、硅、硼、钇、锡、铜、钒、铍、钛、铁、镍、锗、锆、钼、镧、铈、钕、铪、钽、钨和镁中的一种或多种)和锌。尤其是,M优选为选自铝、镓、钇及锡中的一种或多种。The semiconductor layer of the OS transistor preferably contains, for example, indium, M (M is selected from the group consisting of gallium, aluminum, silicon, boron, yttrium, tin, copper, vanadium, beryllium, titanium, iron, nickel, germanium, zirconium, molybdenum, lanthanum, cerium, One or more of neodymium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten and magnesium) and zinc. In particular, M is preferably one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, yttrium and tin.
尤其是,作为半导体层,优选使用包含铟(In)、镓(Ga)及锌(Zn)的氧化物(也记载为“IGZO”)。或者,作为半导体层,也可以使用包含铟(In)、铝(Al)及锌(Zn)的氧化物(也记载为“IAZO”)。或者,作为半导体层,也可以使用包含铟(In)、铝(Al)、镓(Ga)及锌(Zn)的氧化物(也记载为“IAGZO”)。In particular, as the semiconductor layer, it is preferable to use an oxide (also described as "IGZO") containing indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn). Alternatively, as the semiconductor layer, an oxide (also described as "IAZO") containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), and zinc (Zn) may be used. Alternatively, as the semiconductor layer, an oxide (also described as "IAGZO") containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn) may be used.
在半导体层使用In-M-Zn氧化物时,该In-M-Zn氧化物中的In的原子个数比优选为M的原子个数比以上。作为这种In-M-Zn氧化物的金属元素的原子个数比,例如可以举出In:M:Zn=1:1:1或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=1:1:1.2或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=1:3:2或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=1:3:4或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=2:1:3或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=3:1:2或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=4:2:3或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=4:2:4.1或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=5:1:3或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=5:1:6或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=5:1:7或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=5:1:8或其附近的组成、In:M:Zn=6:1:6或其附近的组成或者In:M:Zn=5:2:5或其附近的组成等。注意,附近的组成包括所希望的原子个数比的±30%的范围。When an In-M-Zn oxide is used for the semiconductor layer, the atomic number ratio of In in the In-M-Zn oxide is preferably equal to or greater than the atomic number ratio of M. Examples of the atomic number ratio of the metal elements in such an In-M-Zn oxide include a composition of In:M:Zn=1:1:1 or a composition close thereto, In:M:Zn=1:1: 1.2 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 1: 3: 2 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 1: 3: 4 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 2: 1 : 3 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 3: 1: 2 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 4: 2: 3 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 4: 2: 4.1 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 5: 1: 3 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 5: 1: 6 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 5 : 1:7 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 5: 1: 8 or a composition near it, In: M: Zn = 6: 1: 6 or a composition near it, or In: M: Zn = 5:2:5 or its nearby composition, etc. Note that the nearby composition includes a range of ±30% of the desired atomic number ratio.
例如,当记载为原子个数比为In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3或其附近的组成时包括如下情况:In的原子个数比为4时,Ga的原子个数比为1以上且3以下,Zn的原子个数比为2以上且4以下。此外,当记载为原子个数比为In:Ga:Zn=5:1:6或其附近的组成时包括如下情况:In的原子个数比为5时,Ga的原子个数比大于0.1且为2以下,Zn的原子个数比为5以上且7以下。此外,当记载为原子个数比为In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1或其附近的组成时包括如下情况:In的原子个数比为1时,Ga的原子个数比大于0.1且为2以下,Zn的原子个数比大于0.1且为2以下。For example, when the atomic number ratio is described as In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3 or a composition close to it, it includes the following cases: when the atomic number ratio of In is 4, the atomic number ratio of Ga is 1 or more and 3 or less, and the atomic number ratio of Zn is 2 or more and 4 or less. In addition, when the composition is described as having an atomic number ratio of In:Ga:Zn=5:1:6 or thereabouts, it includes the following cases: when the atomic number ratio of In is 5, the atomic number ratio of Ga is greater than 0.1 and is 2 or less, and the atomic number ratio of Zn is 5 or more and 7 or less. In addition, when the composition is described as having an atomic number ratio of In:Ga:Zn=1:1:1 or thereabouts, it includes the following cases: when the atomic number ratio of In is 1, the atomic number ratio of Ga is greater than 0.1 and is 2 or less, and the atomic number ratio of Zn is greater than 0.1 and is 2 or less.
注意,晶体管M2具有控制流过发光元件61的电流Ie的量的功能。就是说,晶体管M2具有控制发光元件61的发光量的功能。因此,在本说明书等中,晶体管M2有时被称为“驱动晶体管”。Note that the transistor M2 has a function of controlling the amount of current Ie flowing through the light-emitting element 61 . That is, the transistor M2 has a function of controlling the amount of light emitted by the light emitting element 61 . Therefore, in this specification and the like, the transistor M2 is sometimes called a "driving transistor".
另外,晶体管M5具有切换晶体管M2与发光元件61间的导通和非导通的功能。在晶体管M5处于关闭状态时发光元件61猝灭,在晶体管M5处于开启状态时发光元件61能够发光。因此,有时将晶体管M5称为“发光晶体管”。为了使驱动晶体管所决定的电流量确实地流过发光元件61,晶体管M5需要无论源极电位及漏极电位的值如何都一定处于开启状态。In addition, the transistor M5 has a function of switching conduction and non-conduction between the transistor M2 and the light-emitting element 61 . When the transistor M5 is in the off state, the light emitting element 61 is quenched, and when the transistor M5 is in the on state, the light emitting element 61 can emit light. Therefore, transistor M5 is sometimes called a "light-emitting transistor." In order for the amount of current determined by the driving transistor to reliably flow through the light-emitting element 61, the transistor M5 must be in an on state regardless of the values of the source potential and the drain potential.
构成像素电路51A的晶体管中的晶体管M1、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6、晶体管M7及晶体管M8被用作开关。因此,半导体装置100A可以由图3表示。Among the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51A, the transistor M1 , the transistor M3 , the transistor M4 , the transistor M6 , the transistor M7 , and the transistor M8 are used as switches. Therefore, the semiconductor device 100A may be represented by FIG. 3 .
另外,晶体管M5也被用作开关。因此,半导体装置100A也可以由图4表示。可以使用能够实现开关的功能的元件而代替晶体管M1及晶体管M3至晶体管M8。In addition, transistor M5 is also used as a switch. Therefore, the semiconductor device 100A can also be represented by FIG. 4 . Elements capable of realizing the function of a switch may be used instead of the transistor M1 and the transistors M3 to M8.
构成像素电路51A的晶体管也可以为包括背栅极的晶体管。通过设置背栅极,在晶体管的外部产生的电场不容易影响到沟道形成区域,由此使用该晶体管的半导体装置的工作得到稳定,而可以提高半导体装置的可靠性。另外,通过控制背栅极的电位,可以改变晶体管的阈值电压。The transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51A may be transistors including a back gate. By providing the back gate, the electric field generated outside the transistor is less likely to affect the channel formation region, thereby stabilizing the operation of the semiconductor device using the transistor and improving the reliability of the semiconductor device. In addition, by controlling the potential of the back gate, the threshold voltage of the transistor can be changed.
图5示出不但晶体管M2而且晶体管M1及晶体管M3至晶体管M8都为包括背栅极的晶体管的半导体装置100A的电路结构例子。图5示出晶体管M1及晶体管M3至晶体管M8的每一个的栅极与背栅极电连接的例子。但是,不需要构成半导体装置的所有晶体管都设置有背栅极。FIG. 5 shows a circuit structure example of the semiconductor device 100A in which not only the transistor M2 but also the transistor M1 and the transistors M3 to M8 are transistors including a back gate. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the gate and back gate of the transistor M1 and each of the transistors M3 to M8 are electrically connected. However, it is not necessary that all transistors constituting the semiconductor device be provided with back gates.
另外,也可以不使栅极与背栅极电连接并向背栅极供应任意电位。注意,供应到背栅极的电位不局限于固定电位。供应到构成半导体装置的晶体管的背栅极的电位可以按每个晶体管不同或相同。In addition, the gate electrode and the back gate electrode may not be electrically connected and an arbitrary potential may be supplied to the back gate electrode. Note that the potential supplied to the back gate is not limited to a fixed potential. The potential supplied to the back gates of the transistors constituting the semiconductor device may be different or the same for each transistor.
图6示出图5所示的半导体装置100A的平面布局图。在图6所示的平面布局图中,在布线GLa上设置有晶体管M1的半导体层111。布线GLa和半导体层111具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,布线GLa的一部分被用作晶体管M1的背栅极。导电体112被用作晶体管M1的栅极在接触孔113中与布线GLa电连接。FIG. 6 shows a plan layout of the semiconductor device 100A shown in FIG. 5 . In the plan layout shown in FIG. 6 , the semiconductor layer 111 of the transistor M1 is provided on the wiring GLa. The wiring GLa and the semiconductor layer 111 have regions overlapping each other. In addition, a part of the wiring GLa is used as the back gate of the transistor M1. The conductor 112 is used as a gate of the transistor M1 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLa in the contact hole 113 .
此外,在布线GLb上设置有晶体管M3的半导体层114。布线GLb和半导体层114具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,布线GLb的一部分被用作晶体管M3的背栅极。导电体115被用作晶体管M3的栅极在接触孔116中与布线GLb电连接。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 114 of the transistor M3 is provided on the wiring GLb. The wiring GLb and the semiconductor layer 114 have regions overlapping each other. In addition, a part of the wiring GLb is used as the back gate of the transistor M3. The conductor 115 is used as a gate of the transistor M3 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLb in the contact hole 116 .
此外,在布线GLb上设置有晶体管M4的半导体层117。布线GLb和半导体层117具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,布线GLb的一部分被用作晶体管M4的背栅极。导电体118被用作晶体管M4的栅极在接触孔119中与布线GLb电连接。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 117 of the transistor M4 is provided on the wiring GLb. The wiring GLb and the semiconductor layer 117 have regions overlapping each other. In addition, a part of the wiring GLb is used as the back gate of the transistor M4. The conductor 118 is used as a gate of the transistor M4 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLb in the contact hole 119 .
此外,在布线GLa上设置有晶体管M6的半导体层121。布线GLa和半导体层121具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,布线GLa的一部分被用作晶体管M6的背栅极。导电体122被用作晶体管M6的栅极在接触孔123中与布线GLa电连接。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 121 of the transistor M6 is provided on the wiring GLa. The wiring GLa and the semiconductor layer 121 have regions overlapping each other. In addition, a part of the wiring GLa is used as the back gate of the transistor M6. The conductor 122 is used as a gate of the transistor M6 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLa in the contact hole 123 .
此外,在布线GLc上设置有晶体管M7的半导体层124。布线GLc和半导体层124具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,布线GLc的一部分被用作晶体管M7的背栅极。导电体125被用作晶体管M7的栅极在接触孔126中与布线GLc电连接。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 124 of the transistor M7 is provided on the wiring GLC. The wiring GLC and the semiconductor layer 124 have regions overlapping each other. In addition, a part of the wiring GLC is used as the back gate of the transistor M7. The conductor 125 is used as a gate of the transistor M7 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLC in the contact hole 126 .
此外,在布线GLd上设置有晶体管M8的半导体层127。布线GLd和半导体层127具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,布线GLd的一部分被用作晶体管M8的背栅极。导电体128被用作晶体管M8的栅极在接触孔129中与布线GLd电连接。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 127 of the transistor M8 is provided on the wiring GLd. The wiring GLd and the semiconductor layer 127 have regions overlapping each other. In addition, a part of the wiring GLd is used as the back gate of the transistor M8. The conductor 128 is used as a gate of the transistor M8 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLd in the contact hole 129 .
晶体管M1的源极和漏极中的一个通过导电层131与布线DL电连接。晶体管M1的源极和漏极中的另一个通过导电层132与导电层133电连接。One of the source and the drain of the transistor M1 is electrically connected to the wiring DL through the conductive layer 131 . The other one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor M1 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 133 through the conductive layer 132 .
此外,在导电层136上设置有晶体管M2的半导体层134。导电层136和半导体层134具有彼此重叠的区域。导电层136的一部分被用作晶体管M2的背栅极。此外,与导电层133电连接的导电层135被用作晶体管M2的栅极。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 134 of the transistor M2 is provided on the conductive layer 136 . The conductive layer 136 and the semiconductor layer 134 have regions overlapping each other. A portion of conductive layer 136 is used as the back gate of transistor M2. Furthermore, the conductive layer 135 electrically connected to the conductive layer 133 is used as a gate electrode of the transistor M2.
晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的一个通过导电层137与布线101电连接。晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个与导电层138电连接。导电层133与导电层138重叠的区域被用作电容器C1。导电层136与导电层138重叠的区域被用作电容器C2。One of the source and the drain of the transistor M2 is electrically connected to the wiring 101 through the conductive layer 137 . The other one of the source and drain of transistor M2 is electrically connected to conductive layer 138 . The area where the conductive layer 133 and the conductive layer 138 overlap is used as the capacitor C1. The area where conductive layer 136 overlaps conductive layer 138 is used as capacitor C2.
此外,在导电层141上设置有晶体管M5的半导体层142。导电层141和半导体层142具有彼此重叠的区域。导电层141的一部分被用作晶体管M5的背栅极。导电体143被用作晶体管M5的栅极,在接触孔144中与布线GLc电连接。Furthermore, the semiconductor layer 142 of the transistor M5 is provided on the conductive layer 141 . The conductive layer 141 and the semiconductor layer 142 have regions overlapping each other. A portion of the conductive layer 141 is used as the back gate of the transistor M5. The conductor 143 is used as the gate of the transistor M5 and is electrically connected to the wiring GLC in the contact hole 144 .
晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的一个与导电层138电连接。晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的另一个与导电层145电连接。导电层141与导电层145重叠的区域被用作电容器C3。导电层145与发光元件61电连接。One of the source and drain of transistor M5 is electrically connected to conductive layer 138 . The other one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor M5 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 145 . The area where the conductive layer 141 and the conductive layer 145 overlap is used as the capacitor C3. The conductive layer 145 is electrically connected to the light emitting element 61 .
此外,晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的一个通过导电层146与布线102电连接。晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的另一个及晶体管M8的源极和漏极中的一个通过导电层147与导电层141电连接。晶体管M8的源极和漏极中的另一个通过导电层148与布线103电连接。Furthermore, one of the source and the drain of the transistor M5 is electrically connected to the wiring 102 through the conductive layer 146 . The other of the source and the drain of the transistor M5 and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M8 are electrically connected to the conductive layer 141 through the conductive layer 147 . The other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M8 is electrically connected to the wiring 103 through the conductive layer 148 .
此外,导电层138被用作节点ND1。导电层136被用作节点ND2。导电层133被用作节点ND3。导电层141被用作节点ND4。In addition, the conductive layer 138 is used as the node ND1. Conductive layer 136 is used as node ND2. Conductive layer 133 is used as node ND3. The conductive layer 141 is used as node ND4.
此外,如图7所示,也可以设置布线GLe而使晶体管M6的栅极与布线GLe电连接。此外,也可以设置布线GLf而使晶体管M4的栅极与布线GLf电连接。通过设置布线GLe及布线GLf,可以分别控制晶体管M1至晶体管M8各自的开启状态和关闭状态。In addition, as shown in FIG. 7 , a wiring GLe may be provided so that the gate of the transistor M6 is electrically connected to the wiring GLe. In addition, a wiring GLf may be provided so that the gate of the transistor M4 and the wiring GLf are electrically connected. By arranging the wiring GLe and the wiring GLf, the on and off states of the transistors M1 to M8 can be controlled respectively.
此外,如图8所示,也可以使晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的一个及晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个与布线101电连接。此外,也可以使布线103与布线104电连接。也就是说,也可以使发光元件61的阴极与布线103电连接。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M2 and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 may be electrically connected to the wiring 101 . In addition, the wiring 103 and the wiring 104 may be electrically connected. That is, the cathode of the light-emitting element 61 and the wiring 103 may be electrically connected.
此外,在晶体管M2的栅极电容充分大时,也可以不形成电容器C1。晶体管M2的背栅极电容充分大时,也可以不形成电容器C2。晶体管M5的栅极电容充分大时,也可以不形成电容器C3。In addition, when the gate capacitance of the transistor M2 is sufficiently large, the capacitor C1 does not need to be formed. When the back gate capacitance of the transistor M2 is sufficiently large, the capacitor C2 does not need to be formed. When the gate capacitance of the transistor M5 is sufficiently large, the capacitor C3 does not need to be formed.
此外,如图9所示,也可以使晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的一个、晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的一个及晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个与布线101电连接。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M2 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M4 , and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 may be electrically connected to the wiring 101 . connect.
此外,如图10所示,也可以使晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的一个、晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个及晶体管M6的源极和漏极中的另一个与布线101电连接。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10 , one of the source and drain of the transistor M2 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 , and the other of the source and drain of the transistor M6 may be connected to the wiring 101 Electrical connection.
此外,如图11所示,也可以使晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的一个、晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的一个、晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个及晶体管M6的源极和漏极中的另一个与布线101电连接。在图10及图11所示的电路结构中,可以省略形成晶体管M8及布线GLd。In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 , one of the source and drain of the transistor M2 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M4 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 , and one of the source and drain of the transistor M6 may be used. The other one of the source electrode and the drain electrode is electrically connected to the wiring 101 . In the circuit structure shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 , the formation of the transistor M8 and the wiring GLd can be omitted.
此外,如图12所示,也可以使晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的一个与布线102电连接且使晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个与布线106电连接。此外,也可以使晶体管M6的源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103电连接且使晶体管M8的源极和漏极中的一个与布线107电连接。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12 , one of the source and the drain of the transistor M4 may be electrically connected to the wiring 102 , and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 may be electrically connected to the wiring 106 . Alternatively, the other of the source and drain of the transistor M6 may be electrically connected to the wiring 103 , and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M8 may be electrically connected to the wiring 107 .
此外,如图13所示,也可以将晶体管M6、晶体管M7及晶体管M8的一部分或全部置换成二极管。通过将晶体管M7置换成二极管,可以省略形成布线GLc。通过将晶体管M8置换成二极管,可以省略形成布线GLd。In addition, as shown in FIG. 13 , part or all of the transistors M6 , M7 , and M8 may be replaced with diodes. By replacing the transistor M7 with a diode, formation of the wiring GLC can be omitted. By replacing the transistor M8 with a diode, formation of the wiring GLd can be omitted.
此外,如图14所示,也可以将晶体管M4、晶体管M6、晶体管M7及晶体管M8的一部分或全部置换成二极管。In addition, as shown in FIG. 14 , part or all of the transistors M4 , M6 , M7 , and M8 may be replaced with diodes.
此外,如图15所示,也可以在晶体管M2的栅极与布线103之间设置晶体管M9。In addition, as shown in FIG. 15 , the transistor M9 may be provided between the gate of the transistor M2 and the wiring 103 .
构成像素电路51A的晶体管既可以为源极与漏极间包括一个栅极的单栅型晶体管,又可以为双栅型晶体管。图16A示出双栅型晶体管180A的电路图符号例子。The transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51A may be single-gate transistors including one gate between the source and the drain, or may be double-gate transistors. FIG. 16A shows an example of a circuit diagram symbol of the double-gate transistor 180A.
晶体管180A具有串联连接晶体管Tr1与晶体管Tr2的结构。在图16A中,晶体管Tr1的源极和漏极中的一个与端子S电连接,晶体管Tr1的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管Tr2的源极和漏极中的一个电连接,并且晶体管Tr2的源极和漏极中的另一个与端子D电连接。另外,在图16A中,晶体管Tr1的栅极与晶体管Tr2的栅极电连接且与端子G电连接。The transistor 180A has a structure in which the transistor Tr1 and the transistor Tr2 are connected in series. In FIG. 16A , one of the source and the drain of the transistor Tr1 is electrically connected to the terminal S, the other of the source and the drain of the transistor Tr1 is electrically connected to one of the source and the drain of the transistor Tr2, and The other one of the source and the drain of the transistor Tr2 is electrically connected to the terminal D. In addition, in FIG. 16A , the gate of the transistor Tr1 is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor Tr2 and is electrically connected to the terminal G.
图16A所示的晶体管180A具有通过改变端子G的电位来切换端子S与端子D间的导通和非导通的功能。因此,双栅型晶体管的晶体管180A包括晶体管Tr1及晶体管Tr2且被用作一个晶体管。即可以说,在图16A中,晶体管180A的源极和漏极中的一个与端子S电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与端子D电连接,并且栅极与端子G电连接。The transistor 180A shown in FIG. 16A has a function of switching conduction and non-conduction between the terminal S and the terminal D by changing the potential of the terminal G. Therefore, the transistor 180A of the double-gate transistor includes the transistor Tr1 and the transistor Tr2 and is used as one transistor. That is, in FIG. 16A , one of the source and the drain of the transistor 180A is electrically connected to the terminal S, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the terminal D, and the gate is electrically connected to the terminal G.
另外,构成像素电路51A的晶体管也可以为三栅型晶体管。图16B示出三栅型晶体管180B的电路图符号例子。In addition, the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51A may be tri-gate transistors. FIG. 16B shows an example of a circuit diagram symbol of the tri-gate transistor 180B.
晶体管180B具有串联连接晶体管Tr1、晶体管Tr2及晶体管Tr3的结构。在图16B中,晶体管Tr1的源极和漏极中的一个与端子S电连接,晶体管Tr1的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管Tr2的源极和漏极中的一个电连接,晶体管Tr2的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管Tr3的源极和漏极中的一个电连接,并且晶体管Tr3的源极和漏极中的另一个与端子D电连接。另外,在图16B中,晶体管Tr1的栅极、晶体管Tr2的栅极及晶体管Tr3的栅极彼此电连接且与端子G电连接。The transistor 180B has a structure in which the transistor Tr1, the transistor Tr2, and the transistor Tr3 are connected in series. In FIG. 16B , one of the source and drain of the transistor Tr1 is electrically connected to the terminal S, and the other of the source and drain of the transistor Tr1 is electrically connected to one of the source and drain of the transistor Tr2 . The other of the source and the drain of Tr2 is electrically connected to one of the source and drain of the transistor Tr3, and the other of the source and the drain of the transistor Tr3 is electrically connected to the terminal D. In addition, in FIG. 16B , the gates of the transistor Tr1 , the gate of the transistor Tr2 , and the gate of the transistor Tr3 are electrically connected to each other and to the terminal G.
图16B所示的晶体管180B具有通过改变端子G的电位来切换端子S与端子D间的导通和非导通的功能。因此,三栅型晶体管的晶体管180B包括晶体管Tr1、晶体管Tr2及晶体管Tr3且被用作一个晶体管。即可以说,在图16B中,晶体管180B的源极和漏极中的一个与端子S电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与端子D电连接,并且栅极与端子G电连接。The transistor 180B shown in FIG. 16B has a function of switching conduction and non-conduction between the terminal S and the terminal D by changing the potential of the terminal G. Therefore, the transistor 180B of the tri-gate type transistor includes the transistor Tr1, the transistor Tr2, and the transistor Tr3 and is used as one transistor. That is, in FIG. 16B , one of the source and the drain of the transistor 180B is electrically connected to the terminal S, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the terminal D, and the gate is electrically connected to the terminal G.
另外,构成像素电路51A的晶体管也可以具有串联连接四个以上的晶体管的结构。在图16C所示的晶体管180C中,串联连接六个晶体管(晶体管Tr1至晶体管Tr6)。另外,六个晶体管的栅极电连接且与端子G电连接。In addition, the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51A may have a structure in which four or more transistors are connected in series. In the transistor 180C shown in FIG. 16C, six transistors (transistors Tr1 to transistors Tr6) are connected in series. In addition, the gates of the six transistors are electrically connected to the terminal G.
图16C所示的晶体管180C具有通过改变端子G的电位来切换端子S与端子D间的导通和非导通的功能。因此,晶体管180C包括晶体管Tr1至晶体管Tr6且被用作一个晶体管。即可以说,在图16C中,晶体管180C的源极和漏极中的一个与端子S电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与端子D电连接,并且栅极与端子G电连接。The transistor 180C shown in FIG. 16C has a function of switching conduction and non-conduction between the terminal S and the terminal D by changing the potential of the terminal G. Therefore, the transistor 180C includes the transistors Tr1 to Tr6 and is used as one transistor. That is, in FIG. 16C , one of the source and the drain of the transistor 180C is electrically connected to the terminal S, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the terminal D, and the gate is electrically connected to the terminal G.
有时将如晶体管180A、晶体管180B及晶体管180C那样的包括多个栅极且多个栅极电连接而成的晶体管称为“多栅型晶体管”或“多栅晶体管”。A transistor such as transistor 180A, transistor 180B, and transistor 180C, which includes a plurality of gates and is electrically connected to each other, is sometimes called a “multi-gate transistor” or a “multi-gate transistor.”
例如,在使晶体管在饱和区域中工作时,为了提高饱和区域的电特性,有时使晶体管的沟道长度变长。为了实现沟道长度长的晶体管,也可以使用多栅晶体管。For example, when operating a transistor in a saturation region, the channel length of the transistor may be lengthened in order to improve the electrical characteristics in the saturation region. To implement transistors with long channel lengths, multi-gate transistors can also be used.
作为发光元件61,可以使用EL元件(包含有机物及无机物的EL元件、有机EL元件或无机EL元件)、LED(白色LED、红色LED、绿色LED或蓝色LED等)、微型LED、QLED(Quantum-dotLight Emitting Diode:量子点发光二极管)或者电子发射元件等各种显示元件。As the light-emitting element 61, EL elements (EL elements including organic and inorganic substances, organic EL elements, or inorganic EL elements), LEDs (white LED, red LED, green LED, blue LED, etc.), micro LEDs, QLED ( Various display elements such as Quantum-dotLight Emitting Diode (Quantum-dotLight Emitting Diode) or electron-emitting elements.
<工作例子><Work example>
接着,参照附图说明图1所示的半导体装置100A的工作例子。图17是用来说明半导体装置100A的工作例子的时序图。图18至图24是用来说明半导体装置100A的工作例子的电路图。Next, an operation example of the semiconductor device 100A shown in FIG. 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 17 is a timing chart for explaining an operation example of the semiconductor device 100A. 18 to 24 are circuit diagrams for explaining an operation example of the semiconductor device 100A.
布线DL被供应视频信号Vdata。布线101被供应电位Va,布线102被供应电位V1,布线103被供应电位V0,布线104被供应电位Vc。另外,布线GLa、布线GLb、布线GLc及布线GLd的每一个被供应电位H和电位L中的任一个。The wiring DL is supplied with the video signal Vdata. The wiring 101 is supplied with the potential Va, the wiring 102 is supplied with the potential V1, the wiring 103 is supplied with the potential V0, and the wiring 104 is supplied with the potential Vc. In addition, either the potential H or the potential L is supplied to each of the wiring GLa, the wiring GLb, the wiring GLc, and the wiring GLd.
电位Va为阳极电位,电位Vc为阴极电位。另外,电位V1是比电位V0高的电位,也是可以通过将电位V1供应到晶体管的栅极来使该晶体管处于开启状态的电位。另外,电位V0也可以是通过将电位V0供应到晶体管的栅极来使该晶体管处于关闭状态的电位。电位V0例如为0V或电位L。在本实施方式等中,将电位V0设定为0V,将电位V1设定为3V。另外,将电位Va设定为15V,将电位Vc设定为0V。The potential Va is the anode potential, and the potential Vc is the cathode potential. In addition, the potential V1 is a higher potential than the potential V0, and is also a potential at which the transistor can be turned on by supplying the potential V1 to the gate of the transistor. In addition, the potential V0 may be a potential at which the transistor is turned off by supplying the potential V0 to the gate of the transistor. The potential V0 is, for example, 0V or the potential L. In this embodiment and others, the potential V0 is set to 0V and the potential V1 is set to 3V. In addition, the potential Va is set to 15V, and the potential Vc is set to 0V.
半导体装置100A具有根据从布线DL供应的视频信号Vdata控制流过发光元件61的电流Ie(参照图23)的大小的功能。发光元件61的发光亮度根据电流Ie的大小被控制。The semiconductor device 100A has a function of controlling the magnitude of the current Ie (see FIG. 23 ) flowing through the light-emitting element 61 based on the video signal Vdata supplied from the wiring DL. The light-emitting brightness of the light-emitting element 61 is controlled according to the magnitude of the current Ie.
注意,在附图中,有时与端子或布线等相邻地附有“H”、“L”、“V0”或“V1”等表示电位的符号(也称为“电位符号”)。另外,为了容易理解端子及布线等的电位变化,对发生了电位变化的端子及布线等附有的电位符号有时以带框的形式表示。另外,有时与关闭状态的晶体管重叠地附有“×”的符号。Note that in the drawings, symbols indicating potential (also referred to as "potential symbols") such as "H", "L", "V0", or "V1" may be attached adjacent to terminals, wiring, etc. In order to make it easier to understand the potential changes of terminals, wiring, etc., potential symbols attached to terminals, wiring, etc. that have undergone potential changes are sometimes shown in a framed format. In addition, an “×” symbol may be added overlapping with a transistor in an off state.
流过发光元件61的电流Ie主要由视频信号Vdata和晶体管M2的Vth决定。因此,在各像素电路所包括的晶体管M2的Vth不同时,即使将相同视频信号Vdata供应到多个像素电路,电流Ie也按每个像素不同。因此,晶体管M2的Vth的不均匀是显示品质下降的一个原因。The current Ie flowing through the light emitting element 61 is mainly determined by the video signal Vdata and the Vth of the transistor M2. Therefore, when the Vth of the transistor M2 included in each pixel circuit is different, even if the same video signal Vdata is supplied to a plurality of pixel circuits, the current Ie will be different for each pixel. Therefore, unevenness in the Vth of the transistor M2 is a cause of deterioration in display quality.
于是,通过按每个像素取得晶体管M2的Vth,电流Ie的不均匀得到减少。注意,取得晶体管M2的Vth的工作有时被称为“阈值校正工作”。Then, by obtaining the Vth of the transistor M2 for each pixel, the unevenness of the current Ie is reduced. Note that the operation of obtaining the Vth of the transistor M2 is sometimes called "threshold correction operation."
〔Vth校正工作〕[Vth correction work]
首先,在期间T11进行复位工作。具体而言,对布线GLa、布线GLb及布线GLd供应电位H,对布线GLc供应电位L(参照图18)。注意,在本说明书等中,“电位H”是使n沟道型晶体管处于开启状态的电位,也是使p沟道型晶体管处于关闭状态的电位。此外,“电位L”是使n沟道型晶体管处于关闭状态的电位,也是使p沟道型晶体管处于开启状态的电位。First, the reset operation is performed during period T11. Specifically, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa, the wiring GLb, and the wiring GLd, and the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLc (see FIG. 18 ). Note that in this specification and the like, "potential H" is a potential that turns an n-channel transistor into an on state, and is also a potential that turns a p-channel transistor into an off state. In addition, "potential L" is a potential that turns an n-channel transistor into an off state, and is also a potential that turns a p-channel transistor into an on-state.
因此,晶体管M1、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6及晶体管M8处于开启状态,晶体管M7处于关闭状态。Therefore, the transistors M1, M3, M4, M6, and M8 are in the on state, and the transistor M7 is in the off state.
另外,节点ND1通过晶体管M6被供应电位V0。并且,节点ND3通过晶体管M6及晶体管M3被供应电位V0。另外,节点ND2通过晶体管M4被供应电位V1。另外,节点ND4通过晶体管M8被供应电位V0。因此,晶体管M5处于关闭状态。In addition, the node ND1 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M6. Furthermore, the node ND3 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M6 and the transistor M3. In addition, the node ND2 is supplied with the potential V1 through the transistor M4. In addition, the node ND4 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M8. Therefore, transistor M5 is off.
另外,在期间T11,布线DL与布线103通过晶体管M1、晶体管M3及晶体管M6处于导通状态。因此,在期间T11,优选的是,使布线DL与布线103具有相同电位或者使布线DL处于浮动状态。此外,在像素电路51A具有图7的结构时,布线GLa和布线GLe分离,因此通过对布线GLa供应电位L且对布线GLe供应电位H,可以进行期间T11的复位工作。In addition, during the period T11, the wiring DL and the wiring 103 are in a conductive state through the transistor M1, the transistor M3, and the transistor M6. Therefore, during the period T11, it is preferable that the wiring DL and the wiring 103 have the same potential or that the wiring DL be in a floating state. In addition, when the pixel circuit 51A has the structure of FIG. 7 , the wiring GLa and the wiring GLe are separated. Therefore, by supplying the potential L to the wiring GLa and the potential H to the wiring GLe, the reset operation in the period T11 can be performed.
接着,在期间T12,对布线GLa供应电位L(参照图19)。此时,晶体管M1及晶体管M6处于关闭状态。Next, in the period T12, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLa (see FIG. 19 ). At this time, the transistor M1 and the transistor M6 are in the off state.
因为节点ND2的电位为电位V1,所以晶体管M2处于开启状态。因此,电荷通过布线101及晶体管M2而节点ND1的电位上升。另外,因为晶体管M3也处于开启状态,所以节点ND3的电位也上升。具体而言,节点ND1及节点ND3的电位上升到从电位V1减去晶体管M2的Vth的值。Since the potential of the node ND2 is the potential V1, the transistor M2 is in an on state. Therefore, the electric charge passes through the wiring 101 and the transistor M2, and the potential of the node ND1 rises. In addition, since the transistor M3 is also in the on state, the potential of the node ND3 also increases. Specifically, the potentials of the nodes ND1 and ND3 rise to a value obtained by subtracting the Vth of the transistor M2 from the potential V1.
接着,在期间T13,对布线GLb供应电位L(参照图20)。晶体管M3及晶体管M4处于关闭状态。由此,节点ND1、节点ND2及节点ND3处于浮动状态,保持供应到各节点的电荷。Next, in period T13, potential L is supplied to wiring GLb (see FIG. 20 ). Transistor M3 and transistor M4 are in an off state. Thereby, the node ND1, the node ND2, and the node ND3 are in a floating state, and the charge supplied to each node is maintained.
[数据写入工作][Data writing work]
在期间T14,对布线GLa供应电位H,对布线GLc供应电位H且对布线GLd供应电位L(参照图21)。此时,晶体管M1处于开启状态,节点ND3被供应视频信号Vdata。另外,晶体管M6处于开启状态,节点ND1被供应电位V0。In the period T14, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLc, and the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLd (see FIG. 21 ). At this time, the transistor M1 is in the on state, and the node ND3 is supplied with the video signal Vdata. In addition, the transistor M6 is in the on state, and the node ND1 is supplied with the potential V0.
节点ND1与节点ND2通过电容器C2形成电容耦合,由此当节点ND1的电位从V1-Vth变化到V0时,节点ND2的电位也同样地变化。在本实施方式等中,因为电位V0是0V,所以节点ND2的电位由电位V1-(电位V1-Vth)表示。就是说,节点ND2的电位是Vth。The node ND1 and the node ND2 form capacitive coupling through the capacitor C2. Therefore, when the potential of the node ND1 changes from V1-Vth to V0, the potential of the node ND2 also changes similarly. In this embodiment and others, since the potential V0 is 0V, the potential of the node ND2 is represented by the potential V1- (potential V1-Vth). That is, the potential of node ND2 is Vth.
另外,晶体管M7处于开启状态且晶体管M8处于关闭状态,由此节点ND4被供应电位V1。此外,晶体管M5处于开启状态,发光元件61的阳极端子的电位变为电位V0。In addition, the transistor M7 is in the on state and the transistor M8 is in the off state, whereby the node ND4 is supplied with the potential V1. Furthermore, the transistor M5 is in the on state, and the potential of the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 becomes the potential V0.
接着,在期间T15,对布线GLc供应电位L(参照图22)。此时,晶体管M7处于关闭状态且节点ND4处于浮动状态。Next, in the period T15, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLC (see FIG. 22 ). At this time, transistor M7 is in an off state and node ND4 is in a floating state.
[发光工作][Glow work]
在期间T16,对布线GLa供应电位L(参照图23)。此时,晶体管M1及晶体管M6处于关闭状态。电流从布线101流到布线104。就是说,电流Ie流过发光元件61,发光元件61以对应于电流Ie的亮度发光。另外,在电流从布线101流到布线104时,节点ND1及发光元件61的阳极端子的电位上升。In the period T16, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLa (see FIG. 23). At this time, the transistor M1 and the transistor M6 are in the off state. Electric current flows from wiring 101 to wiring 104 . That is, the current Ie flows through the light-emitting element 61, and the light-emitting element 61 emits light with a brightness corresponding to the current Ie. In addition, when a current flows from the wiring 101 to the wiring 104 , the potentials of the node ND1 and the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 rise.
另外,节点ND2及节点ND3处于浮动状态。节点ND1与节点ND3通过电容器C1形成电容耦合。在期间T16,当节点ND1的电位从电位V0变化到电位Va1时,节点ND3的电位也同样地变化。在此,节点ND3的电位为视频信号Vdata+电位Va1。就是说,即便晶体管M2的源极电位变化,晶体管M2的栅极与源极之间的电位差(电压)也维持视频信号Vdata。In addition, the node ND2 and the node ND3 are in a floating state. Node ND1 and node ND3 form capacitive coupling through capacitor C1. During the period T16, when the potential of the node ND1 changes from the potential V0 to the potential Va1, the potential of the node ND3 also changes similarly. Here, the potential of the node ND3 is the video signal Vdata + the potential Va1. That is, even if the source potential of the transistor M2 changes, the potential difference (voltage) between the gate and the source of the transistor M2 maintains the video signal Vdata.
同样地,随着节点ND1的电位变化,节点ND2的电位变为Vth+电位Va1。因此,晶体管M2的背栅极与源极之间的电位差维持Vth。Similarly, as the potential of node ND1 changes, the potential of node ND2 becomes Vth + potential Va1. Therefore, the potential difference between the back gate and the source of transistor M2 maintains Vth.
另外,发光元件61的阳极端子与节点ND4通过电容器C3形成电容耦合。由此,当发光元件61的阳极端子的电位从电位V0变化到电位Va2时,节点ND4的电位也同样地变化。在此,节点ND4的电位为电位V1+电位Va2。就是说,即便发光元件61的阳极端子的电位变化,晶体管M5的栅极与源极之间的电位差(电压)也维持电位V1-电位V0。In addition, the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 and the node ND4 are capacitively coupled via the capacitor C3. Accordingly, when the potential of the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 changes from the potential V0 to the potential Va2, the potential of the node ND4 also changes similarly. Here, the potential of the node ND4 is the potential V1 + the potential Va2. That is, even if the potential of the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 changes, the potential difference (voltage) between the gate and the source of the transistor M5 maintains the potential V1 - the potential V0.
例如,在晶体管M5的栅极具有固定电位的情况下,当晶体管M5的源极电位上升时,栅极与源极之间的电位差变小。当栅极与源极之间的电位差小于晶体管M5的阈值电压时,晶体管M5处于关闭状态。由此,在提高阳极电位的情况下,也需要对栅极供应高电位,需要还设置电源或电源电路。For example, when the gate of the transistor M5 has a fixed potential, when the source potential of the transistor M5 rises, the potential difference between the gate and the source becomes smaller. When the potential difference between the gate and the source is less than the threshold voltage of the transistor M5, the transistor M5 is in a closed state. Therefore, even when the anode potential is raised, a high potential needs to be supplied to the gate, and a power supply or a power supply circuit needs to be provided.
在本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A中,在晶体管M5的栅极与源极之间设置电容器C3来构成自举电路,即便增大阳极电位也可以维持晶体管M5的开启状态,而不设置电源电路。因此,稳定地将电流Ie供应到发光元件61。注意,有时将电容器C3称为“自举电容器”。另外,电容器C1及电容器C2各自被用作自举电容器。In the semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention, the capacitor C3 is provided between the gate and the source of the transistor M5 to form a bootstrap circuit. Even if the anode potential is increased, the on state of the transistor M5 can be maintained without providing a power supply. circuit. Therefore, the current Ie is stably supplied to the light-emitting element 61. Note that capacitor C3 is sometimes referred to as the "bootstrap capacitor". In addition, capacitor C1 and capacitor C2 are each used as a bootstrap capacitor.
本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A不仅用于单结构的发光元件而且适当地用于所需要的驱动电压比单结构的发光元件大的串联结构的发光元件。注意,将在后面说明发光元件的结构。The semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention is suitably used not only for a single-structure light-emitting element but also for a series-structured light-emitting element that requires a larger driving voltage than a single-structure light-emitting element. Note that the structure of the light-emitting element will be described later.
另外,如上所述,流过发光元件61的电流Ie的量由视频信号Vdata和晶体管M2的Vth决定。在本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A中,通过进行阈值校正工作,流过发光元件61的电流Ie的量被视频信号Vdata控制。In addition, as described above, the amount of current Ie flowing through the light-emitting element 61 is determined by the video signal Vdata and the Vth of the transistor M2. In the semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention, by performing the threshold correction operation, the amount of current Ie flowing through the light-emitting element 61 is controlled by the video signal Vdata.
发光元件61的发光亮度被视频信号Vdata控制,由此在发光工作时,晶体管M5需要确实地处于开启状态。在本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A中,在发光工作时,晶体管M5可以确实地处于开启状态。通过将本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A用于显示装置,可以正确地控制电流Ie,由此可以提高该显示装置的中间灰度的颜色再现性。因此,可以提高该显示装置的显示品质。The light-emitting brightness of the light-emitting element 61 is controlled by the video signal Vdata, so during the light-emitting operation, the transistor M5 needs to be in the on state reliably. In the semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention, the transistor M5 can be reliably turned on during the light emission operation. By using the semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention in a display device, the current Ie can be accurately controlled, thereby improving the color reproducibility of halftones in the display device. Therefore, the display quality of the display device can be improved.
[猝灭工作][quenching work]
在期间T17,对布线GLd供应电位H(参照图24)。此时,晶体管M8处于开启状态。因此,电位V0从布线103供应到节点ND4,晶体管M5处于关闭状态。当晶体管M5处于关闭状态时,电流不流过发光元件61,所以发光元件61的发光停止。In the period T17, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLd (see FIG. 24). At this time, transistor M8 is on. Therefore, the potential V0 is supplied from the wiring 103 to the node ND4, and the transistor M5 is in the off state. When the transistor M5 is in the off state, current does not flow through the light-emitting element 61, so the light emission of the light-emitting element 61 stops.
作为显示元件使用EL元件等发光元件的显示装置可以在一个帧期间中连续使发光元件发光。将这种驱动方法也称为“保持型”或“保持型驱动”。通过作为显示装置的驱动方法采用保持型驱动,可以减轻显示屏幕的闪烁现象等。另一方面,保持型驱动在显示动态图像时容易发生余像及图像的模糊等。将在显示动态图像时人感觉的分辨率也称为“动态图像分辨率”。就是说,保持型驱动的动态图像分辨率容易下降。A display device using a light-emitting element such as an EL element as a display element can continuously cause the light-emitting element to emit light during one frame period. This driving method is also called "holding type" or "holding type drive". By adopting retention driving as a driving method of a display device, flickering of the display screen and the like can be reduced. On the other hand, retention-type driving is prone to afterimages and blurring of images when displaying moving images. The resolution perceived by humans when displaying moving images is also called "moving image resolution". In other words, the dynamic image resolution of the hold-type driver is likely to decrease.
此外,已知改善显示动态图像时的余感及图像的模糊等的方法的“黑插入驱动”。“黑插入驱动”也被称为“伪脉冲(pseudo impulse)型”或“伪脉冲型驱动”。黑插入驱动是每隔一个帧进行黑显示的或者在一个帧中的规定期间进行黑显示的驱动方法。In addition, "black insertion drive" is known as a method of improving afterimages and blurring of images when displaying moving images. "Black insertion drive" is also called "pseudo impulse type" or "pseudo impulse type drive". Black insertion driving is a driving method that performs black display every other frame or performs black display during a predetermined period in one frame.
本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A通过猝灭工作来容易实现黑插入驱动。使用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100A的显示装置的动态图像分辨率不容易下降,由此可以实现显示品质高的动态图像的显示。The semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention easily implements black insertion driving through quenching operation. A display device using the semiconductor device 100A according to one embodiment of the present invention is less likely to have a moving image resolution that decreases, thereby enabling display of moving images with high display quality.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式2)(Embodiment 2)
在本实施方式中,说明本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100B。半导体装置100B是半导体装置100A的变形例子。因此,为了减少反复说明,主要说明半导体装置100B的与半导体装置100A不同之处。In this embodiment, a semiconductor device 100B according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. Semiconductor device 100B is a modified example of semiconductor device 100A. Therefore, in order to reduce repetitive description, the differences between the semiconductor device 100B and the semiconductor device 100A will be mainly described.
<结构例子><Structure example>
图25示出半导体装置100B的电路结构例子。半导体装置100B包括像素电路51B及发光元件61。像素电路51B具有从像素电路51A去除晶体管M8的结构。因此,可以删除与晶体管M8的栅极电连接的布线GLd。此外,晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个与布线GLc电连接,晶体管M7的栅极与布线105电连接。FIG. 25 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100B. The semiconductor device 100B includes a pixel circuit 51B and a light-emitting element 61 . The pixel circuit 51B has a structure in which the transistor M8 is removed from the pixel circuit 51A. Therefore, the wiring GLd electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M8 can be deleted. In addition, one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 is electrically connected to the wiring GLC, and the gate of the transistor M7 is electrically connected to the wiring 105 .
<工作例子><Work example>
接着,参照附图说明半导体装置100B的工作例子。图26是用来说明半导体装置100B的工作例子的时序图。图27至图32是用来说明半导体装置100B的工作例子的电路图。Next, an operation example of the semiconductor device 100B will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 26 is a timing chart for explaining an operation example of the semiconductor device 100B. 27 to 32 are circuit diagrams for explaining an operation example of the semiconductor device 100B.
布线105被供应电位V2。电位V2是高于电位V1的电位。此外,电位V2是电位H以下的电位。在本实施方式等中,将电位V2设定为6V。The wiring 105 is supplied with the potential V2. The potential V2 is higher than the potential V1. In addition, the potential V2 is a potential H or lower. In this embodiment and others, the potential V2 is set to 6V.
[Vth校正工作][Vth correction work]
首先,在期间T21进行复位工作。具体而言,对布线GLa及布线GLb供应电位H,对布线GLc供应电位L(参照图27)。因此,晶体管M1、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6及晶体管M7处于开启状态。First, the reset operation is performed during period T21. Specifically, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa and the wiring GLb, and the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLc (see FIG. 27 ). Therefore, the transistor M1, the transistor M3, the transistor M4, the transistor M6 and the transistor M7 are in an on state.
另外,节点ND1通过晶体管M6被供应电位V0。并且,节点ND3通过晶体管M6及晶体管M3被供应电位V0。另外,节点ND2通过晶体管M4被供应电位V1。另外,节点ND4通过晶体管M7被供应电位L。因此,晶体管M5处于关闭状态。In addition, the node ND1 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M6. Furthermore, the node ND3 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M6 and the transistor M3. In addition, the node ND2 is supplied with the potential V1 through the transistor M4. In addition, the node ND4 is supplied with the potential L through the transistor M7. Therefore, transistor M5 is off.
另外,与上述期间T11同样地,在期间T21中也优选使布线DL与布线103具有相同电位或者使布线DL处于浮动状态。In addition, similarly to the above-mentioned period T11, in the period T21, it is also preferable that the wiring DL and the wiring 103 have the same potential or that the wiring DL be in a floating state.
接着,在期间T22,对布线GLa供应电位L(参照图28)。此时,晶体管M1及晶体管M6处于关闭状态。与上述期间T12同样,节点ND1及节点ND3的电位上升到从电位V1减去晶体管M2的Vth的值。Next, in the period T22, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLa (see FIG. 28 ). At this time, the transistor M1 and the transistor M6 are in the off state. Similar to the above-described period T12, the potentials of the nodes ND1 and ND3 rise to a value obtained by subtracting the Vth of the transistor M2 from the potential V1.
接着,在期间T23,对布线GLb供应电位L(参照图29)。此时,晶体管M3及晶体管M4处于关闭状态。节点ND1、节点ND2及节点ND3处于浮动状态,保持供应到各节点的电荷。Next, in period T23, potential L is supplied to wiring GLb (see FIG. 29 ). At this time, the transistor M3 and the transistor M4 are in the off state. The node ND1, the node ND2, and the node ND3 are in a floating state and maintain the charge supplied to each node.
[数据写入工作][Data writing work]
在期间T24,对布线GLa供应电位H,布线GLc被供应电位H(参照图30)。此时,晶体管M1处于开启状态,节点ND3被供应视频信号Vdata。另外,晶体管M6处于开启状态,节点ND1被供应电位V0。与上述期间T14同样,节点ND2的电位为Vth。In the period T24, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa, and the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLC (see FIG. 30). At this time, the transistor M1 is in the on state, and the node ND3 is supplied with the video signal Vdata. In addition, the transistor M6 is in the on state, and the node ND1 is supplied with the potential V0. Similar to the above-mentioned period T14, the potential of the node ND2 is Vth.
另外,晶体管M7处于开启状态,电荷从布线GLc供应到节点ND4。节点ND4的电位上升到从电位H减去晶体管M7的Vth的值。在本实施方式等中,电位H是6V。当晶体管M5及晶体管M7的Vth为1V时,节点ND4的电位(电位H-Vth)为5V。因此,晶体管M5处于开启状态。In addition, the transistor M7 is in the on state, and charges are supplied from the wiring GLC to the node ND4. The potential of the node ND4 rises to a value obtained by subtracting the Vth of the transistor M7 from the potential H. In this embodiment and others, the potential H is 6V. When the Vth of the transistor M5 and the transistor M7 is 1V, the potential of the node ND4 (potential H-Vth) is 5V. Therefore, transistor M5 is on.
[发光工作][Glow work]
在期间T25,对布线GLa供应电位L(参照图31)。此时,晶体管M1及晶体管M6处于关闭状态。与上述期间T16同样,电流从布线101流到布线104,发光元件61以对应于电流Ie的亮度发光。另外,节点ND1及发光元件61的阳极端子的电位上升。节点ND1的电位为电位Va1,阳极端子的电位为电位Va2。另外,节点ND3的电位为视频信号Vdata+电位Va1,节点ND2的电位为Vth+电位Va1。During the period T25, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLa (see FIG. 31). At this time, the transistor M1 and the transistor M6 are in the off state. Similar to the above-mentioned period T16, current flows from the wiring 101 to the wiring 104, and the light-emitting element 61 emits light with a brightness corresponding to the current Ie. In addition, the potentials of the node ND1 and the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 increase. The potential of node ND1 is potential Va1, and the potential of the anode terminal is potential Va2. In addition, the potential of the node ND3 is the video signal Vdata + the potential Va1, and the potential of the node ND2 is the Vth + the potential Va1.
节点ND4处于浮动状态,通过电容器C3维持节点ND4与阳极端子的电位差。因此,随着发光元件61的阳极端子的电位变化,节点ND4的电位也变化。当阳极端子的电位从电位V0上升到电位Va2时,节点ND4的电位变为电位H-Vth+电位Va2。就是说,即便相当于晶体管M5的源极一侧的阳极端子的电位上升,晶体管M5的开启状态也确实地维持。The node ND4 is in a floating state, and the potential difference between the node ND4 and the anode terminal is maintained through the capacitor C3. Therefore, as the potential of the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 changes, the potential of the node ND4 also changes. When the potential of the anode terminal rises from the potential V0 to the potential Va2, the potential of the node ND4 becomes the potential H-Vth + the potential Va2. That is, even if the potential of the anode terminal corresponding to the source side of the transistor M5 rises, the on state of the transistor M5 is reliably maintained.
在本实施方式中,电位H及电位V2都是6V(相同电位)。因此,节点ND4的电位高于晶体管M7的源极和漏极中的一个电位及栅极的电位,使晶体管M7处于关闭状态。In this embodiment, the potential H and the potential V2 are both 6V (the same potential). Therefore, the potential of the node ND4 is higher than one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7 and the potential of the gate, causing the transistor M7 to be in an off state.
[猝灭工作][quenching work]
在期间T26,对布线GLc供应电位L(参照图32)。此时,晶体管M7处于开启状态,节点ND4的电位为L电位。在节点ND4的电位为L电位时,晶体管M5处于关闭状态,发光元件61的发光停止。In the period T26, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLC (see FIG. 32). At this time, the transistor M7 is in the on state, and the potential of the node ND4 is the L potential. When the potential of the node ND4 is the L potential, the transistor M5 is in an off state, and the light emitting element 61 stops emitting light.
与半导体装置100A同样,半导体装置100B可以不仅用于单结构的发光元件而且适当地用于所需要的驱动电压比单结构大的串联结构的发光元件。另外,与半导体装置100A同样地可以进行黑插入驱动。使用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100B的显示装置的动态图像分辨率不容易下降,由此可以实现显示显示品质高的动态图像。Like the semiconductor device 100A, the semiconductor device 100B can be suitably used not only for a single-structure light-emitting element but also for a series-structured light-emitting element that requires a higher driving voltage than a single-structure light-emitting element. In addition, black insertion driving can be performed similarly to the semiconductor device 100A. A display device using the semiconductor device 100B according to one embodiment of the present invention is less likely to have a moving image resolution that decreases, and thus can display a moving image with high display quality.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式3)(Embodiment 3)
在本实施方式中,说明本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100C。半导体装置100C是半导体装置100B的变形例子。因此,半导体装置100C也是半导体装置100A的变形例子。为了减少反复说明,主要说明半导体装置100C的与半导体装置100A及半导体装置100B不同之处。In this embodiment, a semiconductor device 100C according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. Semiconductor device 100C is a modified example of semiconductor device 100B. Therefore, the semiconductor device 100C is also a modified example of the semiconductor device 100A. In order to reduce repetitive description, the differences between the semiconductor device 100C and the semiconductor device 100A and the semiconductor device 100B will be mainly described.
<结构例子><Structure example>
图33示出半导体装置100C的电路结构例子。半导体装置100C包括像素电路51C及发光元件61。像素电路51C与像素电路51B不同之处在于晶体管M7的栅极与布线GLa电连接。因此,也可以不设置图25所示的布线105。由此,可以省略形成布线105。FIG. 33 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100C. The semiconductor device 100C includes a pixel circuit 51C and a light-emitting element 61 . The pixel circuit 51C is different from the pixel circuit 51B in that the gate of the transistor M7 is electrically connected to the wiring GLa. Therefore, the wiring 105 shown in FIG. 25 does not need to be provided. Thereby, formation of the wiring 105 can be omitted.
在此,在构成像素电路51C的晶体管中,晶体管M1、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6及晶体管M7被用作开关。因此,半导体装置100C可以为如图34所示那样。Here, among the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51C, the transistor M1, the transistor M3, the transistor M4, the transistor M6, and the transistor M7 are used as switches. Therefore, the semiconductor device 100C may be as shown in FIG. 34 .
<工作例子><Work example>
接着,参照附图说明半导体装置100C的工作例子。图35是用来说明半导体装置100C的工作例子的时序图。图36至图41是用来说明半导体装置100C的工作例子的电路图。Next, an operation example of the semiconductor device 100C will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 35 is a timing chart for explaining an operation example of the semiconductor device 100C. 36 to 41 are circuit diagrams for explaining an operation example of the semiconductor device 100C.
[Vth校正工作][Vth correction work]
首先,在期间T31进行与期间T21同样的复位工作。具体而言,对布线GLa及布线GLb供应电位H,对布线GLc供应电位L(参照图36)。在期间T31,晶体管M1、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6及晶体管M7处于开启状态。First, in period T31, the same reset operation as in period T21 is performed. Specifically, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa and the wiring GLb, and the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLc (see FIG. 36 ). During the period T31, the transistor M1, the transistor M3, the transistor M4, the transistor M6, and the transistor M7 are in an on state.
另外,节点ND1通过晶体管M6被供应电位V0。并且,节点ND3通过晶体管M6及晶体管M3被供应电位V0。另外,节点ND2通过晶体管M4被供应电位V1。另外,节点ND4通过晶体管M7被供应电位L。因此,晶体管M5处于关闭状态。In addition, the node ND1 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M6. Furthermore, the node ND3 is supplied with the potential V0 through the transistor M6 and the transistor M3. In addition, the node ND2 is supplied with the potential V1 through the transistor M4. In addition, the node ND4 is supplied with the potential L through the transistor M7. Therefore, transistor M5 is off.
另外,与上述期间T21同样,在期间T31中也优选使布线DL与布线103为相同电位或者布线DL处于浮动状态。In addition, similarly to the above-mentioned period T21, in the period T31, it is also preferable that the wiring DL and the wiring 103 have the same potential or the wiring DL is in a floating state.
接着,在期间T32,对布线GLa供应电位L(参照图37)。此时,晶体管M1,晶体管M6及晶体管M7处于关闭状态。与上述期间T12同样,节点ND1及节点ND3的电位上升到从电位V1减去晶体管M2的Vth的值。此外,节点ND4处于浮动状态,保持供应到节点ND4的电荷。Next, in the period T32, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLa (see FIG. 37 ). At this time, the transistor M1, the transistor M6 and the transistor M7 are in the off state. Similar to the above-described period T12, the potentials of the nodes ND1 and ND3 rise to a value obtained by subtracting the Vth of the transistor M2 from the potential V1. In addition, the node ND4 is in a floating state, maintaining the charge supplied to the node ND4.
接着,在期间T33,对布线GLb供应电位L(参照图38)。此时,晶体管M3及晶体管M4处于关闭状态。节点ND1、节点ND2及节点ND3处于浮动状态,保持供应到各节点的电荷。Next, in period T33, potential L is supplied to wiring GLb (see FIG. 38 ). At this time, the transistor M3 and the transistor M4 are in the off state. The node ND1, the node ND2, and the node ND3 are in a floating state and maintain the charge supplied to each node.
[数据写入工作][Data writing work]
在期间T34,对布线GLa供应电位H,布线GLc被供应电位H(参照图39)。此时,晶体管M1处于开启状态,节点ND3被供应视频信号Vdata。另外,晶体管M6处于开启状态,节点ND1被供应电位V0。与上述期间T24同样,节点ND2的电位为Vth。In the period T34, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa, and the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLC (see FIG. 39). At this time, the transistor M1 is in the on state, and the node ND3 is supplied with the video signal Vdata. In addition, the transistor M6 is in the on state, and the node ND1 is supplied with the potential V0. Similar to the above-mentioned period T24, the potential of the node ND2 is Vth.
另外,晶体管M7处于开启状态,电荷从布线GLc供应到节点ND4。节点ND4的电位上升到从电位H减去晶体管M7的Vth的值。在本实施方式等中,电位H是6V,当晶体管M5及晶体管M7的Vth为1V时,节点ND4的电位(电位H-Vth)为5V。因此,晶体管M5处于开启状态。In addition, the transistor M7 is in the on state, and charges are supplied from the wiring GLC to the node ND4. The potential of the node ND4 rises to a value obtained by subtracting the Vth of the transistor M7 from the potential H. In this embodiment and others, the potential H is 6V, and when the Vth of the transistor M5 and the transistor M7 is 1V, the potential of the node ND4 (potential H-Vth) is 5V. Therefore, transistor M5 is on.
[发光工作][Glow work]
在期间T35,对布线GLa供应电位L(参照图40。此时,晶体管M1及晶体管M6处于关闭状态。与上述期间T25同样,电流从布线101流到布线104,发光元件61以对应于电流Ie的亮度发光。另外,此时,节点ND1及发光元件61的阳极端子的电位上升。节点ND1的电位为电位Va1,阳极端子的电位为电位Va2。另外,节点ND3的电位为视频信号Vdata+电位Va1,节点ND2的电位为Vth+电位Va1。In the period T35, the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLa (see FIG. 40). At this time, the transistor M1 and the transistor M6 are in an off state. Similar to the above-mentioned period T25, a current flows from the wiring 101 to the wiring 104, and the light-emitting element 61 responds to the current Ie. The potential of the node ND1 and the anode terminal of the light-emitting element 61 rises at this time. The potential of the node ND1 is the potential Va1, and the potential of the anode terminal is the potential Va2. In addition, the potential of the node ND3 is the video signal Vdata + the potential Va1 , the potential of node ND2 is Vth + potential Va1.
节点ND4处于浮动状态,通过电容器C3维持节点ND4与阳极端子的电位差。因此,随着阳极端子的电位变化,节点ND4的电位也变化。当阳极端子的电位从电位V0上升到电位Va2时,节点ND4的电位变为电位H-Vth+电位Va2。就是说,即便相当于晶体管M5的源极一侧的阳极端子的电位上升,晶体管M5的开启状态也确实地维持。The node ND4 is in a floating state, and the potential difference between the node ND4 and the anode terminal is maintained through the capacitor C3. Therefore, as the potential of the anode terminal changes, the potential of node ND4 also changes. When the potential of the anode terminal rises from the potential V0 to the potential Va2, the potential of the node ND4 becomes the potential H-Vth + the potential Va2. That is, even if the potential of the anode terminal corresponding to the source side of the transistor M5 rises, the on state of the transistor M5 is reliably maintained.
[猝灭工作][quenching work]
在期间T36,对布线GLa供应电位H,对布线GLc供应电位L(参照图41)。此时,晶体管M1、晶体管M6及晶体管M7处于开启状态,节点ND1的电位为电位V0,节点ND4的电位为L电位。在节点ND4的电位为L电位时,晶体管M5处于关闭状态,发光元件61的发光停止。In period T36, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLa and the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLC (see FIG. 41 ). At this time, the transistor M1, the transistor M6, and the transistor M7 are in the on state, the potential of the node ND1 is the potential V0, and the potential of the node ND4 is the L potential. When the potential of the node ND4 is the L potential, the transistor M5 is in an off state, and the light emitting element 61 stops emitting light.
此外,在期间T36,有时通过晶体管M1对节点ND3供应写入到与布线DL电连接的其他半导体装置100C的视频信号Vdata,但是晶体管M5处于关闭状态,所以猝灭工作没有受到影响。In the period T36, the video signal Vdata written to the other semiconductor device 100C electrically connected to the wiring DL may be supplied to the node ND3 through the transistor M1. However, the transistor M5 is in an off state, so the quenching operation is not affected.
与半导体装置100A及半导体装置100B同样,半导体装置100C可以不仅用于单结构的发光元件而且适当地用于所需要的驱动电压比单结构大的串联结构的发光元件。另外,与半导体装置100A及半导体装置100B同样地可以进行黑插入驱动。使用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100C的显示装置的动态图像分辨率不容易下降,由此可以实现显示显示品质高的动态图像。Like the semiconductor device 100A and the semiconductor device 100B, the semiconductor device 100C can be suitably used not only for a single-structure light-emitting element but also for a series-structured light-emitting element that requires a higher driving voltage than a single-structure light-emitting element. In addition, black insertion driving can be performed similarly to the semiconductor device 100A and the semiconductor device 100B. A display device using the semiconductor device 100C according to one embodiment of the present invention is less likely to have a moving image resolution that decreases, and thus can display a moving image with high display quality.
<变形例子1><Deformation example 1>
图42示出半导体装置100C的变形例子的半导体装置100Ca。图42所示的半导体装置100Ca包括像素电路51Ca。像素电路51Ca的与图33所示的像素电路51C不同之处在于:在布线GLc与节点ND4之间具有晶体管M8。FIG. 42 shows a semiconductor device 100Ca which is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100C. The semiconductor device 100Ca shown in FIG. 42 includes a pixel circuit 51Ca. The pixel circuit 51Ca is different from the pixel circuit 51C shown in FIG. 33 in that the transistor M8 is provided between the wiring GLC and the node ND4.
具体而言,晶体管M8的栅极与布线GLb电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线GLc电连接,源极或漏极的另一方与节点ND4电连接。Specifically, the gate of the transistor M8 is electrically connected to the wiring GLb, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring GLc, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the node ND4.
在图33所示的电路结构例子中,在进行Vth校正工作的期间T32,节点ND4处于浮动状态,因此节点ND4的电位变动而晶体管M5有可能处于与开启状态相近的状态。In the circuit configuration example shown in FIG. 33 , during the period T32 during which the Vth correction operation is performed, the node ND4 is in a floating state. Therefore, the potential of the node ND4 fluctuates and the transistor M5 may be in a state close to the on state.
图43是示出期间T32中图42所示的半导体装置100Ca的工作状态的电路图。通过包括晶体管M8,在进行Vth校正工作的期间T32,可以防止节点ND4处于浮动状态来将节点ND4的电位固定为电位L。通过包括晶体管M8,可以实现精确的Vth校正工作。因此,可以提高半导体装置100Ca的显示品质。FIG. 43 is a circuit diagram showing the operating state of the semiconductor device 100Ca shown in FIG. 42 during the period T32. By including the transistor M8, the potential of the node ND4 can be fixed to the potential L by preventing the node ND4 from being in a floating state during the period T32 during which the Vth correction operation is performed. By including transistor M8, precise Vth correction operation can be achieved. Therefore, the display quality of the semiconductor device 100Ca can be improved.
<变形例子2><Deformation example 2>
图44示出图33所示的半导体装置100C的变形例子的半导体装置100Cb。半导体装置100Cb包括像素电路51Cb。像素电路51Cb的与像素电路51C不同之处在于:将p沟道型晶体管用作晶体管M6及晶体管M7。此外,晶体管M6及晶体管M7的栅极与布线GLd电连接。如上述实施方式所示,作为构成半导体装置100C的晶体管的至少一部分也可以使用p沟道型晶体管。FIG. 44 shows a semiconductor device 100Cb which is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100C shown in FIG. 33 . The semiconductor device 100Cb includes the pixel circuit 51Cb. The pixel circuit 51Cb is different from the pixel circuit 51C in that p-channel transistors are used as the transistor M6 and the transistor M7. In addition, the gates of the transistors M6 and M7 are electrically connected to the wiring GLd. As shown in the above-described embodiment, p-channel transistors may be used as at least some of the transistors constituting the semiconductor device 100C.
此外,如上述实施方式所示,作为构成半导体装置的晶体管可以使用包含各种半导体的晶体管。作为p沟道型晶体管,例如使用单晶硅或多晶硅等,即可。作为多晶硅也可以使用低温多晶硅(LTPS:Low Temperature Poly Silicon)。Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiments, transistors including various semiconductors can be used as transistors constituting the semiconductor device. As the p-channel transistor, for example, single crystal silicon or polycrystalline silicon may be used. Low Temperature Poly Silicon (LTPS: Low Temperature Poly Silicon) can also be used as the polycrystalline silicon.
在由n沟道型晶体管形成晶体管M1至晶体管M5且由p沟道型晶体管形成晶体管M6及晶体管M7的情况下,例如也可以在半导体层中包含单晶硅的p沟道型Si晶体管上层叠n沟道型OS晶体管。In the case where the transistors M1 to M5 are formed from n-channel transistors and the transistors M6 and M7 are formed from p-channel transistors, for example, p-channel Si transistors containing single crystal silicon in the semiconductor layer may be stacked n-channel type OS transistor.
在图44中,以双点划线表示像素电路51Cb所具有的包含Si晶体管的区域51a及包含OS晶体管的区域51b。In FIG. 44 , the region 51 a including the Si transistor and the region 51 b including the OS transistor included in the pixel circuit 51Cb are shown by two-dot chain lines.
例如,半导体装置100Cb也可以具有层40、层50及层60的叠层结构。图45是在半导体装置100Cb具有层40、层50及层60的叠层结构的情况的立体示意图。图45示出在层40中形成p沟道型Si晶体管的晶体管M6及晶体管M7且在层50中形成n沟道型OS晶体管的晶体管M1至晶体管M5的例子。因此,在层40中形成区域51a且在层50中形成区域51b(在图45中未图示)。也就是说,可以将区域51a与区域51b重叠设置。此外,图45示出在层60中形成发光元件61的例子。For example, the semiconductor device 100Cb may have a stacked structure of layer 40 , layer 50 , and layer 60 . FIG. 45 is a schematic perspective view of a case where the semiconductor device 100Cb has a stacked structure of the layer 40 , the layer 50 , and the layer 60 . FIG. 45 shows an example in which the transistor M6 and the transistor M7 of the p-channel Si transistor are formed in the layer 40 and the transistors M1 to M5 of the n-channel OS transistor are formed in the layer 50 . Thus, region 51a is formed in layer 40 and region 51b is formed in layer 50 (not shown in Figure 45). In other words, the area 51a and the area 51b may be overlapped. Furthermore, FIG. 45 shows an example in which the light-emitting element 61 is formed in the layer 60 .
在图45中,构成像素电路51Cb的部分晶体管设置在层40中,其他的部分晶体管设置在层50中。通过层叠设置构成像素电路51Cb的晶体管,可以减小半导体装置100Cb的占有面积。因此,可以提高半导体装置100Cb的安装密度。此外,因为缓和对构成半导体装置100Cb的晶体管的配置及晶体管尺寸的限制,所以半导体装置的设计自由度得到提高。因此,可以提高半导体装置的可靠性。In FIG. 45 , some of the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51Cb are provided in the layer 40 , and some of the other transistors are provided in the layer 50 . By stacking the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51Cb, the area occupied by the semiconductor device 100Cb can be reduced. Therefore, the mounting density of the semiconductor device 100Cb can be increased. In addition, since restrictions on the arrangement and transistor size of the transistors constituting the semiconductor device 100Cb are relaxed, the degree of freedom in designing the semiconductor device is improved. Therefore, the reliability of the semiconductor device can be improved.
此外,通过在半导体装置100Cb中组合工作速度比OS晶体管快的Si晶体管与关态电流低的OS晶体管而使用,可以实现工作速度的提高及功耗的降低。Furthermore, by combining a Si transistor with a faster operating speed than an OS transistor and an OS transistor with a lower off-state current in the semiconductor device 100Cb, it is possible to improve the operating speed and reduce power consumption.
例如,通过在半导体装置100Cb等中使用Si晶体管,可以实现高速复位工作。此外,通过使用OS晶体管,可以长时间保持写入到节点ND3的视频信号Vdata。因此,在将半导体装置100Cb等用于像素的显示装置中,在显示静态图像时,通过进行空转停止驱动或者减小帧频率,可以降低功耗。通过使用OS晶体管,即便使帧频率显著小(例如1fps以下)也可以维持像素的灰度。For example, by using a Si transistor in the semiconductor device 100Cb or the like, a high-speed reset operation can be achieved. Furthermore, by using the OS transistor, the video signal Vdata written to the node ND3 can be maintained for a long time. Therefore, in a display device using the semiconductor device 100Cb or the like as a pixel, power consumption can be reduced by performing idling stop driving or reducing the frame frequency when displaying a still image. By using OS transistors, the gray scale of the pixels can be maintained even if the frame frequency is significantly small (for example, 1 fps or less).
此外,在发光元件61是底部发射型发光元件的情况下,在层40及层50的下层设置层60即可。此外,也可以在层50上形成层40。In addition, when the light-emitting element 61 is a bottom-emission light-emitting element, the layer 60 may be provided below the layer 40 and the layer 50 . Alternatively, layer 40 may be formed on layer 50.
<变形例子3><Deformation example 3>
图46示出半导体装置100C的变形例子的半导体装置100Cc。半导体装置100Cc包括像素电路51Cc。像素电路51Cc在像素电路51C所具有的晶体管M1至晶体管M7中作为晶体管M2及晶体管M5使用n沟道型OS晶体管且作为其他晶体管使用p沟道型Si晶体管。FIG. 46 shows a semiconductor device 100Cc which is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100C. The semiconductor device 100Cc includes a pixel circuit 51Cc. The pixel circuit 51Cc uses an n-channel OS transistor as the transistor M2 and the transistor M5 and a p-channel Si transistor as the other transistors among the transistors M1 to M7 included in the pixel circuit 51C.
<变形例子4><Deformation example 4>
图47示出半导体装置100C的变形例子的半导体装置100Cd。半导体装置100Cd包括像素电路51Cd。此外,像素电路51Cd在像素电路51C所具有的晶体管M1至晶体管M7中作为晶体管M5及晶体管M6使用p沟道型Si晶体管且作为晶体管M1至晶体管M4使用n沟道型OS晶体管。此外,晶体管M6的栅极与布线GLd电连接。此外,不设置有晶体管M7及电容器C3。通过晶体管M5采用p沟道型晶体管,可以省略形成晶体管M7及电容器C3。FIG. 47 shows a semiconductor device 100Cd which is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100C. The semiconductor device 100Cd includes a pixel circuit 51Cd. In addition, the pixel circuit 51Cd uses p-channel Si transistors as the transistors M5 and M6 and n-channel OS transistors as the transistors M1 to M4 among the transistors M1 to M7 included in the pixel circuit 51C. In addition, the gate of the transistor M6 is electrically connected to the wiring GLd. In addition, the transistor M7 and the capacitor C3 are not provided. By using a p-channel transistor as the transistor M5, the transistor M7 and the capacitor C3 can be omitted.
<变形例子5><Deformation example 5>
图48示出半导体装置100Cd的变形例子的半导体装置100Ce。如图48所示,作为晶体管M5也可以使用p沟道型Si晶体管且作为晶体管M1至晶体管M4及晶体管M6也可以使用n沟道型OS晶体管。晶体管M6的栅极与布线GLa电连接。FIG. 48 shows a semiconductor device 100Ce which is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100Cd. As shown in FIG. 48 , a p-channel Si transistor may be used as the transistor M5 and an n-channel OS transistor may be used as the transistors M1 to M4 and M6. The gate of the transistor M6 is electrically connected to the wiring GLa.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式4)(Embodiment 4)
在本实施方式中,对包括四个晶体管、一个电容器以及一个发光元件的半导体装置100D进行说明。图49A示出半导体装置100D的电路结构例子。半导体装置100D包括像素电路51D及发光元件61。像素电路51D包括晶体管M1至晶体管M4及电容器C1。In this embodiment mode, a semiconductor device 100D including four transistors, one capacitor, and one light-emitting element will be described. FIG. 49A shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100D. The semiconductor device 100D includes a pixel circuit 51D and a light emitting element 61 . The pixel circuit 51D includes transistors M1 to M4 and a capacitor C1.
晶体管M1的栅极与布线GLa电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线DL电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M2的栅极电连接。晶体管M1具有选择使晶体管M2的栅极与布线DL间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M1 is electrically connected to the wiring GLa, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring DL, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M2. The transistor M1 has a function of selecting whether the gate of the transistor M2 and the wiring DL are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
此外,晶体管M2的栅极与电容器C1的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线101电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C1的另一个端子电连接。另外,晶体管M2包括背栅极。晶体管M2的背栅极与电容器C1的另一个端子电连接。Furthermore, the gate of the transistor M2 is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C1, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 101, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C1. In addition, transistor M2 includes a back gate. The back gate of transistor M2 is electrically connected to the other terminal of capacitor C1.
晶体管M3的栅极与布线GLc电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与电容器C1的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103电连接。晶体管M3具有选择使晶体管M2的栅极与布线103间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M3 is electrically connected to the wiring GLC, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C1 , and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 103 . The transistor M3 has a function of selecting whether the gate of the transistor M2 and the wiring 103 are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
此外,晶体管M4的栅极与布线GLb电连接,晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的一个与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接。此外,晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103电连接。晶体管M4具有选择使布线103与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。Furthermore, the gate of the transistor M4 is electrically connected to the wiring GLb, and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M4 is electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2. In addition, the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M4 is electrically connected to the wiring 103 . The transistor M4 has a function of selecting whether the wiring 103 and the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2 are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
此外,晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个与发光元件61的一个端子(例如,阳极端子)电连接。此外,发光元件61的另一个端子(例如,阴极端子)与布线104电连接。Furthermore, the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M2 is electrically connected to one terminal (for example, an anode terminal) of the light emitting element 61 . In addition, the other terminal (eg, cathode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61 is electrically connected to the wiring 104 .
另外,将电容器C1的一个端子、晶体管M1的源极和漏极中的另一个、晶体管M2的栅极以及晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的一个电连接的区域也称为节点ND1。In addition, a region electrically connecting one terminal of the capacitor C1, the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M1, the gate of the transistor M2, and one of the source and the drain of the transistor M3 is also called a node ND1.
另外,将电容器C1的一个端子、晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个及发光元件61的一个端子电连接的区域也称为节点ND2。In addition, a region electrically connecting one terminal of the capacitor C1, the other of the source and drain of the transistor M2, and one terminal of the light-emitting element 61 is also called a node ND2.
此外,如图49B所示,作为晶体管M2也可以使用p沟道型晶体管。在此情况下,电容器C1的另一个端子与布线101电连接。In addition, as shown in FIG. 49B , a p-channel transistor may be used as the transistor M2. In this case, the other terminal of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the wiring 101 .
根据本实施方式所示的半导体装置100D,可以降低晶体管的个数,所以可以减小占有面积。According to the semiconductor device 100D shown in this embodiment mode, the number of transistors can be reduced, so the occupied area can be reduced.
此外,如图50A所示,也可以采用包括四个p沟道型晶体管、两个电容器以及一个发光元件的半导体装置100E。半导体装置100E包括像素电路51E及发光元件61。像素电路51E包括晶体管M1至晶体管M4、电容器C1及电容器C2。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 50A , a semiconductor device 100E including four p-channel transistors, two capacitors, and one light-emitting element may be used. The semiconductor device 100E includes a pixel circuit 51E and a light-emitting element 61 . The pixel circuit 51E includes transistors M1 to M4, capacitors C1 and C2.
晶体管M1的栅极与布线GLa电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线DL电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M3的栅极电连接。晶体管M1具有选择使晶体管M3的栅极与布线DL间处于导通状态还是非导通状态的功能。The gate of the transistor M1 is electrically connected to the wiring GLa, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring DL, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M3. The transistor M1 has a function of selecting whether the gate of the transistor M3 and the wiring DL are in a conductive state or a non-conductive state.
晶体管M2的栅极与布线GLb电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线101电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的一个电连接。The gate of the transistor M2 is electrically connected to the wiring GLb, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 101, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to one of the source and the drain of the transistor M3.
晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M4的源极和漏极中的一个电连接。晶体管M4的栅极与布线GLc电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与布线103电连接。The other of the source and the drain of the transistor M3 is electrically connected to one of the source and the drain of the transistor M4. The gate of the transistor M4 is electrically connected to the wiring GLC, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring 103 .
此外,晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的另一个与发光元件61的一个端子电连接。此外,发光元件61的另一个端子与布线104电连接。In addition, the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M3 is electrically connected to one terminal of the light-emitting element 61 . In addition, the other terminal of the light-emitting element 61 is electrically connected to the wiring 104 .
电容器C1的一个端子与晶体管M3的源极和漏极中的一个电连接。电容器C1的另一个端子与晶体管M3的栅极电连接。电容器C2的一个端子与布线101电连接。电容器C2的另一个端子与电容器C1的一个端子电连接。One terminal of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one of the source and drain of transistor M3. The other terminal of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the gate of transistor M3. One terminal of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the wiring 101 . The other terminal of capacitor C2 is electrically connected to one terminal of capacitor C1.
此外,如图50B所示,作为晶体管M1及晶体管M4也可以使用n沟道型晶体管。In addition, as shown in FIG. 50B , n-channel transistors may be used as the transistor M1 and the transistor M4.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式5)(Embodiment 5)
在本实施方式中,说明本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100F。半导体装置100F是图41所示的半导体装置100C的变形例子。为了减少反复说明,主要说明半导体装置100F的与图41所示的半导体装置100C不同之处。In this embodiment, a semiconductor device 100F according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device 100F is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100C shown in FIG. 41 . In order to reduce repetitive description, the differences between the semiconductor device 100F and the semiconductor device 100C shown in FIG. 41 will be mainly described.
<结构例子><Structure example>
图51示出半导体装置100F的电路结构例子。半导体装置100F包括像素电路51F、发光元件61a及发光元件61b。像素电路51F具有与图41所示的像素电路51C相同的结构,但是与像素电路51C不同之处是:晶体管M5的源极和漏极中的另一个与发光元件61a的一个端子(例如,阳极端子)及发光元件61b的一个端子(例如,阳极端子)电连接。FIG. 51 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100F. The semiconductor device 100F includes a pixel circuit 51F, a light-emitting element 61a, and a light-emitting element 61b. The pixel circuit 51F has the same structure as the pixel circuit 51C shown in FIG. 41, but is different from the pixel circuit 51C in that the other of the source and drain of the transistor M5 is connected to one terminal (for example, an anode) of the light-emitting element 61a. terminal) and one terminal (eg, anode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61b are electrically connected.
此外,发光元件61a的另一个端子(例如,阴极端子)与布线104a电连接。发光元件61b的另一个端子(例如,阴极端子)与布线104b电连接。In addition, the other terminal (eg, cathode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61a is electrically connected to the wiring 104a. The other terminal (eg, cathode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61b is electrically connected to the wiring 104b.
注意,构成像素电路51F的晶体管中的晶体管M1、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6及晶体管M7被用作开关。因此,半导体装置100F可以如图52那样表示。Note that the transistor M1, M3, M4, M6, and M7 among the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51F are used as switches. Therefore, the semiconductor device 100F can be represented as shown in FIG. 52 .
<工作例子><Work example>
半导体装置100F可以通过控制布线104a及布线104b的电位而控制发光元件61a及发光元件61b的发光。例如,在想要使发光元件61a发光时,对布线104a供应电位Vc,对布线104b供应电位Va以上的电位,即可。此外,在想要使发光元件61b发光时,对布线104b供应电位Vc,对布线104a供应电位Va以上的电位,即可。The semiconductor device 100F can control the light emission of the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b by controlling the potentials of the wiring 104a and the wiring 104b. For example, when it is desired to cause the light-emitting element 61a to emit light, a potential Vc is supplied to the wiring 104a and a potential equal to or higher than the potential Va is supplied to the wiring 104b. In addition, when it is desired to cause the light-emitting element 61b to emit light, the potential Vc may be supplied to the wiring 104b, and a potential equal to or higher than the potential Va may be supplied to the wiring 104a.
此外,在想要使发光元件61a及发光元件61b的双方发光时,对布线104a及布线104b的双方供应电位Vc即可。In addition, when it is desired to cause both the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b to emit light, the potential Vc may be supplied to both the wiring 104a and the wiring 104b.
半导体装置100F可以由一个像素电路51F控制两个发光元件61(发光元件61a及发光元件61b)的发光。因此,每一个像素的像素电路的占有面积变小,所以容易提高显示装置的像素密度。此外,通过减小一个像素电路所需的面积,半导体装置及显示装置的设计自由度得到提高。因此,可以容易实现半导体装置及显示装置的高功能化并实现提高可靠性。The semiconductor device 100F can control the light emission of the two light-emitting elements 61 (the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b) with one pixel circuit 51F. Therefore, the area occupied by the pixel circuit of each pixel becomes smaller, making it easier to increase the pixel density of the display device. In addition, by reducing the area required for one pixel circuit, the degree of freedom in designing semiconductor devices and display devices is improved. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize high functionality of the semiconductor device and the display device and to improve reliability.
在本实施方式所示的结构也可以应用于半导体装置100A及半导体装置100B。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can also be applied to the semiconductor device 100A and the semiconductor device 100B.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式6)(Embodiment 6)
在本实施方式中,说明本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100G。半导体装置100G是图41所示的半导体装置100C的变形例子。所以,半导体装置100G也是半导体装置100F的变形例子。为了减少反复说明,主要说明半导体装置100G的与图41所示的半导体装置100C不同之处。In this embodiment, a semiconductor device 100G according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device 100G is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100C shown in FIG. 41 . Therefore, the semiconductor device 100G is also a modified example of the semiconductor device 100F. In order to reduce repetitive description, the differences between the semiconductor device 100G and the semiconductor device 100C shown in FIG. 41 will be mainly described.
<结构例子><Structure example>
图53示出半导体装置100G的电路结构例子。半导体装置100G包括像素电路51G、发光元件61a及发光元件61b。此外,像素电路51G包括电路52a及电路52b。FIG. 53 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100G. The semiconductor device 100G includes a pixel circuit 51G, a light-emitting element 61a, and a light-emitting element 61b. In addition, the pixel circuit 51G includes a circuit 52a and a circuit 52b.
电路52a包括晶体管M5a、晶体管M7a及电容器C3a。晶体管M5a的栅极与电容器C3a的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接。此外,晶体管M5a的源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C3a的另一个端子及发光元件61a的一个端子(例如,阳极端子)电连接。发光元件61a的另一个端子(例如,阳极端子)与布线104a电连接。此外,晶体管M7a的栅极与布线GLa电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线GLc电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M5a的栅极电连接。Circuit 52a includes transistor M5a, transistor M7a, and capacitor C3a. The gate of the transistor M5a is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C3a, and one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2. In addition, the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M5a is electrically connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C3a and one terminal (for example, the anode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61a. The other terminal (eg, anode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61a is electrically connected to the wiring 104a. Furthermore, the gate of the transistor M7a is electrically connected to the wiring GLa, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring GLC, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M5a.
此外,将晶体管M5a的栅极、电容器C3a的一个端子及晶体管M7a的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接的区域也称为节点ND4a。In addition, a region electrically connecting the gate of the transistor M5a, one terminal of the capacitor C3a, and the other of the source and drain of the transistor M7a is also called a node ND4a.
电路52b包括晶体管M5b、晶体管M7b及电容器C3b。晶体管M5b的栅极与电容器C3b的一个端子电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与晶体管M2的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接。此外,晶体管M5b的源极和漏极中的另一个与电容器C3b的另一个端子及发光元件61b的一个端子(例如,阳极端子)电连接。发光元件61b的另一个端子(例如,阳极端子)与布线104b电连接。此外,晶体管M7b的栅极与布线GLa电连接,源极和漏极中的一个与布线GLc电连接,源极和漏极中的另一个与晶体管M5b的栅极电连接。Circuit 52b includes transistor M5b, transistor M7b, and capacitor C3b. The gate of the transistor M5b is electrically connected to one terminal of the capacitor C3b, and one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the other of the source and the drain of the transistor M2. In addition, the other one of the source and the drain of the transistor M5b is electrically connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C3b and one terminal (eg, anode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61b. The other terminal (eg, anode terminal) of the light-emitting element 61b is electrically connected to the wiring 104b. Furthermore, the gate of the transistor M7b is electrically connected to the wiring GLa, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the wiring GLC, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor M5b.
此外,将晶体管M5b的栅极、电容器C3b的一个端子及晶体管M7b的源极和漏极中的另一个电连接的区域也称为节点ND4b。In addition, a region electrically connecting the gate of the transistor M5b, one terminal of the capacitor C3b, and the other of the source and drain of the transistor M7b is also called a node ND4b.
就是说,晶体管M5a及晶体管M5b相当于晶体管M5。晶体管M7a及晶体管M7b相当于晶体管M7。电容器C3a及电容器C3b相当于电容器C3。节点ND4a及节点ND4b相当于节点ND4。此外,发光元件61a及发光元件61b相当于发光元件61,布线104a及布线104b相当于布线104。That is, the transistor M5a and the transistor M5b correspond to the transistor M5. The transistor M7a and the transistor M7b correspond to the transistor M7. Capacitor C3a and capacitor C3b correspond to capacitor C3. Node ND4a and node ND4b are equivalent to node ND4. In addition, the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b correspond to the light-emitting element 61, and the wiring 104a and the wiring 104b correspond to the wiring 104.
<工作例子><Work example>
半导体装置100G通过控制布线104a及布线104b的电位而可以控制发光元件61a及发光元件61b发光。例如,在想将发光元件61a发光时,对布线104a供应电位Vc,对布线104b供应电位Va以上的电位,即可。此外,在想将发光元件61b发光时,对布线104b供应电位Vc,对布线104a供应电位Va以上的电位,即可。The semiconductor device 100G can control the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b to emit light by controlling the potentials of the wiring 104a and the wiring 104b. For example, when it is desired to cause the light-emitting element 61a to emit light, a potential Vc is supplied to the wiring 104a and a potential equal to or higher than the potential Va is supplied to the wiring 104b. In addition, when it is desired to cause the light-emitting element 61b to emit light, it is sufficient to supply the potential Vc to the wiring 104b and to supply a potential equal to or higher than the potential Va to the wiring 104a.
此外,在想将发光元件61a及发光元件61b的双方发光时,对布线104a及布线104b的双方供应电位Vc即可。Furthermore, when it is desired to cause both the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b to emit light, the potential Vc may be supplied to both the wiring 104a and the wiring 104b.
半导体装置100G可以使用晶体管M1、晶体管M2、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6、电容器C1及电容器C2的组合控制两个发光元件61(发光元件61a及发光元件61b)的发光。因此,一个像素的像素电路的占有面积变小,所以容易提高显示装置的像素密度。此外,通过减小一个像素电路所需的面积,提高半导体装置及显示装置的设计自由度。因此,可以容易实现半导体装置及显示装置的高功能化并实现提高可靠性。The semiconductor device 100G can control the light emission of the two light-emitting elements 61 (the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b) using a combination of the transistor M1, the transistor M2, the transistor M3, the transistor M4, the transistor M6, the capacitor C1, and the capacitor C2. Therefore, the area occupied by the pixel circuit of one pixel becomes smaller, making it easier to increase the pixel density of the display device. In addition, by reducing the area required for one pixel circuit, the design freedom of semiconductor devices and display devices is improved. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize high functionality of the semiconductor device and the display device and to improve reliability.
在本实施方式所示的结构可应用于半导体装置100A及半导体装置100B。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be applied to the semiconductor device 100A and the semiconductor device 100B.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式7)(Embodiment 7)
在本实施方式中,说明本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100H。半导体装置100H是图53所示的半导体装置100G的变形例子。为了减少反复说明,主要说明半导体装置100H的与半导体装置100G不同之处。In this embodiment, a semiconductor device 100H according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. The semiconductor device 100H is a modified example of the semiconductor device 100G shown in FIG. 53 . In order to reduce repetitive description, the differences between the semiconductor device 100H and the semiconductor device 100G will be mainly described.
<结构例子><Structure example>
图54示出半导体装置100H的电路结构例子。半导体装置100H包括像素电路51H、发光元件61a及发光元件61b。此外,像素电路51H包括电路52a及电路52b。FIG. 54 shows an example of the circuit configuration of the semiconductor device 100H. The semiconductor device 100H includes a pixel circuit 51H, a light-emitting element 61a, and a light-emitting element 61b. In addition, the pixel circuit 51H includes a circuit 52a and a circuit 52b.
半导体装置100H的与半导体装置100G不同之处是:电路52b所包括的晶体管M7b的源极和漏极中的一个与布线GLd电连接。此外,发光元件61a的阴极及发光元件61b的阴极的双方与布线104电连接。The semiconductor device 100H is different from the semiconductor device 100G in that one of the source and the drain of the transistor M7b included in the circuit 52b is electrically connected to the wiring GLd. In addition, both the cathode of the light-emitting element 61a and the cathode of the light-emitting element 61b are electrically connected to the wiring 104.
<工作例子><Work example>
半导体装置100H可以通过控制布线GLc及布线GLd的电位而控制发光元件61a及发光元件61b发光。例如,在想要只使发光元件61a发光时,在上述实施方式所示的期间T34,对布线GLc供应电位H,对布线GLd供应电位L即可。此外,在想要只使发光元件61b发光时,在上述实施方式所示的期间T34,对布线GLc供应电位L,对布线GLd供应电位H,即可。The semiconductor device 100H can control the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b to emit light by controlling the potentials of the wiring GLc and the wiring GLd. For example, when it is desired to cause only the light-emitting element 61a to emit light, the potential H is supplied to the wiring GLc and the potential L is supplied to the wiring GLd during the period T34 shown in the above embodiment. In addition, when it is desired to cause only the light-emitting element 61b to emit light, it is sufficient to supply the potential L to the wiring GLc and the potential H to the wiring GLd during the period T34 shown in the above embodiment.
此外,在想要使发光元件61a及发光元件61b的双方发光时,在上述实施方式所示的期间T34,对布线GLc及布线GLd的双方供应电位H即可。In addition, when it is desired to cause both the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b to emit light, the potential H may be supplied to both the wiring GLc and the wiring GLd during the period T34 shown in the above embodiment.
与半导体装置100G同样地,半导体装置100H也可以使用一组晶体管M1、晶体管M2、晶体管M3、晶体管M4、晶体管M6、电容器C1及电容器C2控制两个发光元件61(发光元件61a及发光元件61b)的发光。因此,一个像素的像素电路的占有面积变小,所以容易提高显示装置的像素密度。此外,通过减小一个像素电路所需的面积,提高半导体装置及显示装置的设计自由度。因此,可以容易实现半导体装置及显示装置的高功能化并实现提高可靠性。Like the semiconductor device 100G, the semiconductor device 100H can also control two light-emitting elements 61 (the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b) using a set of the transistor M1, the transistor M2, the transistor M3, the transistor M4, the transistor M6, the capacitor C1, and the capacitor C2. of glowing. Therefore, the area occupied by the pixel circuit of one pixel becomes smaller, making it easier to increase the pixel density of the display device. In addition, by reducing the area required for one pixel circuit, the design freedom of semiconductor devices and display devices is improved. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize high functionality of the semiconductor device and the display device and to improve reliability.
在本实施方式所示的结构可应用于半导体装置100A及半导体装置100B。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be applied to the semiconductor device 100A and the semiconductor device 100B.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式8)(Embodiment 8)
在本实施方式中,说明使用半导体装置100(半导体装置100A、半导体装置100B、半导体装置100C、半导体装置100Ca、半导体装置100Cb、半导体装置100Cc、半导体装置100Cd、半导体装置100Ce、半导体装置100D、半导体装置100E、半导体装置100F、半导体装置100G或半导体装置100H)的显示装置10的结构例子。图55A是说明显示装置10的方框图。显示装置10包括显示区域235、第一驱动电路部231及第二驱动电路部232。显示区域235包括配置为矩阵状的多个像素230。可以将根据本发明的一个方式的半导体装置100用于像素230。In this embodiment, the use of the semiconductor device 100 (semiconductor device 100A, semiconductor device 100B, semiconductor device 100C, semiconductor device 100Ca, semiconductor device 100Cb, semiconductor device 100Cc, semiconductor device 100Cd, semiconductor device 100Ce, semiconductor device 100D, semiconductor device 100E, semiconductor device 100F, semiconductor device 100G, or semiconductor device 100H) are structural examples of the display device 10 . FIG. 55A is a block diagram illustrating the display device 10. The display device 10 includes a display area 235 , a first driving circuit part 231 and a second driving circuit part 232 . The display area 235 includes a plurality of pixels 230 arranged in a matrix. The semiconductor device 100 according to one aspect of the present invention can be used for the pixel 230 .
第一驱动电路部231所包括的电路例如被用作扫描线驱动电路。第二驱动电路部232所包括的电路例如被用作信号线驱动电路。注意,在隔着显示区域235与第一驱动电路部231相对的位置也可以设置某个电路。在隔着显示区域235与第二驱动电路部232相对的位置也可以设置某个电路。注意,有时将第一驱动电路部231及第二驱动电路部232所包括的电路总称为“外围驱动电路”或“驱动电路”。The circuit included in the first drive circuit section 231 is used as a scanning line drive circuit, for example. The circuit included in the second drive circuit section 232 is used as a signal line drive circuit, for example. Note that a certain circuit may be provided at a position facing the first drive circuit unit 231 across the display area 235 . A certain circuit may be provided at a position facing the second drive circuit unit 232 across the display area 235 . Note that the circuits included in the first drive circuit section 231 and the second drive circuit section 232 are sometimes collectively referred to as “peripheral drive circuits” or “drive circuits”.
作为外围驱动电路也可以使用移位寄存器、电平转换器、反相器、锁存器、模拟开关或逻辑电路等各种电路。在外围驱动电路中可以使用晶体管及电容元件等。也可以通过与像素230所包括的晶体管相同工序形成外围驱动电路所包括的晶体管。Various circuits such as shift registers, level converters, inverters, latches, analog switches, and logic circuits can also be used as peripheral drive circuits. Transistors and capacitive elements can be used in peripheral drive circuits. The transistors included in the peripheral driving circuit may also be formed through the same process as the transistors included in the pixel 230 .
例如,也可以作为构成像素230的晶体管使用OS晶体管,也可以作为构成外围驱动电路的晶体管使用Si晶体管。OS晶体管的关态电流很低,由此可以降低功耗。此外,Si晶体管的工作速度比OS晶体管快,由此Si晶体管优选被用于外围驱动电路。另外,根据显示装置,也可以将OS晶体管用作构成像素230的晶体管和构成外围驱动电路的晶体管的双方。另外,根据显示装置,也可以将Si晶体管用作构成像素230的晶体管和构成外围驱动电路的晶体管的双方。另外,根据显示装置,也可以将Si晶体管用作构成像素230的晶体管,也可以将OS晶体管用作构成外围驱动电路的晶体管。For example, an OS transistor may be used as a transistor constituting the pixel 230, or a Si transistor may be used as a transistor constituting the peripheral drive circuit. The off-state current of the OS transistor is very low, thereby reducing power consumption. In addition, Si transistors operate faster than OS transistors, and thus Si transistors are preferably used in peripheral drive circuits. In addition, depending on the display device, the OS transistor may be used as both the transistor constituting the pixel 230 and the transistor constituting the peripheral drive circuit. In addition, according to the display device, Si transistors may be used as both transistors constituting the pixel 230 and transistors constituting the peripheral drive circuit. In addition, depending on the display device, a Si transistor may be used as a transistor constituting the pixel 230, or an OS transistor may be used as a transistor constituting the peripheral drive circuit.
另外,也可以将Si晶体管和OS晶体管的双方用作构成像素230的晶体管。另外,也可以将Si晶体管和OS晶体管的双方用作构成外围驱动电路的晶体管。In addition, both Si transistors and OS transistors may be used as transistors constituting the pixel 230 . In addition, both Si transistors and OS transistors may be used as transistors constituting the peripheral drive circuit.
另外,显示装置10包括大致平行地配置的m个(m为1以上的整数)布线236且该m个布线236的电位被第一驱动电路部231所包括的电路控制以及大致平行地配置的n个(n为1以上的整数)布线237且该n个布线237的电位被第二驱动电路部232所包括的电路控制。In addition, the display device 10 includes m (m is an integer greater than or equal to 1) wirings 236 arranged substantially in parallel, and the potential of the m wirings 236 is controlled by the circuit included in the first drive circuit unit 231 , and n wirings 236 arranged substantially in parallel. (n is an integer of 1 or more) wirings 237 , and the potential of the n wirings 237 is controlled by a circuit included in the second drive circuit unit 232 .
注意,图55A中示出布线236及布线237连接到像素230的例子。注意,布线236及布线237是一个例子,连接到像素230的布线不局限于布线236及布线237。Note that FIG. 55A shows an example in which the wiring 236 and the wiring 237 are connected to the pixel 230. Note that the wiring 236 and the wiring 237 are an example, and the wiring connected to the pixel 230 is not limited to the wiring 236 and the wiring 237.
显示区域235包括配置为m行n列的矩阵状的多个像素230。例如,配置在第r行(r表示任意数,在本实施方式等中,r为1以上且m以下的整数)的像素230通过第r个布线236与第一驱动电路部231电连接。此外,配置在第s列(s表示任意数,在本实施方式等中,s为1以上且n以下的整数)的像素230通过第s个布线237与第二驱动电路部232电连接。The display area 235 includes a plurality of pixels 230 arranged in a matrix of m rows and n columns. For example, the pixel 230 arranged in the r-th row (r represents an arbitrary number, and in this embodiment and the like, r is an integer from 1 to m) is electrically connected to the first drive circuit unit 231 through the r-th wiring 236 . In addition, the pixel 230 arranged in the s-th column (s represents an arbitrary number, and in this embodiment and the like, s is an integer from 1 to n) is electrically connected to the second drive circuit unit 232 through the s-th wiring 237 .
将控制红色光的像素230、控制绿色光的像素230以及控制蓝色光的像素230配置为条纹状,将其一起用作一个像素240而控制每个像素230的发光量(发光亮度),由此能够实现全彩色显示。由此,该三个像素230分别被用作子像素。换言之,三个子像素分别控制红色光、绿色光或蓝色光的发光量等(参照图55B1)。此外,三个子像素分别控制的光的颜色不局限于红色(R)、绿色(G)及蓝色(B)的组合,也可以是青色(C)、品红色(M)及黄色(Y)(参照图55B2)。The pixels 230 that control red light, the pixels 230 that control green light, and the pixels 230 that control blue light are arranged in a stripe shape, and are used together as one pixel 240 to control the amount of light emission (light emission brightness) of each pixel 230. Able to achieve full color display. Therefore, the three pixels 230 are respectively used as sub-pixels. In other words, the three sub-pixels respectively control the emission amounts of red light, green light, or blue light (see FIG. 55B1 ). In addition, the color of the light controlled by the three sub-pixels is not limited to the combination of red (R), green (G) and blue (B), but can also be cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y). (Refer to Figure 55B2).
另外,作为构成一个像素240的三个像素230的配置方式,也可以采用Delta配置(参照图55B3)。具体而言,也可以以使构成一个像素240的三个像素230的每一个的中心点连接的线形成三角形的方式配置。In addition, as an arrangement method of three pixels 230 constituting one pixel 240, a delta arrangement may be adopted (see FIG. 55B3 ). Specifically, it may be arranged so that a line connecting the center points of each of the three pixels 230 constituting one pixel 240 forms a triangle.
另外,三个子像素(像素230)的各面积也可以不同。当根据发光颜色而发光效率及可靠性等不同时,也可以按发光颜色改变子像素的面积(参照图55B4)。另外,也可以将图55B4所示的子像素的配置称为“S条纹排列”等。In addition, the areas of each of the three sub-pixels (pixels 230) may be different. When the luminous efficiency, reliability, etc. differ depending on the luminescent color, the area of the sub-pixel may be changed according to the luminescent color (see FIG. 55B4 ). In addition, the arrangement of sub-pixels shown in FIG. 55B4 may also be called "S-stripe arrangement" or the like.
另外,也可以将四个子像素总用作一个像素。例如,也可以对分别控制红色光、绿色光及蓝色光的三个子像素追加控制白色光的子像素(参照图55B5)。通过追加控制白色光的子像素,能够提高显示区域的亮度。此外,也可以对分别控制红色光、绿色光及蓝色光的三个子像素追加控制黄色光的子像素(参照图55B6)。另外,也可以对分别控制青色光、品红色光及黄色光的三个子像素追加控制白色光的子像素(参照图55B7)。In addition, four sub-pixels may be used as one pixel. For example, a sub-pixel that controls white light may be added to three sub-pixels that respectively control red light, green light, and blue light (see FIG. 55B5 ). By adding sub-pixels that control white light, the brightness of the display area can be increased. In addition, a sub-pixel that controls yellow light may be added to the three sub-pixels that respectively control red light, green light, and blue light (see FIG. 55B6 ). In addition, a sub-pixel that controls white light may be added to the three sub-pixels that respectively control cyan light, magenta light, and yellow light (see FIG. 55B7 ).
通过增加用作一个像素的子像素的数量且适当地组合控制红色、绿色、蓝色、青色、品红色及黄色等的光的子像素而使用,可以提高半色调的再现性。因此,可以提高显示品质。The reproducibility of halftones can be improved by increasing the number of subpixels used as one pixel and using them in appropriate combination with subpixels that control light of red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, and the like. Therefore, display quality can be improved.
另外,如图56所示,也可以以在相邻的像素240间相同发光颜色的子像素相邻的方式配置S条纹排列的子像素(像素230)。In addition, as shown in FIG. 56 , sub-pixels (pixels 230 ) arranged in an S stripe arrangement may be arranged so that sub-pixels of the same emission color are adjacent to each other between adjacent pixels 240 .
另外,如图57A1及图57A2所示,在将像素230配置为条纹状的像素240中,也可以以在相邻的像素240间相邻的方式配置控制相同发光色的像素230。In addition, as shown in FIGS. 57A1 and 57A2 , among the pixels 240 in which the pixels 230 are arranged in a stripe shape, the pixels 230 controlling the same emission color may be arranged adjacent to each other between adjacent pixels 240 .
在图57A1及图57A2中,控制红色光的像素230a及像素230b在行方向上相邻,控制绿色光的像素230a及像素230b在行方向上相邻,控制蓝色光的像素230a及像素230b在行方向上相邻。图57A1及图57A2所示的像素240也可以说是在沿着列方向上将一个像素230分为两个的结构。另外,三个以上的相同发光颜色的像素230也可以相邻。也就是说,可以将一个像素230分为三个以上。In FIG. 57A1 and FIG. 57A2 , the pixel 230a and the pixel 230b that control red light are adjacent in the row direction, the pixel 230a and the pixel 230b that control the green light are adjacent in the row direction, and the pixel 230a and the pixel 230b that control the blue light are adjacent in the row direction. Adjacent. The pixel 240 shown in FIGS. 57A1 and 57A2 can also be said to have a structure in which one pixel 230 is divided into two along the column direction. In addition, three or more pixels 230 of the same emission color may be adjacent. In other words, one pixel 230 can be divided into three or more.
如图57A1所示,也可以由控制红色光的像素230a、控制绿色光的像素230a及控制蓝色光的像素230a构成一个像素240。此外,如图57A2所示,也可以由控制红色光的像素230a及像素230b、控制绿色光的像素230a及像素230b以及控制蓝色光的像素230a及像素230b构成一个像素240。As shown in FIG. 57A1 , one pixel 240 may be composed of a pixel 230 a that controls red light, a pixel 230 a that controls green light, and a pixel 230 a that controls blue light. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57A2 , one pixel 240 may be composed of pixels 230a and 230b that control red light, pixels 230a and 230b that control green light, and pixels 230a and 230b that control blue light.
通过在一个像素240中设置多个控制相同发光颜色的子像素,可以增加显示装置10能够再现的灰度数。因此,可以提高显示装置的显示品质。By arranging a plurality of sub-pixels that control the same light emission color in one pixel 240, the number of grayscales that the display device 10 can reproduce can be increased. Therefore, the display quality of the display device can be improved.
此外,如图57B所示,也可以以在列方向上彼此相邻的方式设置控制相同发光颜色的像素230a及像素230b。图57B所示的像素结构也可以说是在行方向上将图55B1所示的像素240分为两个的结构。通过分割像素240,可以提高显示区域235的像素密度。因此,可以实现更高清晰的图像显示。In addition, as shown in FIG. 57B , the pixel 230 a and the pixel 230 b that control the same emission color may be provided adjacent to each other in the column direction. The pixel structure shown in FIG. 57B can also be said to be a structure in which the pixel 240 shown in FIG. 55B1 is divided into two in the row direction. By dividing the pixels 240, the pixel density of the display area 235 can be increased. Therefore, higher-definition image display can be achieved.
此外,与图57A1及图57A2同样,在S条纹排列的像素240中,也可以将作为子像素的像素230分为多个(参照图57C)。图57C所示的像素240可以与图57A1及图57A2所示的像素240同样地工作。In addition, similarly to FIGS. 57A1 and 57A2 , in the pixels 240 arranged in S stripes, the pixels 230 serving as sub-pixels may be divided into a plurality of sub-pixels (see FIG. 57C ). The pixel 240 shown in FIG. 57C can operate similarly to the pixel 240 shown in FIGS. 57A1 and 57A2 .
另外,本发明的一个方式的显示装置可以再现各种规格的色域。例如,可以再现如下规格的色域等:在电视广播中使用的PAL(Phase Alternating Line:逐行倒相)规格及NTSC(National Television System Committee:美国国家电视标准委员会)规格;在用于个人计算机、数码相机或打印机等电子设备的显示装置中广泛使用的sRGB(standard RGB:标准RGB)规格及Adobe RGB规格;在HDTV(High Definition Television,也被称为高清)中使用的ITU-R BT.709(International Telecommunication Union RadiocommunicationSector Broadcasting Service(Television)709:国际电信联盟无线电通信部门广播服务(电视)709)规格;在数字电影放映中使用的DCI-P3(Digital Cinema InitiativesP3:数字电影倡导联盟P3)规格;或者在UHDTV(Ultra High Definition Television,也被称为超高清)中使用的ITU-R BT.2020(REC.2020(Recommendation 2020:建议2020))规格等。In addition, a display device according to one aspect of the present invention can reproduce color gamuts of various specifications. For example, it can reproduce the color gamut of the following standards: PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standards used in television broadcasts and NTSC (National Television System Committee: National Television Standards Committee) standards; used in personal computers sRGB (standard RGB: standard RGB) specification and Adobe RGB specification widely used in display devices of electronic equipment such as digital cameras and printers; ITU-R BT used in HDTV (High Definition Television, also called high definition). 709 (International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication Sector Broadcasting Service (Television) 709: International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication Sector Broadcasting Service (Television) 709) specification; DCI-P3 (Digital Cinema InitiativesP3: Digital Cinema Initiatives Alliance P3) specification used in digital cinema projection ; Or the ITU-R BT.2020 (REC.2020 (Recommendation 2020: Recommendation 2020)) specification used in UHDTV (Ultra High Definition Television, also known as Ultra High Definition), etc.
另外,通过将像素240配置为1920×1080的矩阵状,可以实现能够以所谓全高清(也称为“2K分辨率”、“2K1K”或“2K”等)的分辨率进行全彩色显示的显示装置10。另外,例如,通过将像素240配置为3840×2160的矩阵状,可以实现能够以所谓超高清(也称为“4K分辨率”、“4K2K”或“4K”等)的分辨率进行全彩色显示的显示装置10。另外,例如,通过将像素240配置为7680×4320的矩阵状,可以实现能够以所谓超高清(也称为“8K分辨率”、“8K4K”或“8K”等)的分辨率进行全彩色显示的显示装置10。通过增加像素240,还可以实现能够以16K或32K的分辨率进行全彩色显示的显示装置10。In addition, by arranging the pixels 240 in a matrix of 1920×1080, a display capable of full-color display at a resolution called full high-definition (also referred to as “2K resolution”, “2K1K” or “2K”, etc.) can be realized Device 10. In addition, for example, by arranging the pixels 240 in a matrix of 3840×2160, it is possible to realize full-color display with a resolution called ultra-high definition (also called “4K resolution”, “4K2K” or “4K”, etc.) display device 10. In addition, for example, by arranging the pixels 240 in a matrix of 7680×4320, it is possible to realize full-color display with a resolution called ultra-high definition (also called “8K resolution”, “8K4K” or “8K”, etc.) display device 10. By adding pixels 240, a display device 10 capable of full-color display at a resolution of 16K or 32K can also be realized.
另外,显示区域235的像素密度优选为100ppi以上且10000ppi以下,更优选为1000ppi以上且10000ppi以下。例如,显示区域235的像素密度可以为2000ppi以上且6000ppi以下,也可以为3000ppi以上且5000ppi以下。In addition, the pixel density of the display area 235 is preferably from 100 ppi to 10,000 ppi, and more preferably from 1,000 ppi to 10,000 ppi. For example, the pixel density of the display area 235 may be 2,000 ppi or more and 6,000 ppi or less, or may be 3,000 ppi or more and 5,000 ppi or less.
注意,显示区域235的纵横比(屏幕比)没有特别的限制。显示装置10的显示区域235例如可以对应于1:1(正方形)、4:3、16:9、16:10等各种纵横比。Note that the aspect ratio (screen ratio) of the display area 235 is not particularly limited. The display area 235 of the display device 10 may correspond to various aspect ratios such as 1:1 (square), 4:3, 16:9, 16:10, and the like.
显示区域235的对角尺寸可以为0.1英寸以上且100英寸以下,也可以为100英寸以上。The diagonal size of the display area 235 may be 0.1 inches or more and 100 inches or less, or may be 100 inches or more.
当将显示装置10用作虚拟现实(VR:Virtual Reality)用显示装置或增强现实(AR:Augmented Reality)用显示装置时,可以将显示区域235的对角尺寸设定为0.1英寸以上且5.0英寸以下,优选为0.5英寸以上且2.0英寸以下,更优选为1英寸以上且1.7英寸以下。例如,也可以将显示区域235的对角尺寸设定为1.5英寸或1.5英寸附近。通过将显示区域235的对角尺寸设定为2.0英寸以下,优选为1.5英寸附近,可以以曝光装置(典型的是扫描装置)的一次曝光处理进行处理,所以可以提高制造工艺的生产率。When the display device 10 is used as a display device for virtual reality (VR: Virtual Reality) or a display device for augmented reality (AR: Augmented Reality), the diagonal size of the display area 235 can be set to 0.1 inches or more and 5.0 inches. or less, preferably 0.5 inches or more and 2.0 inches or less, more preferably 1 inch or more and 1.7 inches or less. For example, the diagonal size of the display area 235 may be set to 1.5 inches or approximately 1.5 inches. By setting the diagonal size of the display area 235 to 2.0 inches or less, preferably around 1.5 inches, the processing can be performed with a single exposure process by an exposure device (typically a scanning device), so the productivity of the manufacturing process can be improved.
另外,也可以根据显示区域235的对角尺寸适当地选择用于显示区域235的晶体管的结构。例如,在将单晶Si晶体管用于显示区域235时,显示区域235的对角尺寸优选为0.1英寸以上且3英寸以下。另外,在将LTPS晶体管用于显示区域235时,显示区域235的对角尺寸优选为0.1英寸以上且30英寸以下,更优选为1英寸以上且30英寸以下。另外,在将LTPO(组合LTPS晶体管与OS晶体管的结构)用于显示区域235时,显示区域235的对角尺寸优选为0.1英寸以上且50英寸以下,更优选为1英寸以上且50英寸以下。另外,在将OS晶体管用于显示区域235时,显示区域235的对角尺寸优选为0.1英寸以上且200英寸以下,更优选为50英寸以上且100英寸以下。In addition, the structure of the transistor used in the display area 235 may be appropriately selected according to the diagonal size of the display area 235 . For example, when a single crystal Si transistor is used for the display area 235, the diagonal size of the display area 235 is preferably 0.1 inches or more and 3 inches or less. In addition, when an LTPS transistor is used for the display area 235, the diagonal size of the display area 235 is preferably 0.1 inch or more and 30 inches or less, and more preferably 1 inch or more and 30 inches or less. In addition, when LTPO (a structure combining an LTPS transistor and an OS transistor) is used for the display area 235, the diagonal size of the display area 235 is preferably 0.1 inch or more and 50 inches or less, and more preferably 1 inch or more and 50 inches or less. In addition, when an OS transistor is used for the display area 235, the diagonal size of the display area 235 is preferably 0.1 inches or more and 200 inches or less, and more preferably 50 inches or more and 100 inches or less.
单晶Si晶体管的尺寸是单晶Si衬底的尺寸,因此显示面板非常难以实现大型化。另外,LTPS晶体管在制造工序中使用激光晶化装置,因此难以对应于显示面板的大型化(典型的是对角尺寸为大于30英寸的屏幕尺寸)。另一方面,OS晶体管不受在制造工序中使用激光晶化装置等的限制,或者可以以较低的工艺温度(典型的是450℃以下)制造,因此还可以对应于具有较大面积(典型的是对角50英寸以上且100英寸以下)的显示面板。另外,LTPO可以用于使用LTPS晶体管时和使用OS晶体管时之间的区域的显示面板的尺寸(典型的是对角尺寸为1英寸以上且50英寸以下)。The size of a single crystal Si transistor is the size of a single crystal Si substrate, so it is very difficult to increase the size of a display panel. In addition, the LTPS transistor uses a laser crystallization device in the manufacturing process, so it is difficult to cope with the increase in the size of the display panel (typically a screen size of more than 30 inches in diagonal size). On the other hand, OS transistors are not limited by the use of laser crystallization equipment in the manufacturing process, or can be manufactured at a lower process temperature (typically 450°C or less), so they can also correspond to devices with a large area (typically is a display panel with a diagonal angle of 50 inches or more and less than 100 inches). In addition, LTPO can be used for display panel sizes in the area between when using LTPS transistors and when using OS transistors (typically a diagonal size of 1 inch or more and 50 inches or less).
<发光元件的结构例子><Structure example of light-emitting element>
对可用于本发明的一个方式的半导体装置的发光元件(也称为发光器件)进行说明。A light-emitting element (also referred to as a light-emitting device) usable in a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
如图58A所示,发光元件61在一对电极(导电层171和导电层173)间包括EL层172。EL层172可以由层4420、发光层4411及层4430等的多个层构成。层4420例如可以包括含有电子注入性高的物质的层(电子注入层)及含有电子传输性高的物质的层(电子传输层)等。发光层4411例如包含发光化合物。层4430例如可以包括含有空穴注入性高的物质的层(空穴注入层)及含有空穴传输性高的物质的层(空穴传输层)。As shown in FIG. 58A , the light-emitting element 61 includes an EL layer 172 between a pair of electrodes (conductive layer 171 and conductive layer 173 ). The EL layer 172 may be composed of a plurality of layers such as the layer 4420, the light-emitting layer 4411, and the layer 4430. The layer 4420 may include, for example, a layer containing a substance with high electron injection properties (electron injection layer), a layer containing a substance with high electron transport properties (electron transport layer), and the like. The light-emitting layer 4411 contains, for example, a light-emitting compound. The layer 4430 may include, for example, a layer containing a material with high hole injection properties (hole injection layer) and a layer containing a material with high hole transport properties (hole transport layer).
包括设置在一对电极间的层4420、发光层4411及层4430的结构可以用作单一的发光单元,在本说明书等中,将图58A的结构称为单结构。The structure including the layer 4420, the light-emitting layer 4411, and the layer 4430 provided between a pair of electrodes can be used as a single light-emitting unit. In this specification and the like, the structure of FIG. 58A is called a single structure.
此外,图58B是图58A所示的发光元件61所包括的EL层172的变形例子。具体而言,图58B所示的发光元件61包括导电层171上的层4430-1、层4430-1上的层4430-2、层4430-2上的发光层4411、发光层4411上的层4420-1、层4420-1上的层4420-2以及层4420-2上的导电层173。例如,在将导电层171及导电层173分别用作阳极及阴极时,层4430-1被用作空穴注入层,层4430-2被用作空穴传输层,层4420-1被用作电子传输层,层4420-2被用作电子注入层。或者,在将导电层171及导电层173分别用作阴极及阳极时,层4430-1被用作电子注入层,层4430-2被用作电子传输层,层4420-1被用作空穴传输层,层4420-2被用作空穴注入层。通过采用这种层结构,能够向发光层4411有效地注入载流子,而提高发光层4411内的载流子的再结合效率。In addition, FIG. 58B is a modified example of the EL layer 172 included in the light-emitting element 61 shown in FIG. 58A. Specifically, the light-emitting element 61 shown in FIG. 58B includes the layer 4430-1 on the conductive layer 171, the layer 4430-2 on the layer 4430-1, the light-emitting layer 4411 on the layer 4430-2, and the layer on the light-emitting layer 4411. 4420-1, layer 4420-2 on layer 4420-1, and conductive layer 173 on layer 4420-2. For example, when the conductive layer 171 and the conductive layer 173 are used as anode and cathode respectively, layer 4430-1 is used as a hole injection layer, layer 4430-2 is used as a hole transport layer, and layer 4420-1 is used as a hole transport layer. Electron transport layer, layer 4420-2 is used as an electron injection layer. Alternatively, when the conductive layer 171 and the conductive layer 173 are used as the cathode and the anode respectively, the layer 4430-1 is used as the electron injection layer, the layer 4430-2 is used as the electron transport layer, and the layer 4420-1 is used as the hole The transport layer, layer 4420-2, is used as a hole injection layer. By adopting such a layer structure, carriers can be efficiently injected into the light-emitting layer 4411, thereby improving the recombination efficiency of carriers in the light-emitting layer 4411.
此外,如图58C所示,层4420与层4430之间设置有多个发光层(发光层4411、发光层4412及发光层4413)的结构也是单结构的变形例子。In addition, as shown in FIG. 58C , a structure in which a plurality of light-emitting layers (light-emitting layer 4411, light-emitting layer 4412, and light-emitting layer 4413) is provided between layer 4420 and layer 4430 is also a modified example of a single structure.
如图58D所示,多个发光单元(EL层172a及EL层172b)隔着中间层(电荷产生层)4440串联连接的结构在本说明书等中被称为串联结构或叠层结构。通过采用串联结构,可以实现能够进行高亮度发光的发光元件61。As shown in FIG. 58D , a structure in which a plurality of light-emitting units (EL layer 172 a and EL layer 172 b ) are connected in series via an intermediate layer (charge generation layer) 4440 is called a series structure or a stacked structure in this specification and the like. By adopting a tandem structure, the light-emitting element 61 capable of emitting light with high brightness can be realized.
另外,当发光元件61具有图58D所示的串联结构时,可以使EL层172a和EL层172b的发光颜色相同。例如,EL层172a及EL层172b的发光颜色也可以都是绿色。当显示区域235包括R、G及B这三种子像素且各子像素包括发光元件时,各子像素的发光元件也可以具有串联结构。具体而言,R的子像素的EL层172a及EL层172b都包含能够发射红色光的材料,G的子像素的EL层172a及EL层172b都包含能够发射绿色光的材料,B的子像素的EL层172a及EL层172b都包含能够发射蓝色光的材料。换言之,发光层4411和发光层4412的材料也可以相同。通过使EL层172a和EL层172b的发光颜色相同,可以降低单位发光亮度的电流密度。因此,可以提高发光元件61的可靠性。In addition, when the light-emitting element 61 has the series structure shown in FIG. 58D, the EL layer 172a and the EL layer 172b can have the same emission color. For example, the EL layer 172a and the EL layer 172b may both emit green light. When the display area 235 includes three types of sub-pixels: R, G, and B, and each sub-pixel includes a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element of each sub-pixel may also have a series structure. Specifically, the EL layer 172a and EL layer 172b of the R sub-pixel both include materials capable of emitting red light, the EL layers 172a and EL layers 172b of the G sub-pixel both include materials capable of emitting green light, and the B sub-pixel Both the EL layer 172a and the EL layer 172b include materials capable of emitting blue light. In other words, the materials of the light-emitting layer 4411 and the light-emitting layer 4412 may be the same. By making the EL layer 172a and the EL layer 172b have the same emission color, the current density per unit emission luminance can be reduced. Therefore, the reliability of the light emitting element 61 can be improved.
发光元件的发光颜色可以根据构成EL层172的材料例如为红色、绿色、蓝色、青色、品红色、黄色或白色等。另外,通过使发光元件具有微腔结构,可以进一步提高色纯度。The light-emitting color of the light-emitting element may be, for example, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow or white depending on the material constituting the EL layer 172 . In addition, by providing the light-emitting element with a microcavity structure, the color purity can be further improved.
发光层也可以包含呈现R(红)、G(绿)、B(蓝)、Y(黄)或O(橙)等的发光的两种以上的发光物质。白色发光元件优选具有发光层包含两种以上的发光物质的结构。在使用两种发光物质得到白色发光的情况下,选择各发光物质的发光颜色处于补色关系的发光物质即可。或者,例如,通过使第一发光层的发光颜色与第二发光层的发光颜色处于补色关系,可以得到在发光元件整体上以白色发光的发光元件。此外,包括三个以上的发光层的发光元件的情况也是同样的。The light-emitting layer may contain two or more light-emitting substances that emit light such as R (red), G (green), B (blue), Y (yellow), or O (orange). The white light-emitting element preferably has a structure in which the light-emitting layer contains two or more light-emitting substances. When using two luminescent substances to obtain white luminescence, it is sufficient to select a luminescent substance whose luminescent colors are in a complementary color relationship. Alternatively, for example, by bringing the light-emitting color of the first light-emitting layer and the light-emitting color of the second light-emitting layer into a complementary color relationship, a light-emitting element that emits white light as a whole can be obtained. The same applies to a light-emitting element including three or more light-emitting layers.
发光层优选包含两种以上的呈现R(红)、G(绿)、B(蓝)、Y(黄)、O(橙)等的发光的发光物质。另外,优选的是,发光层包含两种以上的发光物质且每个发光物质的发光包含R、G及B中的两种以上的颜色的光谱成分。The light-emitting layer preferably contains two or more kinds of light-emitting substances that emit light such as R (red), G (green), B (blue), Y (yellow), O (orange), or the like. In addition, it is preferable that the light-emitting layer contains two or more kinds of light-emitting substances and that the emission of each light-emitting substance includes spectral components of two or more colors among R, G, and B.
作为发光物质,可以举出发射荧光的物质(荧光材料)、发射磷光的物质(磷光材料)、无机化合物(量子点材料等)、呈现热活化延迟荧光的物质(热活化延迟荧光(Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence:TADF)材料)等。此外,作为TADF材料,也可以使用单重激发态和三重激发态间处于热平衡状态的材料。这种TADF材料由于发光寿命(激发寿命)短,所以可以抑制发光元件的高亮度区域中的效率降低。Examples of luminescent substances include substances that emit fluorescence (fluorescent materials), substances that emit phosphorescence (phosphorescent materials), inorganic compounds (quantum dot materials, etc.), and substances that exhibit thermally activated delayed fluorescence (thermally activated delayed fluorescence). Fluorescence: TADF) materials), etc. In addition, as the TADF material, a material in a thermal equilibrium state between a singlet excited state and a triplet excited state can also be used. Since such a TADF material has a short emission lifetime (excitation lifetime), it can suppress a decrease in efficiency in the high-brightness region of the light-emitting element.
<发光元件的形成方法><Formation method of light-emitting element>
以下说明发光元件61的形成方法的一个例子。An example of a method of forming the light emitting element 61 will be described below.
图59A示出发光元件61的俯视示意图。在图59A等中,将呈现红色的发光元件61记为发光元件61R、将呈现绿色的发光元件61记为发光元件61G且将呈现蓝色的发光元件61记为发光元件61B。在图59A中为了便于区别各发光元件,在各发光元件的发光区域内附上符号“R”、“G”、“B”。此外,也可以将图59A所示的发光元件61的结构称为SBS(Side By Side)结构。另外,图59A示出具有红色(R)、绿色(G)及蓝色(B)这三个发光颜色的结构作为一个例子,但不局限于此。例如,也可以采用具有四个以上的颜色的结构。FIG. 59A shows a schematic top view of the light emitting element 61 . In FIG. 59A and the like, the light-emitting element 61 that displays red is referred to as the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61 that exhibits the green color is referred to as the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61 that exhibits the blue color is referred to as the light-emitting element 61B. In FIG. 59A , in order to easily distinguish each light-emitting element, symbols "R", "G", and "B" are attached to the light-emitting area of each light-emitting element. In addition, the structure of the light-emitting element 61 shown in FIG. 59A may also be called an SBS (Side By Side) structure. In addition, FIG. 59A shows a structure having three emission colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) as an example, but the structure is not limited to this. For example, a structure having four or more colors may be adopted.
发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B都排列为矩阵状。图59A示出所谓的条纹排列,即在一个方向上排列同一个颜色的发光元件的排列,但是,发光元件的排列方法不局限于此。作为发光元件的排列方法,可以采用delta排列、zigzag排列、S-Stripe排列或pentile排列等。The light-emitting elements 61R, 61G, and 61B are all arranged in a matrix. FIG. 59A shows a so-called stripe arrangement, that is, an arrangement in which light-emitting elements of the same color are arranged in one direction. However, the arrangement method of the light-emitting elements is not limited to this. As an arrangement method of light-emitting elements, delta arrangement, zigzag arrangement, S-Stripe arrangement, pentile arrangement, etc. can be used.
作为发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B,优选使用OLED(Organic LightEmittingDiode:有机发光二极管)或QOLED(Quantum-dot Organic Light EmittingDiode:量子点有机发光二极管)等有机EL器件。作为发光元件所包含的发光物质,可以举出发射荧光的物质(荧光材料)、发射磷光的物质(磷光材料)、无机化合物(量子点材料等)、呈现热活化延迟荧光的物质(热活化延迟荧光(Thermally activated delayedfluorescence:TADF)材料)等。As the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B, it is preferable to use organic EL devices such as OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode: organic light emitting diode) or QOLED (Quantum-dot Organic Light Emitting Diode: quantum dot organic light emitting diode). Examples of the light-emitting substance included in the light-emitting element include a substance that emits fluorescence (fluorescent material), a substance that emits phosphorescence (phosphorescent material), an inorganic compound (quantum dot material, etc.), and a substance that exhibits thermally activated delayed fluorescence (thermal-activated delayed fluorescence). Fluorescent (Thermally activated delayed fluorescence: TADF) materials), etc.
图59B为对应于图59A中的点划线A1-A2的截面示意图。图59B示出发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B的截面。发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B都设置在绝缘层363上且包括被用作像素电极的导电层171及被用作公共电极的导电层173。作为绝缘层363,可以使用无机绝缘膜和有机绝缘膜中的一方或双方。作为绝缘层363,优选使用无机绝缘膜。作为无机绝缘膜,例如可以举出氧化硅膜、氧氮化硅膜、氮氧化硅膜、氮化硅膜、氧化铝膜、氧氮化铝膜或氧化铪膜等氧化物绝缘膜及氮化物绝缘膜。FIG. 59B is a schematic cross-sectional view corresponding to the dash-dotted line A1-A2 in FIG. 59A. FIG. 59B shows cross sections of the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B. The light-emitting elements 61R, 61G and 61B are all disposed on the insulating layer 363 and include a conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and a conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode. As the insulating layer 363, one or both of an inorganic insulating film and an organic insulating film may be used. As the insulating layer 363, an inorganic insulating film is preferably used. Examples of the inorganic insulating film include oxide insulating films such as silicon oxide film, silicon oxynitride film, silicon oxynitride film, silicon nitride film, aluminum oxide film, aluminum oxynitride film, and hafnium oxide film, and nitrides. Insulating film.
发光元件61R在被用作像素电极的导电层171与被用作公共电极的导电层173之间包括EL层172R。EL层172R包含发射至少在红色波长区域具有强度的光的发光性有机化合物。发光元件61G中的EL层172G包含发射至少在绿色波长区域具有强度的光的发光性有机化合物。发光元件61B中的EL层172B包含发射至少在蓝色波长区域具有强度的光的发光性有机化合物。The light emitting element 61R includes an EL layer 172R between the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode. The EL layer 172R contains a luminescent organic compound that emits light having intensity at least in the red wavelength region. The EL layer 172G in the light-emitting element 61G contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits light with intensity in at least the green wavelength range. The EL layer 172B in the light-emitting element 61B contains a light-emitting organic compound that emits light with intensity in at least the blue wavelength range.
除了包含发光性有机化合物的层(发光层)以外,EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B各自还可以包括电子注入层、电子传输层、空穴注入层及空穴传输层中的一个以上。In addition to the layer including the light-emitting organic compound (light-emitting layer), each of the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B may include at least one of an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a hole injection layer, and a hole transport layer. .
每个发光元件都设置有被用作像素电极的导电层171。另外,被用作公共电极的导电层173为各发光元件共同使用的一连续的层。被用作像素电极的导电层171和被用作公共电极的导电层173中的任一个使用对可见光具有透光性的导电膜,另一个使用具有反射性的导电膜。通过使被用作像素电极的导电层171具有透光性且使被用作公共电极的导电层173具有反射性,可以制造底面发射型(底部发射结构)显示装置,通过使被用作像素电极的导电层171具有反射性且使被用作公共电极的导电层173具有透光性,可以制造顶面发射型(顶部发射结构)显示装置。注意,通过使被用作像素电极的导电层171和被用作公共电极的导电层173都具有透光性,也可以制造双面发射型(双面发射结构)显示装置。Each light emitting element is provided with a conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode. In addition, the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode is a continuous layer commonly used by each light-emitting element. One of the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode uses a conductive film that is translucent to visible light, and the other uses a conductive film that has reflectivity. By providing the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode with light transmittance and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode with reflectivity, a bottom emission type (bottom emission structure) display device can be manufactured. The conductive layer 171 is reflective and the conductive layer 173 used as the common electrode is light-transmissive, so that a top-emitting (top-emitting structure) display device can be manufactured. Note that a double-sided emission type (double-sided emission structure) display device can also be manufactured by making both the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode have light transmittance.
例如,在发光元件61R具有顶部发射结构时,来自发光元件61R的光175R被发射到导电层173一侧。在发光元件61G具有顶部发射结构时,来自发光元件61G的光175G被发射到导电层173一侧。在发光元件61B具有顶部发射结构时,来自发光元件61B的光175B被发射到导电层173一侧。For example, when the light-emitting element 61R has a top-emitting structure, the light 175R from the light-emitting element 61R is emitted to the conductive layer 173 side. When the light emitting element 61G has the top emission structure, the light 175G from the light emitting element 61G is emitted to the conductive layer 173 side. When the light emitting element 61B has a top emission structure, the light 175B from the light emitting element 61B is emitted to the conductive layer 173 side.
以覆盖被用作像素电极的导电层171的端部的方式设置绝缘层272。绝缘层272的端部优选为锥形形状。绝缘层272可以使用与可用于绝缘层363的材料同样的材料。The insulating layer 272 is provided so as to cover the end portion of the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode. The end of the insulating layer 272 is preferably tapered. The same material that can be used for the insulating layer 363 may be used for the insulating layer 272 .
绝缘层272是为了防止相邻的发光元件61之间非意图地电短路并从发光元件61非意图地发光而设置的。此外,绝缘层272还具有当使用金属掩模形成EL层172时不使金属掩模与导电层171接触的功能。The insulating layer 272 is provided to prevent the adjacent light-emitting elements 61 from being unintentionally electrically short-circuited and from unintentionally emitting light from the light-emitting elements 61 . In addition, the insulating layer 272 also has a function of preventing the metal mask from contacting the conductive layer 171 when the EL layer 172 is formed using a metal mask.
EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B各自包括与被用作像素电极的导电层171的顶面接触的区域以及与绝缘层272的表面接触的区域。另外,EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B的端部位于绝缘层272上。The EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B each include a region in contact with the top surface of the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and a region in contact with the surface of the insulating layer 272. In addition, the end portions of the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B are located on the insulating layer 272 .
如图59B所示,在呈现不同两个颜色的发光元件的EL层之间设置间隙。如此,优选以互不接触的方式设置EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B。由此,可以适当地防止电流流过相邻的两个EL层而产生非意图性发光(也称为串扰)。因此,可以提高对比度并实现显示品质高的显示装置。As shown in FIG. 59B, a gap is provided between the EL layers of the light-emitting elements exhibiting two different colors. In this way, it is preferable to provide the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B so as not to contact each other. This can appropriately prevent current from flowing through two adjacent EL layers and causing unintentional light emission (also called crosstalk). Therefore, the contrast ratio can be improved and a display device with high display quality can be realized.
例如,可以利用使用金属掩模等遮蔽掩模的真空蒸镀法等分开形成EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B。另外,也可以通过光刻法分开形成上述EL层。通过利用光刻法,可以实现在使用金属掩模时难以实现的高清晰度的显示装置。For example, the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B can be formed separately by a vacuum evaporation method using a shadow mask such as a metal mask. In addition, the above-mentioned EL layer may be formed separately by photolithography. By utilizing the photolithography method, a high-definition display device that is difficult to achieve using a metal mask can be realized.
注意,在本说明书等中,有时将使用金属掩模或FMM(Fine Metal Mask,高精细金属掩模)制造的器件称为MM(Metal Mask)结构的器件。另外,在本说明书等中,有时将不使用金属掩模或FMM制造的器件称为MML(Metal Mask Less)结构的器件。MML结构的显示装置由于不使用金属掩模制造,因此其像素配置及像素形状等的设计自由度比MM结构的显示装置高。Note that in this specification and the like, a device manufactured using a metal mask or FMM (Fine Metal Mask) is sometimes referred to as a device with an MM (Metal Mask) structure. In addition, in this specification and the like, a device manufactured without using a metal mask or FMM may be referred to as a device with an MML (Metal Mask Less) structure. Since a display device with an MML structure is not manufactured using a metal mask, it has a higher degree of design freedom in terms of pixel arrangement and pixel shape than a display device with an MM structure.
以覆盖发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B的方式在被用作公共电极的导电层173上设置保护层271。保护层271具有防止水等杂质从上方扩散到各发光元件的功能。The protective layer 271 is provided on the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode so as to cover the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B. The protective layer 271 has the function of preventing impurities such as water from diffusing into each light-emitting element from above.
保护层271例如可以采用至少包括无机绝缘膜的单层结构或叠层结构。作为无机绝缘膜,例如可以举出氧化硅膜、氧氮化硅膜、氮氧化硅膜、氮化硅膜、氧化铝膜、氧氮化铝膜或氧化铪膜等氧化物膜或氮化物膜。另外,作为保护层271也可以使用铟镓氧化物或铟镓锌氧化物(IGZO)等半导体材料。另外,保护层271利用ALD法、CVD法或溅射法形成即可。注意,在此例示出保护层271包括无机绝缘膜的结构,但不局限于此。例如,保护层271也可以具有无机绝缘膜和有机绝缘膜的叠层结构。The protective layer 271 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked-layer structure including at least an inorganic insulating film, for example. Examples of the inorganic insulating film include oxide films or nitride films such as silicon oxide films, silicon oxynitride films, silicon oxynitride films, silicon nitride films, aluminum oxide films, aluminum oxynitride films, and hafnium oxide films. . In addition, a semiconductor material such as indium gallium oxide or indium gallium zinc oxide (IGZO) may be used as the protective layer 271 . In addition, the protective layer 271 may be formed by the ALD method, CVD method or sputtering method. Note that the structure in which the protective layer 271 includes an inorganic insulating film is exemplified here, but is not limited to this. For example, the protective layer 271 may have a stacked structure of an inorganic insulating film and an organic insulating film.
在本说明书中,氮氧化物是指氮含量大于氧含量的化合物。另外,氧氮化物是指氧含量大于氮含量的化合物。此外,例如可以使用卢瑟福背散射光谱学法(RBS:RutherfordBackscattering Spectrometry)等来测定各元素的含量。In this specification, nitrogen oxide refers to a compound with a nitrogen content greater than that of oxygen. In addition, oxynitride refers to a compound with an oxygen content greater than that of nitrogen. In addition, the content of each element can be measured using, for example, Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry (RBS: Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry).
当保护层271使用铟镓锌氧化物时,可以利用湿蚀刻法或干蚀刻法进行加工。例如,当保护层271使用IGZO时,可以使用草酸、磷酸或混合药液(例如,磷酸、醋酸、硝酸和水的混合药液(也称为混合酸铝蚀刻液))等药液。该混合酸铝蚀刻液可以以磷酸:醋酸:硝酸:水=53.3:6.7:3.3:36.7附近的体积比进行配制。When the protective layer 271 uses indium gallium zinc oxide, it can be processed by wet etching or dry etching. For example, when the protective layer 271 uses IGZO, a chemical solution such as oxalic acid, phosphoric acid, or a mixed chemical solution (for example, a mixed chemical solution of phosphoric acid, acetic acid, nitric acid, and water (also called a mixed aluminum acid etching solution)) may be used. The mixed aluminum acid etching solution can be prepared with a volume ratio of phosphoric acid: acetic acid: nitric acid: water = around 53.3:6.7:3.3:36.7.
图59C示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,在图59C中,发光元件61包括呈现白色光的发光元件61W。发光元件61W在被用作像素电极的导电层171与被用作公共电极的导电层173之间包括呈现白色光的EL层172W。FIG. 59C shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, in FIG. 59C , the light-emitting element 61 includes a light-emitting element 61W that emits white light. The light-emitting element 61W includes an EL layer 172W that exhibits white light between the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode.
作为EL层172W,例如可以采用层叠有以各自的发光颜色成为补色关系的方式选择的两个发光层的结构。另外,也可以使用在发光层之间夹着电荷产生层的叠层型EL层。此外,EL层172W也可以包括三个以上的发光层。The EL layer 172W may have, for example, a structure in which two light-emitting layers selected so that their respective light-emitting colors are in a complementary color relationship are laminated. Alternatively, a stacked EL layer in which a charge generation layer is sandwiched between light-emitting layers may be used. In addition, the EL layer 172W may include three or more light-emitting layers.
图59C并列地示出三个发光元件61W。左边的发光元件61W的上部设置有着色层264R。着色层264R被用作使红色光透过的带通滤光片。同样地,中间的发光元件61W的上部设置有使绿色光透过的着色层264G,右边的发光元件61W的上部设置有使蓝色光透过的着色层264B。由此,可以使显示装置显示彩色图像。FIG. 59C shows three light-emitting elements 61W side by side. A colored layer 264R is provided on the upper part of the left light-emitting element 61W. The colored layer 264R is used as a bandpass filter that transmits red light. Similarly, a colored layer 264G that transmits green light is provided on the upper part of the middle light-emitting element 61W, and a colored layer 264B that transmits blue light is provided on the upper part of the right light-emitting element 61W. This allows the display device to display a color image.
在此,在相邻的两个发光元件61W之间,EL层172W及被用作公共电极的导电层173彼此分开。由此,可以防止在相邻的两个发光元件61W中电流通过EL层172W流过而产生非意图性发光。特别是在作为EL层172W使用两个发光层之间设有电荷产生层的叠层型EL层时具有如下问题:当清晰度越高,即相邻的像素间的距离越小时,串扰的影响越明显,而对比度降低。因此,通过采用这种结构而可以实现兼具高清晰度和高对比度的显示装置。Here, between two adjacent light emitting elements 61W, the EL layer 172W and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode are separated from each other. This can prevent the two adjacent light-emitting elements 61W from causing unintentional light emission due to current flowing through the EL layer 172W. In particular, when using a stacked EL layer with a charge generation layer between two light-emitting layers as the EL layer 172W, there is a problem that the higher the definition, that is, the smaller the distance between adjacent pixels, the smaller the influence of crosstalk. The more obvious it is, and the contrast is reduced. Therefore, by adopting this structure, a display device having both high definition and high contrast can be realized.
优选利用光刻法分开EL层172W及被用作公共电极的导电层173。由此,可以缩小发光元件之间的间隙,因此例如与使用金属掩模等遮蔽掩模时相比,可以实现具有高开口率的显示装置。The EL layer 172W and the conductive layer 173 used as a common electrode are preferably separated using photolithography. This makes it possible to reduce the gap between the light-emitting elements, so that a display device having a high aperture ratio can be realized compared to when a shadow mask such as a metal mask is used.
注意,当在本发明的一个方式的显示装置中使用底部发射结构的发光元件时,在被用作像素电极的导电层171与绝缘层363之间设置着色层即可。Note that when a light-emitting element with a bottom emission structure is used in a display device according to one embodiment of the present invention, a colored layer may be provided between the conductive layer 171 used as a pixel electrode and the insulating layer 363 .
图59D示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,在图59D中,发光元件61R、发光元件61G与发光元件61B之间没有设置绝缘层272。通过采用该结构,可以实现较高的开口率。另外,由于不设置绝缘层272而减小发光元件61的凹凸,所以可以实现视角得到提高的显示装置。具体而言,可以将视角设为150°以上且小于180°,优选为160°以上且小于180°,更优选为160°以上且小于180°。Fig. 59D shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, in FIG. 59D , the insulating layer 272 is not provided between the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B. By adopting this structure, a higher opening ratio can be achieved. In addition, since the insulating layer 272 is not provided and the unevenness of the light-emitting element 61 is reduced, a display device with an improved viewing angle can be realized. Specifically, the viewing angle can be 150° or more and less than 180°, preferably 160° or more and less than 180°, more preferably 160° or more and less than 180°.
另外,保护层271覆盖EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B的侧面。通过采用该结构,可以抑制有可能从EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B的侧面进入的杂质(典型的是水等)。因此,相邻的发光元件61之间的泄漏电流得到降低,所以彩度及对比度得到提高且功耗得到降低。In addition, the protective layer 271 covers the side surfaces of the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B. By adopting this structure, it is possible to suppress impurities (typically water, etc.) that may enter from the side surfaces of the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B. Therefore, leakage current between adjacent light-emitting elements 61 is reduced, so chroma and contrast are improved and power consumption is reduced.
另外,在图59D所示的结构中,导电层171、EL层172R及导电层173的顶面形状大致一致。这种结构可以在形成导电层171、EL层172R及导电层173之后利用抗蚀剂掩模等一齐形成。这种工艺由于将导电层173用作掩模对EL层172R及导电层173进行加工,因此也可以被称为自对准构图。注意,在此对EL层172R进行说明,但EL层172G及EL层172B也可以采用同样的结构。In addition, in the structure shown in FIG. 59D , the shapes of the top surfaces of the conductive layer 171 , the EL layer 172R, and the conductive layer 173 are substantially the same. This structure can be formed simultaneously using a resist mask or the like after forming the conductive layer 171, the EL layer 172R, and the conductive layer 173. This process can also be called self-aligned patterning because the conductive layer 173 is used as a mask to process the EL layer 172R and the conductive layer 173 . Note that although the EL layer 172R is described here, the EL layer 172G and the EL layer 172B may also adopt the same structure.
另外,在图59D中,保护层271上还设置有保护层273。例如,通过利用能够沉积覆盖性较高的膜的装置(典型的是ALD装置等)形成保护层271且利用沉积其覆盖性比保护层271低的膜的装置(典型的是溅射装置等)形成保护层273,可以在保护层271与保护层273之间设置区域275。换言之,区域275位于EL层172R与EL层172G之间以及EL层172G与EL层172B之间。In addition, in FIG. 59D , a protective layer 273 is also provided on the protective layer 271 . For example, the protective layer 271 is formed by using an apparatus capable of depositing a film with high coverage (typically an ALD apparatus, etc.) and using an apparatus (typically a sputtering apparatus, etc.) that can deposit a film having lower coverage than the protective layer 271 . To form the protective layer 273, a region 275 may be provided between the protective layer 271 and the protective layer 273. In other words, region 275 is located between EL layer 172R and EL layer 172G and between EL layer 172G and EL layer 172B.
区域275例如包含选自空气、氮、氧、二氧化碳和第18族元素(典型的为氦、氖、氩、氙及氪等)中的任一个或多个。另外,区域275有时例如包含在沉积保护层273时使用的气体。例如,在利用溅射法沉积保护层273时,区域275有时包含上述第18族元素中的任一个或多个。注意,在区域275包含气体时,可以利用气相层析法等进行气体的识别等。此外,在利用溅射法沉积保护层273时,保护层273的膜中也有时包含在进行溅射时使用的气体。在此情况下,当利用能量分散型X射线分析(EDX分析)等分析保护层273时有时检测出氩等元素。Region 275 includes, for example, any one or more selected from air, nitrogen, oxygen, carbon dioxide, and Group 18 elements (typically helium, neon, argon, xenon, krypton, etc.). In addition, region 275 sometimes contains gas used when depositing protective layer 273 , for example. For example, when the protective layer 273 is deposited by sputtering, the region 275 sometimes contains any one or more of the above-mentioned Group 18 elements. Note that when region 275 contains gas, gas chromatography or the like can be used to identify the gas. In addition, when the protective layer 273 is deposited by the sputtering method, the film of the protective layer 273 may contain a gas used during sputtering. In this case, when the protective layer 273 is analyzed using energy dispersive X-ray analysis (EDX analysis) or the like, elements such as argon may be detected.
另外,在区域275的折射率比保护层271的折射率低时,EL层172R、EL层172G或EL层172B所发射的光在保护层271与区域275的界面反射。由此,有时可以抑制EL层172R、EL层172G或EL层172B所发射的光入射到相邻的像素。由此,可以抑制从相邻的像素混入不同发光颜色,而可以提高显示装置的显示品质。In addition, when the refractive index of the region 275 is lower than the refractive index of the protective layer 271 , the light emitted by the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G or the EL layer 172B is reflected at the interface between the protective layer 271 and the region 275 . Thereby, it is sometimes possible to suppress light emitted from the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, or the EL layer 172B from being incident on adjacent pixels. This can suppress mixing of different light emission colors from adjacent pixels, thereby improving the display quality of the display device.
此外,在采用图59D所示的结构时,可以使发光元件61R与发光元件61G间的区域或者发光元件61G与发光元件61B间的区域(以下,简单地称为发光元件间的距离)变窄。具体而言,可以将发光元件间的距离设为1μm以下,优选为500nm以下,更优选为200nm以下、100nm以下、90nm以下、70nm以下、50nm以下、30nm以下、20nm以下、15nm以下或者10nm以下。换言之,具有EL层172R的侧面与EL层172G的侧面的间隔或者EL层172G的侧面与EL层172B的侧面的间隔为1μm以下的区域,优选为0.5μm(500nm)以下的区域,更优选为100nm以下的区域。In addition, when the structure shown in FIG. 59D is adopted, the area between the light-emitting element 61R and the light-emitting element 61G or the area between the light-emitting element 61G and the light-emitting element 61B (hereinafter simply referred to as the distance between the light-emitting elements) can be narrowed. . Specifically, the distance between the light-emitting elements can be 1 μm or less, preferably 500 nm or less, more preferably 200 nm or less, 100 nm or less, 90 nm or less, 70 nm or less, 50 nm or less, 30 nm or less, 20 nm or less, 15 nm or less, or 10 nm or less. . In other words, there is a region where the distance between the side surfaces of the EL layer 172R and the side surfaces of the EL layer 172G or the distance between the side surfaces of the EL layer 172G and the side surfaces of the EL layer 172B is 1 μm or less, preferably 0.5 μm (500 nm) or less, and more preferably Area below 100nm.
另外,例如,在区域275包含气体时,可以在进行发光元件间的元件分离的同时抑制来自各发光元件的光的混合或串扰等。In addition, for example, when the region 275 contains a gas, it is possible to perform element isolation between light-emitting elements while suppressing mixing of light from each light-emitting element, crosstalk, and the like.
另外,区域275也可以被填充剂填充。作为填充剂,可以举出环氧树脂、丙烯酸树脂、硅酮树脂、酚醛树脂、聚酰亚胺树脂、酰亚胺树脂、PVC(聚氯乙烯)树脂、PVB(聚乙烯醇缩丁醛)树脂或EVA(乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯)树脂等。另外,作为填充剂也可以使用光致抗蚀剂。被用作填充剂的光致抗蚀剂既可以是正型光致抗蚀剂,又可以是负型光致抗蚀剂。Additionally, area 275 may also be filled with filler. Examples of fillers include epoxy resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, phenolic resin, polyimide resin, imide resin, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resin, and PVB (polyvinyl butyral) resin. Or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resin, etc. In addition, a photoresist can also be used as a filler. The photoresist used as the filler can be either a positive photoresist or a negative photoresist.
此外,在对上述白色发光器件(单结构或串联结构)和SBS结构的发光器件进行比较的情况下,可以使SBS结构的发光器件的功耗比白色发光器件低。当想要降低功耗时,优选采用SBS结构的发光器件。另一方面,白色发光器件的制造工艺比SBS结构的发光器件简单,由此可以降低制造成本或者提高制造成品率,所以是优选的。In addition, when comparing the above-mentioned white light-emitting device (single structure or series structure) and the light-emitting device of the SBS structure, the power consumption of the light-emitting device of the SBS structure can be made lower than that of the white light-emitting device. When it is desired to reduce power consumption, it is preferred to use a light-emitting device with an SBS structure. On the other hand, the manufacturing process of a white light-emitting device is simpler than that of a light-emitting device with an SBS structure, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced or the manufacturing yield can be improved, so it is preferable.
图60A示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,图60A所示的结构的与图59D所示的结构不同之处在于绝缘层363的结构。在对发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B进行加工时绝缘层363的顶面的一部分被削掉而具有凹部。该凹部中形成保护层271。换言之,在从截面看时具有保护层271的底面位于导电层171的底面的下方的区域。通过具有该区域,可以适当地抑制可从下方进入到发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B的杂质(典型的是水等)。此外,上述凹部可在通过湿蚀刻等去除可在发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B的加工中附着于各发光元件的侧面的杂质(也称为残渣物)时形成。通过在去除上述残渣物之后以保护层271覆盖各发光元件的侧面,可以为可靠性高的显示装置。FIG. 60A shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, the structure shown in FIG. 60A is different from the structure shown in FIG. 59D in the structure of the insulating layer 363. When processing the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B, a part of the top surface of the insulating layer 363 is shaved off and has a recessed portion. A protective layer 271 is formed in this recess. In other words, there is a region in which the bottom surface of the protective layer 271 is located below the bottom surface of the conductive layer 171 when viewed in cross section. By having this region, impurities (typically water, etc.) that can enter the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B from below can be appropriately suppressed. In addition, the above-mentioned recessed portion may be formed when impurities (also referred to as residues) that may adhere to the side surfaces of the light-emitting elements 61R, 61G, and 61B during processing of the light-emitting elements 61R, 61G, and 61B are removed by wet etching or the like. By covering the side surfaces of each light-emitting element with the protective layer 271 after removing the above-mentioned residues, a highly reliable display device can be obtained.
此外,图60B示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,图60B所示的结构除了图60A所示的结构之外还包括绝缘层276及微透镜阵列277。绝缘层276被用作粘合层。另外,在绝缘层276的折射率比微透镜阵列277的折射率低时,微透镜阵列277可以聚集发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B所发射的光。由此,可以提高显示装置的光提取效率。尤其在用户从显示装置的显示面的正面看该显示面时,可以看到明亮的图像,所以这是优选的。此外,作为绝缘层276,可以使用紫外线固化粘合剂等光固化粘合剂、反应固化粘合剂、热固化粘合剂或厌氧粘合剂等各种固化粘合剂。作为这些粘合剂,可以举出环氧树脂、丙烯酸树脂、硅酮树脂、酚醛树脂、聚酰亚胺树脂、酰亚胺树脂、PVC(聚氯乙烯)树脂、PVB(聚乙烯醇缩丁醛)树脂或EVA(乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯)树脂等。尤其是,优选使用环氧树脂等透湿性低的材料。此外,也可以使用两液混合型树脂。此外,也可以使用粘合薄片等。In addition, FIG. 60B shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, the structure shown in FIG. 60B includes an insulating layer 276 and a microlens array 277 in addition to the structure shown in FIG. 60A. Insulating layer 276 is used as an adhesive layer. In addition, when the refractive index of the insulating layer 276 is lower than the refractive index of the microlens array 277, the microlens array 277 can collect the light emitted by the light emitting element 61R, the light emitting element 61G and the light emitting element 61B. As a result, the light extraction efficiency of the display device can be improved. This is particularly preferable because a bright image can be seen when the user looks at the display surface of the display device from the front. In addition, as the insulating layer 276, various curing adhesives such as photo-curing adhesives such as ultraviolet curing adhesives, reaction curing adhesives, thermosetting adhesives, and anaerobic adhesives can be used. Examples of these binders include epoxy resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, phenolic resin, polyimide resin, imide resin, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resin, PVB (polyvinyl butyral) ) resin or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resin, etc. In particular, materials with low moisture permeability such as epoxy resin are preferably used. In addition, a two-liquid mixed resin can also be used. In addition, an adhesive sheet or the like may also be used.
另外,图60C示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,图60C所示的结构包括三个发光元件61W而代替图60A所示的结构中的发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B。另外,在三个发光元件61W的上方包括绝缘层276,在绝缘层276的上方包括着色层264R、着色层264G及着色层264B。具体而言,重叠于左侧的发光元件61W的位置上设置有透过红色光的着色层264R,重叠于中央的发光元件61W的位置上设置有透过绿色光的着色层264G,重叠于右侧的发光元件61W的位置上设置有透过蓝色光的着色层264B。由此,显示装置可以显示彩色图像。图60C所示的结构也是图59C所示的结构的变形例子。In addition, FIG. 60C shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, the structure shown in FIG. 60C includes three light-emitting elements 61W instead of the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B in the structure shown in FIG. 60A. In addition, an insulating layer 276 is provided above the three light emitting elements 61W, and a colored layer 264R, a colored layer 264G, and a colored layer 264B are provided above the insulating layer 276 . Specifically, a colored layer 264R that transmits red light is provided overlapping the light-emitting element 61W on the left, a colored layer 264G that transmits green light is provided overlapping the light-emitting element 61W in the center, and a colored layer 264G that transmits green light is provided overlapping the light-emitting element 61W on the right. A colored layer 264B that transmits blue light is provided at the position of the light-emitting element 61W on the side. As a result, the display device can display color images. The structure shown in FIG. 60C is also a modified example of the structure shown in FIG. 59C.
另外,图60D示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,在图60D所示的结构中,保护层271以相邻于导电层171及EL层172的侧面的方式设置。另外,导电层173设置为各发光元件共同使用的一连续的层。另外,在图60D所示的结构中,区域275优选被填充剂填充。In addition, FIG. 60D shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, in the structure shown in FIG. 60D , the protective layer 271 is provided adjacent to the side surfaces of the conductive layer 171 and the EL layer 172 . In addition, the conductive layer 173 is provided as a continuous layer commonly used by each light-emitting element. In addition, in the structure shown in FIG. 60D , region 275 is preferably filled with filler.
通过使发光元件61具有光学微腔谐振器(微腔)结构,可以提高发光颜色的色纯度。在使发光元件61具有微腔结构时,被构成为将导电层171与导电层173间的距离d和EL层172的折射率n的积(光学距离)设定为波长λ的二分之一的m倍(m为1以上的整数),即可。距离d可以由算式1求出。By providing the light-emitting element 61 with an optical microcavity resonator (microcavity) structure, the color purity of the emitted color can be improved. When the light-emitting element 61 has a microcavity structure, the product (optical distance) of the distance d between the conductive layer 171 and the conductive layer 173 and the refractive index n of the EL layer 172 is set to one-half the wavelength λ. m times (m is an integer above 1), that's it. The distance d can be calculated from Equation 1.
d=m×λ/(2×n) (算式1)。d=m×λ/(2×n) (Equation 1).
根据算式1,在微腔结构的发光元件61中基于所发射的光的波长(发光颜色)来决定距离d。距离d相当于EL层172的厚度。因此,EL层172G有时以比EL层172B厚的方式设置,并且EL层172R有时以比EL层172G厚的方式设置。According to Equation 1, the distance d is determined based on the wavelength (light emission color) of the emitted light in the light-emitting element 61 with a microcavity structure. The distance d corresponds to the thickness of the EL layer 172 . Therefore, the EL layer 172G may be provided thicker than the EL layer 172B, and the EL layer 172R may be provided thicker than the EL layer 172G.
注意,严格地说,距离d是被用作反射电极的导电层171中的反射区域至被用作半透射-半反射电极的导电层173中的反射区域的距离。例如,在导电层171是银与透明导电膜的ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)的叠层且ITO位于EL层172一侧的情况下,通过调整ITO的厚度可以设定对应于发光颜色的距离d。就是说,即使EL层172R、EL层172G及EL层172B的厚度都相同,也通过改变该ITO的厚度可以得到适合于发光颜色的距离d。Note that, strictly speaking, the distance d is the distance from the reflective area in the conductive layer 171 used as a reflective electrode to the reflective area in the conductive layer 173 used as a semi-transmissive-semi-reflective electrode. For example, when the conductive layer 171 is a stack of silver and ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), a transparent conductive film, and the ITO is located on the EL layer 172 side, the distance d corresponding to the emission color can be set by adjusting the thickness of the ITO. That is, even if the thicknesses of the EL layer 172R, the EL layer 172G, and the EL layer 172B are all the same, the distance d suitable for the emission color can be obtained by changing the thickness of the ITO.
然而,有时难以严格地决定导电层171及导电层173中的反射区域的位置。此时,通过将导电层171及导电层173中的任意位置假设为反射区域可以充分得到微腔效应。However, it is sometimes difficult to strictly determine the positions of the reflective regions in the conductive layer 171 and the conductive layer 173 . At this time, the microcavity effect can be fully obtained by assuming that any position in the conductive layer 171 and the conductive layer 173 is a reflective region.
发光元件61由空穴注入层、空穴传输层、发光层、电子传输层或电子注入层等构成。将在其他实施方式中说明发光元件61的详细的结构例子。为了提高微腔结构的光提取效率,优选将被用作反射电极的导电层171至发光层的光学距离设为λ/4的奇数倍。为了实现该光学距离,优选调整构成发光元件61的各层的厚度。The light-emitting element 61 is composed of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light-emitting layer, an electron transport layer, an electron injection layer, or the like. Detailed structural examples of the light emitting element 61 will be described in other embodiments. In order to improve the light extraction efficiency of the microcavity structure, it is preferable to set the optical distance from the conductive layer 171 used as a reflective electrode to the light-emitting layer to an odd multiple of λ/4. In order to realize this optical distance, it is preferable to adjust the thickness of each layer constituting the light-emitting element 61 .
另外,在从导电层173一侧发射光时,导电层173的反射率优选比透过率高。导电层173的光透射率优选为2%以上且50%以下,更优选为2%以上且60%以下,进一步优选为2%以上且10%以下。通过降低导电层173的透过率(提高反射率),可以提高微腔效应。In addition, when light is emitted from the conductive layer 173 side, the reflectance of the conductive layer 173 is preferably higher than the transmittance. The light transmittance of the conductive layer 173 is preferably 2% or more and 50% or less, more preferably 2% or more and 60% or less, and still more preferably 2% or more and 10% or less. By reducing the transmittance (increasing the reflectivity) of the conductive layer 173, the microcavity effect can be increased.
图61A示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,在图61A所示的结构中,在各发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B中EL层172都超过导电层171的端部延伸。例如,在发光元件61R中EL层172R超过导电层171的端部延伸。另外,在发光元件61G中EL层172G超过导电层171的端部延伸。另外,在发光元件61B中EL层172B超过导电层171的端部延伸。FIG. 61A shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, in the structure shown in FIG. 61A , the EL layer 172 extends beyond the end of the conductive layer 171 in each of the light-emitting elements 61R, 61G, and 61B. For example, in the light-emitting element 61R, the EL layer 172R extends beyond the end of the conductive layer 171 . In addition, in the light-emitting element 61G, the EL layer 172G extends beyond the end of the conductive layer 171 . In addition, in the light-emitting element 61B, the EL layer 172B extends beyond the end of the conductive layer 171 .
另外,在各发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B中,EL层172和保护层271具有隔着绝缘层270重叠的区域。另外,在相邻的发光元件61之间的区域中,绝缘层278设置在保护层271上。In addition, in each of the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B, the EL layer 172 and the protective layer 271 have an overlapping region with the insulating layer 270 interposed therebetween. In addition, in the area between adjacent light emitting elements 61, the insulating layer 278 is provided on the protective layer 271.
作为绝缘层278,可以举出环氧树脂、丙烯酸树脂、硅酮树脂、酚醛树脂、聚酰亚胺树脂、酰亚胺树脂、PVC(聚氯乙烯)树脂、PVB(聚乙烯醇缩丁醛)树脂或EVA(乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯)树脂等。另外,作为绝缘层278也可以使用光致抗蚀剂。被用作绝缘层278的光致抗蚀剂既可以是正型光致抗蚀剂,又可以是负型光致抗蚀剂。Examples of the insulating layer 278 include epoxy resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, phenolic resin, polyimide resin, imide resin, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resin, and PVB (polyvinyl butyral). Resin or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resin, etc. In addition, a photoresist may be used as the insulating layer 278 . The photoresist used as the insulating layer 278 may be either a positive photoresist or a negative photoresist.
发光元件61R、发光元件61G、发光元件61B及绝缘层278上设置有公共层174,公共层174上设置有导电层173。公共层174具有接触于EL层172R的区域、接触于EL层172G的区域以及接触于EL层172B的区域。发光元件61R、发光元件61G和发光元件61B共同使用公共层174。A common layer 174 is provided on the light-emitting elements 61R, 61G, 61B and the insulating layer 278, and a conductive layer 173 is provided on the common layer 174. The common layer 174 has a region in contact with the EL layer 172R, a region in contact with the EL layer 172G, and a region in contact with the EL layer 172B. The light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B share the common layer 174 .
作为公共层174可以采用空穴注入层、空穴传输层、空穴阻挡层、电子阻挡层、电子传输层和电子注入层中的一个以上。例如,公共层174也可以是载流子注入层(空穴注入层或电子注入层)。另外,公共层174也可以说是EL层172的一部分。此外,根据需要设置公共层174即可。当设置公共层174时,作为EL层172所包括的层也可以不设置具有与公共层174相同的功能的层。As the common layer 174, more than one of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a hole blocking layer, an electron blocking layer, an electron transport layer and an electron injection layer may be used. For example, the common layer 174 may also be a carrier injection layer (a hole injection layer or an electron injection layer). In addition, the common layer 174 can also be said to be a part of the EL layer 172 . In addition, the common layer 174 can be provided as needed. When the common layer 174 is provided, a layer having the same function as the common layer 174 may not be provided as a layer included in the EL layer 172 .
保护层273设置在导电层173上,绝缘层276设置在保护层273上。The protective layer 273 is provided on the conductive layer 173 , and the insulating layer 276 is provided on the protective layer 273 .
另外,图61B示出与上述结构不同的例子。具体而言,图61B所示的结构包括三个发光元件61W而代替图61A所示的结构中的发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B。另外,在三个发光元件61W的上方包括绝缘层276,在绝缘层276的上方包括着色层264R、着色层264G及着色层264B。具体而言,重叠于左侧的发光元件61W的位置上设置有透过红色光的着色层264R,重叠于中央的发光元件61W的位置上设置有透过绿色光的着色层264G,重叠于右侧的发光元件61W的位置上设置有透过蓝色光的着色层264B。由此,显示装置可以显示彩色图像。图61B所示的结构也是图60C所示的结构的变形例子。In addition, FIG. 61B shows an example different from the above-mentioned structure. Specifically, the structure shown in FIG. 61B includes three light-emitting elements 61W instead of the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B in the structure shown in FIG. 61A. In addition, an insulating layer 276 is provided above the three light emitting elements 61W, and a colored layer 264R, a colored layer 264G, and a colored layer 264B are provided above the insulating layer 276 . Specifically, a colored layer 264R that transmits red light is provided overlapping the light-emitting element 61W on the left, a colored layer 264G that transmits green light is provided overlapping the light-emitting element 61W in the center, and a colored layer 264G that transmits green light is provided overlapping the light-emitting element 61W on the right. A colored layer 264B that transmits blue light is provided at the position of the light-emitting element 61W on the side. As a result, the display device can display color images. The structure shown in FIG. 61B is also a modified example of the structure shown in FIG. 60C.
图62A示出发光元件61的俯视示意图。与图57A1同样地,图62A示出将多个相同发光颜色的发光元件61相邻配置的例子。在图62A中,两个发光元件61R相邻,两个发光元件61G相邻,两个发光元件61B相邻。注意,三个以上的相同发光颜色的发光元件61也可以相邻。另外,图62A示出具有红色(R)、绿色(G)及蓝色(B)这三个发光颜色的结构作为一个例子,但不局限于此。例如,也可以采用具有四个以上的发光颜色的结构。FIG. 62A shows a schematic top view of the light emitting element 61 . Like FIG. 57A1 , FIG. 62A shows an example in which a plurality of light-emitting elements 61 having the same emission color are arranged adjacent to each other. In FIG. 62A, two light-emitting elements 61R are adjacent, two light-emitting elements 61G are adjacent, and two light-emitting elements 61B are adjacent. Note that three or more light-emitting elements 61 of the same light-emitting color may be adjacent. In addition, FIG. 62A shows a structure having three emission colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) as an example, but the structure is not limited thereto. For example, a structure having four or more luminous colors may be adopted.
此外,图62A示出将发光元件61配置为条纹排列,但是发光元件61的排列方法不局限于此。作为发光元件61的排列方法,可以采用delta排列、zigzag排列、S条纹排列或pentile排列等。In addition, FIG. 62A shows that the light-emitting elements 61 are arranged in a stripe arrangement, but the arrangement method of the light-emitting elements 61 is not limited to this. As an arrangement method of the light-emitting elements 61, delta arrangement, zigzag arrangement, S-stripe arrangement, pentile arrangement, etc. can be adopted.
图62B及图62C是对应于图62A中的点划线A3-A4的截面示意图。图62B相当于图60C所示的结构的变形例子。图62C相当于图60D所示的结构的变形例子。62B and 62C are schematic cross-sectional views corresponding to the dashed-dotted line A3-A4 in FIG. 62A. FIG. 62B corresponds to a modified example of the structure shown in FIG. 60C. FIG. 62C corresponds to a modified example of the structure shown in FIG. 60D.
通过将多个相同发光颜色的发光元件61一起用作一个子像素,可以增加能够再现的灰度数。因此,可以提高显示装置的显示品质。By using a plurality of light-emitting elements 61 of the same light-emitting color together as one sub-pixel, the number of grayscales that can be reproduced can be increased. Therefore, the display quality of the display device can be improved.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式9)(Embodiment 9)
在本实施方式中,对显示装置10的叠层结构例子进行说明。In this embodiment, an example of a stacked structure of the display device 10 will be described.
图63A及图63B示出显示装置10的立体图。图63A所示的显示装置10包括与层50重叠的层60。层50包括配置为矩阵状的多个像素电路51、第一驱动电路部231、第二驱动电路部232及输入输出端子部29。层60包括配置为矩阵状的多个发光元件61。63A and 63B show perspective views of the display device 10. The display device 10 shown in FIG. 63A includes layer 60 overlapping layer 50. The layer 50 includes a plurality of pixel circuits 51 arranged in a matrix, a first drive circuit unit 231 , a second drive circuit unit 232 , and an input/output terminal unit 29 . Layer 60 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 61 arranged in a matrix.
在图63A及图63B所示的显示装置10中,一个像素电路51与一个发光元件61彼此电连接来被用作一个像素230。因此,层50所包括的多个像素电路51与层60所包括的多个发光元件61彼此重叠的区域被用作显示区域235。作为图63A及图63B所示的显示装置10所包括的像素230,例如可以使用在上述实施方式所示的半导体装置100A、半导体装置100B或半导体装置100C。In the display device 10 shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B , one pixel circuit 51 and one light-emitting element 61 are electrically connected to each other to serve as one pixel 230 . Therefore, an area in which the plurality of pixel circuits 51 included in the layer 50 and the plurality of light-emitting elements 61 included in the layer 60 overlap each other is used as the display area 235 . As the pixel 230 included in the display device 10 shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B , for example, the semiconductor device 100A, the semiconductor device 100B, or the semiconductor device 100C shown in the above-described embodiment can be used.
显示装置10的工作所需要的功率及信号等通过输入输出端子部29被供应到显示装置10。在图63A所示的显示装置10中,可以通过相同工序形成外围驱动电路所包括的晶体管和像素230所包括的晶体管。Power, signals, and the like required for the operation of the display device 10 are supplied to the display device 10 through the input/output terminal portion 29 . In the display device 10 shown in FIG. 63A , the transistors included in the peripheral driving circuit and the transistors included in the pixel 230 can be formed through the same process.
另外,如图63B所示,显示装置10也可以重叠地设置层40、层50及层60。在图63B中,层50设置有配置为矩阵状的多个像素电路51,层40设置有第一驱动电路部231及第二驱动电路部232。通过在与像素电路51不同的层中设置第一驱动电路部231和第二驱动电路部232,可以使显示区域235周围的边框窄,由此可以扩大显示区域235的占有面积。In addition, as shown in FIG. 63B , the display device 10 may provide layer 40 , layer 50 , and layer 60 in an overlapping manner. In FIG. 63B , the layer 50 is provided with a plurality of pixel circuits 51 arranged in a matrix, and the layer 40 is provided with the first drive circuit unit 231 and the second drive circuit unit 232 . By providing the first drive circuit unit 231 and the second drive circuit unit 232 in a layer different from the pixel circuit 51 , the frame around the display area 235 can be narrowed, thereby enlarging the occupied area of the display area 235 .
通过扩大显示区域235的占有面积可以提高分辨率。在显示区域235的分辨率固定的情况下,可以扩大每一个像素的占有面积。所以,可以提高显示区域235的发光亮度。另外,可以提高相对于一个像素的占有面积的发光面积的比率(也称为“开口率”)。例如,可以使像素的开口率为40%以上且小于100%,优选为50%以上且95%以下,更优选为60%以上且95%以下。另外,由于扩大每一个像素的占有面积,可以降低供应到发光元件61的电流密度。因此,对发光元件61施加的负载得到减轻,可以提高半导体装置100的可靠性。因此,可以提高包括半导体装置100的显示装置10的可靠性。The resolution can be improved by enlarging the occupied area of the display area 235 . When the resolution of the display area 235 is fixed, the area occupied by each pixel can be expanded. Therefore, the light emission brightness of the display area 235 can be improved. In addition, the ratio of the light-emitting area to the occupied area of one pixel (also called "aperture ratio") can be increased. For example, the aperture ratio of the pixels may be 40% or more and less than 100%, preferably 50% or more and 95% or less, and more preferably 60% or more and 95% or less. In addition, by enlarging the occupied area of each pixel, the current density supplied to the light-emitting element 61 can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the light-emitting element 61 is reduced, and the reliability of the semiconductor device 100 can be improved. Therefore, the reliability of the display device 10 including the semiconductor device 100 can be improved.
此外,通过层叠显示区域235和外围驱动电路等,可以缩短电连接它们的布线。因此,减少布线电阻及寄生电容,可以提高半导体装置100的工作速度。另外,降低半导体装置100的功耗。In addition, by stacking the display area 235 and peripheral drive circuits and the like, the wiring electrically connecting them can be shortened. Therefore, by reducing wiring resistance and parasitic capacitance, the operating speed of the semiconductor device 100 can be increased. In addition, the power consumption of the semiconductor device 100 is reduced.
另外,层40除了外围驱动电路之外还可以包括CPU23(Central Processing Unit:中央处理器)、GPU24(Graphics Processing Unit:图形处理器)及存储电路部25。在本实施方式等中,有时将CPU23、GPU24及存储电路部25等总称为“功能电路”。In addition, the layer 40 may include a CPU 23 (Central Processing Unit: Central Processing Unit), a GPU 24 (Graphics Processing Unit: Graphics Processing Unit), and a storage circuit unit 25 in addition to the peripheral drive circuit. In the present embodiment and the like, the CPU 23 , the GPU 24 , the storage circuit unit 25 , etc. may be collectively referred to as “functional circuits”.
例如,CPU23具有根据储存在存储电路部25中的程序控制设置在GPU24及层40中的电路的工作的功能。GPU24具有进行用来形成图像数据的运算处理的功能。另外,GPU24可以并行进行大量行列运算(积和运算),所以例如可以高速地进行使用神经网络的运算处理。GPU24例如具有使用储存在存储电路部25中的校正数据对图像数据进行校正的功能。例如,GPU24具有生成将亮度、颜色及/或对比度等校正后的图像数据的功能。For example, the CPU 23 has a function of controlling the operations of the circuits provided in the GPU 24 and the layer 40 based on the program stored in the storage circuit unit 25 . The GPU 24 has a function of performing arithmetic processing for forming image data. In addition, the GPU 24 can perform a large number of row-column calculations (sum-of-product calculations) in parallel, and therefore can perform calculation processing using a neural network at high speed, for example. For example, the GPU 24 has a function of correcting image data using correction data stored in the storage circuit unit 25 . For example, the GPU 24 has a function of generating image data in which brightness, color, contrast, etc. are corrected.
显示装置10也可以使用GPU24进行图像数据的上转换或下转换。此外,层40也可以设置有超分辨率电路。超分辨率电路具有将显示区域235中的任意像素的电位使用该像素周围的像素的电位和权重的积和运算而决定的功能。超分辨率电路具有对分辨率比显示区域235低的图像数据进行上转换的功能。另外,超分辨率电路具有对分辨率比显示区域235高的图像数据进行下转换的功能。The display device 10 may use the GPU 24 to perform up-conversion or down-conversion of image data. In addition, layer 40 may also be provided with a super-resolution circuit. The super-resolution circuit has a function of determining the potential of any pixel in the display area 235 using a sum-of-product operation of the potentials of pixels surrounding the pixel and weights. The super-resolution circuit has a function of up-converting image data with a lower resolution than the display area 235 . In addition, the super-resolution circuit has a function of down-converting image data having a resolution higher than that of the display area 235 .
显示装置10由于包括超分辨率电路可以降低GPU24的负载。例如,使用GPU24进行到2K分辨率(或4K分辨率)的处理,并且使用超分辨率电路上转换为4K分辨率(或8K分辨率),由此可以降低GPU24的负载。下转换也可以同样地进行。The display device 10 can reduce the load on the GPU 24 by including the super-resolution circuit. For example, the load of the GPU 24 can be reduced by performing processing to 2K resolution (or 4K resolution) using the GPU 24 and up-converting to 4K resolution (or 8K resolution) using a super-resolution circuit. Down conversion can also be done similarly.
注意,层40所包括的功能电路既可以不包括这些构成要素的全部,又可以包括其他的构成要素。例如,也可以包括生成多个不同电位的电位生成电路及/或分别控制显示装置10的各电路的供电及停止供电的电源管理电路等。Note that the functional circuit included in layer 40 may not include all of these components, or may include other components. For example, it may include a potential generation circuit that generates a plurality of different potentials and/or a power management circuit that separately controls power supply and stop of power supply to each circuit of the display device 10 .
可以按构成CPU23的各电路进行供电及停止供电。例如,关于在构成CPU23的电路中判断为暂时不使用的电路,停止供电且在需要时再次开始供电,由此可以降低功耗。将再次开始供电时需要的数据在该电路停止之前储存在CPU23中的存储电路或存储电路部25等即可。通过储存在电路恢复时需要的数据可以实现停止的电路的快速恢复。此外,也可以停止供应时钟信号来停止电路工作。Power supply can be supplied and stopped for each circuit constituting the CPU 23. For example, power consumption can be reduced by stopping power supply to a circuit that is determined to be temporarily unused among the circuits constituting the CPU 23 and restarting power supply when necessary. Data necessary for restarting power supply may be stored in the storage circuit or storage circuit unit 25 or the like in the CPU 23 before the circuit is stopped. Quick recovery of a stopped circuit can be achieved by storing data needed when the circuit is restored. In addition, the supply of the clock signal can also be stopped to stop the circuit operation.
另外,作为功能电路也可以包括DSP电路、传感器电路、通信电路及/或FPGA(FieldProgrammable Gate Array:现场可编程门阵)等。In addition, functional circuits may also include DSP circuits, sensor circuits, communication circuits, and/or FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array), etc.
在将外围驱动电路与显示区域235重叠设置时,也可以在外围驱动电路与显示区域235之间设置导电层701。此外,在将外围驱动电路及功能电路与显示区域235重叠设置时,也可以在外围驱动电路及功能电路与显示区域235之间设置导电层701。When the peripheral driving circuit and the display area 235 are overlapped and arranged, the conductive layer 701 may also be provided between the peripheral driving circuit and the display area 235 . In addition, when the peripheral driving circuit and the functional circuit are overlapped with the display area 235 , the conductive layer 701 may be provided between the peripheral driving circuit and the functional circuit and the display area 235 .
图64A示出在外围驱动电路及功能电路与显示区域235之间包括导电层701的显示装置10的立体图。图64B是从显示区域235一侧看图64A所示的显示装置10的平面图。注意,在图64B中,为了容易理解显示区域235与导电层701的关系,省略显示区域235的一部分的记载。FIG. 64A shows a perspective view of the display device 10 including the conductive layer 701 between the peripheral driving circuit and functional circuit and the display area 235 . FIG. 64B is a plan view of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 64A viewed from the display area 235 side. Note that in FIG. 64B , in order to easily understand the relationship between the display area 235 and the conductive layer 701 , the description of a part of the display area 235 is omitted.
外围驱动电路及功能电路各自有可能在工作时产生电磁噪声。在该电磁噪声到达显示区域235时,显示装置10的显示品质有可能下降。具体而言,该电磁噪声影响到显示区域235所包括的像素电路51的浮动节点(节点ND1至ND4),有时精确的电位保持被妨碍。其结果是,像素电路51的稳定工作被破坏,而显示装置10的显示品质下落。Peripheral drive circuits and functional circuits may each generate electromagnetic noise during operation. When the electromagnetic noise reaches the display area 235, the display quality of the display device 10 may be degraded. Specifically, this electromagnetic noise affects the floating nodes (nodes ND1 to ND4) of the pixel circuit 51 included in the display area 235, and accurate potential maintenance may be hindered. As a result, the stable operation of the pixel circuit 51 is destroyed, and the display quality of the display device 10 is degraded.
通过在外围驱动电路及功能电路与显示区域235之间设置导电层701,遮断在外围驱动电路及功能电路的工作中产生的电磁噪声,可以防止显示品质的下落。此外,通过遮断电磁噪声,像素电路51的工作稳定,可以实现更高精度的电位控制。由此,可以提高显示装置10的显示品质。By disposing the conductive layer 701 between the peripheral driving circuit and functional circuit and the display area 235, the electromagnetic noise generated during the operation of the peripheral driving circuit and functional circuit is blocked, thereby preventing the display quality from deteriorating. In addition, by blocking electromagnetic noise, the operation of the pixel circuit 51 is stable, and higher-precision potential control can be achieved. As a result, the display quality of the display device 10 can be improved.
此外,在从导电层701一侧看时,导电层701优选覆盖显示区域235整体。因此,导电层701与显示区域235优选具有彼此重叠的区域。此外,显示区域235包括多个像素电路51。因此,导电层701与多个像素电路51优选具有彼此重叠的区域。In addition, when viewed from the conductive layer 701 side, the conductive layer 701 preferably covers the entire display area 235 . Therefore, the conductive layer 701 and the display area 235 preferably have areas that overlap each other. In addition, the display area 235 includes a plurality of pixel circuits 51 . Therefore, the conductive layer 701 and the plurality of pixel circuits 51 preferably have regions that overlap each other.
注意,不局限于面状,导电层701也可以呈网状或条纹状等。在导电层701的内部应力大时,在导电层701设置为范围较宽的面状的情况下,构成显示装置10的层产生畸变,有时显示装置10的可靠性降低。通过作为导电层701采用网状或条纹状等,可以实现电磁噪声的遮断和导电层701的应力缓和。Note that the conductive layer 701 is not limited to a planar shape, and may also be in a mesh shape, a stripe shape, or the like. When the internal stress of the conductive layer 701 is large, or when the conductive layer 701 is provided in a wide planar shape, the layers constituting the display device 10 may be distorted, and the reliability of the display device 10 may be reduced. By adopting a mesh shape, a stripe shape, or the like as the conductive layer 701, electromagnetic noise can be blocked and the stress of the conductive layer 701 can be relaxed.
图65是在外围驱动电路及功能电路与显示区域235之间包括导电层702(导电层702a、导电层702b、导电层702c、导电层702d和导电层702e)的显示装置10的立体图。在图65所示的例子中,与第一驱动电路部231重叠地设置导电层702a,与第二驱动电路部232重叠地设置导电层702b,与CPU23重叠地设置导电层702c,与GPU24重叠地设置导电层702d,与存储电路部25重叠地设置导电层702e。导电层702的各自优选完全覆盖外围驱动电路及功能电路的每一个。但是,也可以采用覆盖外围驱动电路及功能电路的各自的一部分的结构。65 is a perspective view of the display device 10 including the conductive layer 702 (conductive layer 702a, conductive layer 702b, conductive layer 702c, conductive layer 702d, and conductive layer 702e) between the peripheral driving circuit and functional circuit and the display area 235. In the example shown in FIG. 65 , the conductive layer 702 a is provided to overlap the first drive circuit unit 231 , the conductive layer 702 b is provided to overlap the second drive circuit unit 232 , the conductive layer 702 c is provided to overlap the CPU 23 , and the conductive layer 702 c is provided to overlap the GPU 24 . A conductive layer 702d is provided, and a conductive layer 702e is provided so as to overlap the memory circuit unit 25. Each of the conductive layers 702 preferably completely covers each of the peripheral drive circuits and functional circuits. However, a structure covering a part of each of the peripheral drive circuit and the functional circuit may be adopted.
图66A是在外围驱动电路及功能电路与显示区域235之间包括导电层701及导电层702的显示装置10的立体图。除了导电层702以外还设置导电层701,由此可以进一步提高电磁噪声的遮断效果。FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the display device 10 including the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 between the peripheral driving circuit and the functional circuit and the display area 235 . By providing the conductive layer 701 in addition to the conductive layer 702, the electromagnetic noise blocking effect can be further improved.
因此,导电层701及导电层702被用作电磁屏蔽(有时称为“屏蔽层”或“遮蔽层”)。导电层701及导电层702也可以处于浮动状态,但是优选被供应高电源电位VDD、低电源电位VSS、公共电位COM或接地电位GND等固定电位。例如,对导电层701及导电层702供应接地电位GND,即可。在显示装置10包括导电层701和导电层702的双方时,导电层701及导电层702既可以具有相同电位,又可以具有不同电位。此外,也可以使导电层701和导电层702中的一方处于浮动状态。Therefore, conductive layer 701 and conductive layer 702 are used as electromagnetic shields (sometimes referred to as "shielding layers" or "shielding layers"). The conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 may be in a floating state, but are preferably supplied with a fixed potential such as a high power supply potential VDD, a low power supply potential VSS, a common potential COM, or a ground potential GND. For example, it suffices to supply the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 with the ground potential GND. When the display device 10 includes both the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702, the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 may have the same potential or different potentials. Alternatively, one of the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 may be in a floating state.
此外,示出图66A显示装置10包括两层用作电磁屏蔽的导电体的例子,但是显示装置10也可以包括三层以上的用作电磁屏蔽的导电体。通过包括多层电磁屏蔽,可以提高电磁噪声的遮断效果。在设置多层电磁屏蔽的情况下,隔着绝缘体层叠各层电磁屏蔽,即可。In addition, FIG. 66A shows an example in which the display device 10 includes two layers of conductors for electromagnetic shielding. However, the display device 10 may also include three or more layers of conductors for electromagnetic shielding. By including multiple layers of electromagnetic shielding, the blocking effect of electromagnetic noise can be improved. When multiple layers of electromagnetic shielding are provided, each layer of electromagnetic shielding can be stacked via an insulator.
此外,与导电层701同样地,不局限于面状,导电层702也可以呈网状(参照图66B)或条纹状(参照图66C)等。In addition, like the conductive layer 701, the conductive layer 702 is not limited to a planar shape, and the conductive layer 702 may also be in a mesh shape (see FIG. 66B), a stripe shape (see FIG. 66C), or the like.
此外,也可以将用作布线的导电层用作电磁屏蔽,代替将导电层701及导电层702用作电磁屏蔽。例如,也可以将供应阳极电位或阴极电位等固定电位的布线形成在多个像素电路51的下层而将该布线用作电磁屏蔽。通过使用用作布线的导电层作为电磁屏蔽,可以降低构成显示装置10的层的个数。因此,可以提高显示装置10的生产率。In addition, the conductive layer used as wiring may be used as electromagnetic shielding instead of using the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 as electromagnetic shielding. For example, wiring for supplying a fixed potential such as an anode potential or a cathode potential may be formed on a lower layer of the plurality of pixel circuits 51 and the wiring may be used as an electromagnetic shield. By using a conductive layer used as a wiring as an electromagnetic shield, the number of layers constituting the display device 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the productivity of the display device 10 can be improved.
另外,可以将构成层40所包括的功能电路的晶体管的一部分设置在层50中。另外,可以将构成层50所包括的像素电路51的晶体管的一部分设置在层40中。因此,功能电路也可以包括Si晶体管及OS晶体管。另外,像素电路51也可以包括Si晶体管及OS晶体管。In addition, a part of the transistors constituting the functional circuit included in layer 40 may be provided in layer 50 . In addition, a part of the transistors constituting the pixel circuit 51 included in the layer 50 may be provided in the layer 40 . Therefore, the functional circuit may also include Si transistors and OS transistors. In addition, the pixel circuit 51 may include Si transistors and OS transistors.
显示装置10包括的晶体管既可以为n沟道型晶体管,又可以为p沟道型晶体管。显示装置10也可以使用n沟道型晶体管和p沟道型晶体管的双方。例如,显示装置10所包括的电路也可以采用n沟道型晶体管和p沟道型晶体管组合的CMOS结构。The transistors included in the display device 10 may be n-channel transistors or p-channel transistors. The display device 10 may use both n-channel transistors and p-channel transistors. For example, the circuit included in the display device 10 may adopt a CMOS structure in which n-channel transistors and p-channel transistors are combined.
此外,例如,在由使用不同的半导体材料的多种晶体管构成像素电路51时,也可以按晶体管的种类将晶体管设置不同的层中。例如,在像素电路51由包括Si晶体管的区域51a及包括OS晶体管的区域51b构成时,在层40中形成区域51a且在层50中形成区域51b,即可(参照图67)。此外,通过重叠设置区域51a与区域51b,可以减小像素电路51的占有面积。因此,可以提高显示装置10的清晰度。Furthermore, for example, when the pixel circuit 51 is composed of a plurality of types of transistors using different semiconductor materials, the transistors may be provided in different layers according to the types of transistors. For example, when the pixel circuit 51 includes a region 51a including a Si transistor and a region 51b including an OS transistor, the region 51a may be formed in the layer 40 and the region 51b may be formed in the layer 50 (see FIG. 67 ). In addition, by overlapping the region 51a and the region 51b, the area occupied by the pixel circuit 51 can be reduced. Therefore, the clarity of the display device 10 can be improved.
此外,作为包含在区域51a中的晶体管,也可以使用在半导体层中含有低温多晶硅(LTPS(Low Temperature Poly Silicon))晶体管(以下,也称为LTPS晶体管)。LTPS晶体管具有高场效应迁移率以及良好的频率特性。有时将组合LTPS晶体管和OS晶体管的结构称为LTPO。In addition, as the transistor included in the region 51a, a transistor including a low temperature polysilicon (LTPS (Low Temperature Poly Silicon)) in the semiconductor layer (hereinafter also referred to as an LTPS transistor) may be used. LTPS transistors have high field-effect mobility and good frequency characteristics. The structure that combines LTPS transistors and OS transistors is sometimes called LTPO.
区域51a及区域51b所包括的晶体管的导电型既可以不同,又可以相同。例如,区域51a也可以包括p沟道型晶体管,区域51b也可以包括n沟道型晶体管。此外,区域51a及区域51b也可以都包括n沟道型晶体管。此外,区域51a及区域51b也可以都包括n沟道型晶体管和p沟道型晶体管。The conductivity types of the transistors included in the region 51a and the region 51b may be different or the same. For example, the region 51a may include a p-channel transistor, and the region 51b may include an n-channel transistor. In addition, both the region 51a and the region 51b may include n-channel transistors. In addition, both the region 51a and the region 51b may include n-channel transistors and p-channel transistors.
此外,例如,在由外围驱动电路使用不同的半导体材料的多种晶体管构成时,也可以按晶体管的种类将晶体管设置不同的层中。例如,在第一驱动电路部231由包括Si晶体管的区域231a及包括OS晶体管的区域231b构成时,在层40中形成区域231a且在层50中形成区域231b,即可。此外,例如,在第二驱动电路部232由包括Si晶体管的区域232a及包括OS晶体管的区域232b构成时,在层40中形成区域232a且在层50中形成区域232b,即可。例如,也可以由LTPO构成外围驱动电路。Furthermore, for example, when the peripheral drive circuit is composed of multiple types of transistors using different semiconductor materials, the transistors may be provided in different layers according to the types of transistors. For example, when the first drive circuit unit 231 is composed of a region 231 a including a Si transistor and a region 231 b including an OS transistor, the region 231 a may be formed in the layer 40 and the region 231 b may be formed in the layer 50 . For example, when the second drive circuit unit 232 includes the region 232a including the Si transistor and the region 232b including the OS transistor, the region 232a may be formed in the layer 40 and the region 232b may be formed in the layer 50 . For example, the peripheral drive circuit can also be composed of LTPO.
区域231a及区域231b包括的晶体管的导电型既可以不同,又可以相同。例如,也可以区域231a包括p沟道型晶体管且区域231b包括n沟道型晶体管。此外,也可以区域231a及区域231b都包括n沟道型晶体管。此外,也可以区域231a及区域231b都包括n沟道型晶体管和p沟道型晶体管。The conductivity types of the transistors included in the region 231a and the region 231b may be different or the same. For example, the region 231a may include a p-channel transistor and the region 231b may include an n-channel transistor. In addition, both the region 231a and the region 231b may include n-channel transistors. In addition, both the region 231a and the region 231b may include n-channel transistors and p-channel transistors.
区域232a及区域232b包括的晶体管的导电型既可以不同,又可以相同。例如,也可以区域232a包括p沟道型晶体管且区域232b包括n沟道型晶体管。此外,也可以区域232a及区域232b都包括n沟道型晶体管和p沟道型晶体管。The conductivity types of the transistors included in the region 232a and the region 232b may be different or the same. For example, region 232a may include a p-channel transistor and region 232b may include an n-channel transistor. In addition, both the region 232a and the region 232b may include n-channel transistors and p-channel transistors.
图68A及图68B示出图63A及图63B所示的显示装置10的变形例子。图68A所示的显示装置10具有一个像素电路51与两个发光元件61(发光元件61a及发光元件61b)电连接的结构。可以使用一个像素电路51交替控制两个发光元件61的发光。也就是说,可以使用一个像素电路51控制两个像素230(像素230a及像素230b)的工作。此外,也可以通过使发光元件61a及发光元件61b同时发光而将其用作一个像素230。FIGS. 68A and 68B illustrate modified examples of the display device 10 shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B. The display device 10 shown in FIG. 68A has a structure in which one pixel circuit 51 and two light-emitting elements 61 (the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b) are electrically connected. One pixel circuit 51 can be used to alternately control the light emission of the two light-emitting elements 61 . In other words, one pixel circuit 51 can be used to control the operation of two pixels 230 (pixel 230a and pixel 230b). In addition, the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b may be used as one pixel 230 by causing them to emit light at the same time.
作为图68A及图68B所示的显示装置10所包括的像素230,例如可以使用在上述实施方式所示的半导体装置100F、半导体装置100G或半导体装置100H。如上所述,半导体装置100F、半导体装置100G及半导体装置100H适合用于像素密度高的显示装置。As the pixel 230 included in the display device 10 shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B , for example, the semiconductor device 100F, the semiconductor device 100G, or the semiconductor device 100H shown in the above-mentioned embodiments can be used. As described above, the semiconductor device 100F, the semiconductor device 100G, and the semiconductor device 100H are suitable for use in a display device with a high pixel density.
此外,与图63B所示的显示装置10同样地,也可以在图68A所示的显示装置10中设置层40(参照图68B)。In addition, similarly to the display device 10 shown in FIG. 63B , the layer 40 may be provided in the display device 10 shown in FIG. 68A (see FIG. 68B ).
注意,在本实施方式中,示出使用一个像素电路51控制两个发光元件61的结构,但是也可以使用一个像素电路51控制三个以上的发光元件61。Note that in this embodiment, a structure is shown in which one pixel circuit 51 is used to control two light-emitting elements 61 , but one pixel circuit 51 may be used to control three or more light-emitting elements 61 .
<显示模块的结构例子><Structure example of display module>
接着,说明根据本发明的一个方式的包括显示装置的显示模块的结构例子。Next, a structural example of a display module including a display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
图69A至图69C是显示模块400的立体示意图。在显示模块400中,显示装置10的输入输出端子部29具有FPC404(FPC:Flexible printed circuits)。FPC404具有在由绝缘体构成的薄膜中包括布线的结构。另外,FPC404具有柔性。FPC404被用作用来从外部将视频信号、控制信号及电源电位等供应到显示装置10的布线。另外,也可以在FPC404上安装IC。69A to 69C are three-dimensional schematic views of the display module 400. In the display module 400 , the input/output terminal portion 29 of the display device 10 has FPC 404 (FPC: Flexible printed circuits). FPC404 has a structure including wiring in a thin film made of an insulator. In addition, FPC404 is flexible. The FPC 404 is used as a wiring for supplying video signals, control signals, power supply potential, and the like to the display device 10 from the outside. Alternatively, the IC can be mounted on the FPC404.
图69B所示的显示模块400具有在印刷电路板401上包括显示装置10的结构。印刷电路板401具有在由绝缘体构成的衬底的内部或表面或者内部和表面包括布线的结构。The display module 400 shown in FIG. 69B has a structure including the display device 10 on a printed circuit board 401. The printed circuit board 401 has a structure including wiring inside or on the surface or both the inside and the surface of a substrate made of an insulator.
在图69B所示的显示模块400中,显示装置10的输入输出端子部29通过引线403与印刷电路板401的端子部402电连接。引线403可以通过引线键合来形成。此外,引线键合可以使用球键合(ball bonding)或楔键合(wedge bonding)。In the display module 400 shown in FIG. 69B , the input/output terminal portion 29 of the display device 10 is electrically connected to the terminal portion 402 of the printed circuit board 401 through the lead wire 403 . Leads 403 may be formed by wire bonding. In addition, wire bonding may use ball bonding or wedge bonding.
此外,也可以在形成引线403后以树脂材料等覆盖引线403。注意,也可以以引线键合之外的方法使显示装置10与印刷电路板401电连接。例如,也可以通过各向异性导电粘合剂或凸块等实现显示装置10与印刷电路板401的电连接。In addition, after the lead 403 is formed, the lead 403 may be covered with a resin material or the like. Note that the display device 10 and the printed circuit board 401 may be electrically connected by methods other than wire bonding. For example, the display device 10 and the printed circuit board 401 may be electrically connected through anisotropic conductive adhesive, bumps, or the like.
另外,在图69B所示的显示模块400中,印刷电路板401的端子部402与FPC404电连接。例如,在显示装置10的输入输出端子部29所包括的电极的间距与FPC404所包括的电极的间距不同的情况下,也可以通过印刷电路板401使输入输出端子部29与FPC404电连接。具体而言,可以使用形成在印刷电路板401中的布线将输入输出端子部29所包括的多个电极的间隔(间距)改变为端子部402所包括的多个电极的间隔。也就是说,在输入输出端子部29所包括的电极的间距与FPC404所包括的电极的间距不同的情况下也可以实现两者电极的电连接。In the display module 400 shown in FIG. 69B , the terminal portion 402 of the printed circuit board 401 and the FPC 404 are electrically connected. For example, when the pitch of the electrodes included in the input/output terminal portion 29 of the display device 10 is different from the pitch of the electrodes included in the FPC 404 , the input/output terminal portion 29 and the FPC 404 may be electrically connected through the printed circuit board 401 . Specifically, the intervals (pitch) of the plurality of electrodes included in the input/output terminal portion 29 can be changed to the intervals (pitch) of the plurality of electrodes included in the terminal portion 402 using wiring formed in the printed circuit board 401 . That is, even when the pitch of the electrodes included in the input/output terminal portion 29 is different from the pitch of the electrodes included in the FPC 404, electrical connection between the two electrodes can be achieved.
另外,也可以在印刷电路板401中设置电阻器、电容元件、半导体元件等各种元件。In addition, various elements such as resistors, capacitive elements, and semiconductor elements may be provided on the printed circuit board 401 .
另外,如图69C所示的显示模块400那样,也可以使端子部402电连接于设置在印刷电路板401的底面(没有设置显示装置10一侧的面)的连接部405。例如,通过作为连接部405采用插座方式连接部,可以容易进行显示模块400与其他设备的装卸。In addition, like the display module 400 shown in FIG. 69C , the terminal portion 402 may be electrically connected to the connection portion 405 provided on the bottom surface of the printed circuit board 401 (the surface on which the display device 10 is not provided). For example, by using a socket-type connection part as the connection part 405, the display module 400 can be easily attached and detached from other devices.
图70示出图63A所示的显示装置10的一部分的截面结构例子。图70所示的显示装置10包括具有衬底301、电容器246及晶体管310的层50及具有发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B的层60。层60设置在层50所包括的绝缘层363上。FIG. 70 shows an example of a cross-sectional structure of a part of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 63A. The display device 10 shown in FIG. 70 includes a layer 50 including a substrate 301, a capacitor 246, and a transistor 310, and a layer 60 including a light-emitting element 61R, a light-emitting element 61G, and a light-emitting element 61B. Layer 60 is provided on insulating layer 363 included in layer 50 .
晶体管310是在衬底301中具有沟道形成区域的晶体管。作为衬底301,例如可以使用如单晶硅衬底等半导体衬底。晶体管310包括衬底301的一部分、导电层311、低电阻区域312、绝缘层313及绝缘层314。导电层311被用作栅电极。绝缘层313位于衬底301与导电层311之间,并被用作栅极绝缘层。低电阻区域312是衬底301中掺杂有杂质的区域,并被用作源极和漏极中的一个。绝缘层314覆盖导电层311的侧面,并被用作绝缘层。The transistor 310 is a transistor having a channel formation region in the substrate 301 . As the substrate 301, for example, a semiconductor substrate such as a single crystal silicon substrate can be used. The transistor 310 includes a portion of the substrate 301 , a conductive layer 311 , a low-resistance region 312 , an insulating layer 313 and an insulating layer 314 . The conductive layer 311 is used as a gate electrode. The insulating layer 313 is located between the substrate 301 and the conductive layer 311 and is used as a gate insulating layer. The low resistance region 312 is a region doped with impurities in the substrate 301 and is used as one of the source and drain electrodes. The insulating layer 314 covers the sides of the conductive layer 311 and serves as an insulating layer.
另外,在相邻的两个晶体管310之间,以嵌入衬底301的方式设置有元件分离层315。In addition, an element isolation layer 315 is provided between two adjacent transistors 310 so as to be embedded in the substrate 301 .
另外,以覆盖晶体管310的方式设置有绝缘层261,电容器246设置在绝缘层261上。In addition, an insulating layer 261 is provided to cover the transistor 310, and the capacitor 246 is provided on the insulating layer 261.
电容器246包括导电层241、导电层245及位于它们之间的绝缘层243。导电层241被用作电容器246的一个电极,导电层245被用作电容器246的另一个电极,绝缘层243被用作电容器246的介电质。The capacitor 246 includes a conductive layer 241, a conductive layer 245, and an insulating layer 243 between them. The conductive layer 241 is used as one electrode of the capacitor 246 , the conductive layer 245 is used as the other electrode of the capacitor 246 , and the insulating layer 243 is used as the dielectric of the capacitor 246 .
导电层241设置在绝缘层261上,并嵌入绝缘层254中。导电层241通过嵌入绝缘层261中的插头266与晶体管310的源极和漏极中的一个电连接。绝缘层243覆盖导电层241而设置。导电层245设置在隔着绝缘层243与导电层241重叠的区域中。The conductive layer 241 is disposed on the insulating layer 261 and embedded in the insulating layer 254 . The conductive layer 241 is electrically connected to one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 310 through a plug 266 embedded in the insulating layer 261 . The insulating layer 243 covers the conductive layer 241 and is provided. The conductive layer 245 is provided in a region overlapping the conductive layer 241 with the insulating layer 243 interposed therebetween.
以覆盖电容器246的方式设置有绝缘层255,绝缘层363设置在绝缘层255上,发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B设置在绝缘层363上。保护层415设置在发光元件61R、发光元件61G及发光元件61B上,在保护层415的顶面隔着树脂层419设置有衬底420。The insulating layer 255 is provided to cover the capacitor 246 , the insulating layer 363 is provided on the insulating layer 255 , and the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B are provided on the insulating layer 363 . The protective layer 415 is provided on the light-emitting element 61R, the light-emitting element 61G, and the light-emitting element 61B. The substrate 420 is provided on the top surface of the protective layer 415 with the resin layer 419 interposed therebetween.
发光元件的像素电极通过嵌入于绝缘层255及绝缘层363的插头256、嵌入于绝缘层254的导电层241以及嵌入于绝缘层261的插头266与晶体管310的源极和漏极中的一个电连接。The pixel electrode of the light-emitting element is electrically connected to one of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 310 through the plug 256 embedded in the insulating layer 255 and the insulating layer 363, the conductive layer 241 embedded in the insulating layer 254, and the plug 266 embedded in the insulating layer 261. connect.
图71示出图70所示的截面结构例子的变形例子。图71所示的显示装置10的截面结构例子与图70所示的截面结构例子的主要不同之处在于包括晶体管320而代替晶体管310。注意,有时省略与图70同样的部分的说明。FIG. 71 shows a modified example of the cross-sectional structure example shown in FIG. 70 . The main difference between the cross-sectional structure example of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 71 and the cross-sectional structure example shown in FIG. 70 is that a transistor 320 is included instead of the transistor 310 . Note that description of the same parts as in FIG. 70 may be omitted.
晶体管320是在形成沟道的半导体层中使用金属氧化物(也称为氧化物半导体)的晶体管。The transistor 320 is a transistor using a metal oxide (also called an oxide semiconductor) in a semiconductor layer forming a channel.
晶体管320包括半导体层321、绝缘层323、导电层324、一对导电层325、绝缘层326及导电层327。The transistor 320 includes a semiconductor layer 321, an insulating layer 323, a conductive layer 324, a pair of conductive layers 325, an insulating layer 326 and a conductive layer 327.
作为衬底331,可以使用绝缘性衬底或半导体衬底。As the substrate 331, an insulating substrate or a semiconductor substrate can be used.
衬底331上设置有绝缘层332。绝缘层332被用作阻挡层,该阻挡层防止水或氢等杂质从衬底331扩散到晶体管320且防止氧从半导体层321向绝缘层332一侧脱离。作为绝缘层332,例如可以使用氧化铝膜、氧化铪膜或氮化硅膜等与氧化硅膜相比氢或氧不容易扩散的膜。An insulating layer 332 is provided on the substrate 331. The insulating layer 332 serves as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing from the substrate 331 to the transistor 320 and prevents oxygen from escaping from the semiconductor layer 321 to the insulating layer 332 side. As the insulating layer 332, for example, a film such as an aluminum oxide film, a hafnium oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or the like, which is less likely to diffuse hydrogen or oxygen than a silicon oxide film, can be used.
导电层327设置在绝缘层332上,以覆盖导电层327的方式设置有绝缘层326。导电层327被用作晶体管320的第一栅电极,绝缘层326的一部分被用作第一栅极绝缘层。绝缘层326中的至少接触半导体层321的部分优选使用氧化硅膜等氧化物绝缘膜。绝缘层326的顶面优选被平坦化。The conductive layer 327 is provided on the insulating layer 332, and the insulating layer 326 is provided to cover the conductive layer 327. The conductive layer 327 is used as a first gate electrode of the transistor 320, and a part of the insulating layer 326 is used as a first gate insulating layer. At least a portion of the insulating layer 326 that contacts the semiconductor layer 321 is preferably made of an oxide insulating film such as a silicon oxide film. The top surface of insulating layer 326 is preferably planarized.
半导体层321设置在绝缘层326上。半导体层321优选含有具有半导体特性的金属氧化物(也称为氧化物半导体)膜。关于可以用于半导体层321的材料将在后面详细描述。The semiconductor layer 321 is provided on the insulating layer 326. The semiconductor layer 321 preferably contains a metal oxide (also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) film having semiconductor characteristics. Materials that can be used for the semiconductor layer 321 will be described in detail later.
一对导电层325接触于半导体层321上并用作源电极及漏电极。A pair of conductive layers 325 are in contact with the semiconductor layer 321 and serve as source electrodes and drain electrodes.
另外,以覆盖一对导电层325的顶面及侧面以及半导体层321的侧面等的方式设置有绝缘层328,绝缘层328上设置有绝缘层264。绝缘层328被用作阻挡层,该阻挡层防止水或氢等杂质从绝缘层264等扩散到半导体层321以及氧从半导体层321脱离。作为绝缘层328,可以使用与上述绝缘层332同样的绝缘膜。In addition, an insulating layer 328 is provided to cover the top and side surfaces of the pair of conductive layers 325 and the side surfaces of the semiconductor layer 321 , and the insulating layer 264 is provided on the insulating layer 328 . The insulating layer 328 is used as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing from the insulating layer 264 and the like to the semiconductor layer 321 and oxygen from being detached from the semiconductor layer 321 . As the insulating layer 328, the same insulating film as the above-mentioned insulating layer 332 can be used.
绝缘层328及绝缘层264中设置有到达半导体层321的开口。该开口内部嵌入有接触于绝缘层264、绝缘层328及导电层325的侧面以及半导体层321的顶面的绝缘层323以及导电层324。导电层324被用作第二栅电极,绝缘层323被用作第二栅极绝缘层。Openings reaching the semiconductor layer 321 are provided in the insulating layer 328 and the insulating layer 264 . The opening is embedded with an insulating layer 323 and a conductive layer 324 that are in contact with the side surfaces of the insulating layer 264 , the insulating layer 328 and the conductive layer 325 and the top surface of the semiconductor layer 321 . The conductive layer 324 is used as the second gate electrode, and the insulating layer 323 is used as the second gate insulating layer.
以其高度大致一致的方式对导电层324的顶面、绝缘层323的顶面及绝缘层264的顶面进行平坦化处理,以覆盖它们的方式设置有绝缘层329及绝缘层265。The top surface of the conductive layer 324, the top surface of the insulating layer 323, and the top surface of the insulating layer 264 are planarized so that their heights are substantially the same, and the insulating layer 329 and the insulating layer 265 are provided to cover them.
绝缘层264及绝缘层265被用作层间绝缘层。绝缘层329被用作阻挡层,该阻挡层防止水或氢等杂质从绝缘层265等扩散到晶体管320。绝缘层329可以使用与上述绝缘层328及绝缘层332同样的绝缘膜。The insulating layer 264 and the insulating layer 265 are used as interlayer insulating layers. The insulating layer 329 is used as a barrier layer that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing from the insulating layer 265 and the like to the transistor 320 . The insulating layer 329 may use the same insulating film as the insulating layer 328 and the insulating layer 332 described above.
与一对导电层325中的一方电连接的插头274嵌入绝缘层265、绝缘层329及绝缘层264。在此,插头274优选具有覆盖绝缘层265、绝缘层329、绝缘层264及绝缘层328各自的开口的侧面及导电层325的顶面的一部分的导电层274a以及与导电层274a的顶面接触的导电层274b。此时,作为导电层274a,优选使用不容易扩散氢及氧的导电材料。The plug 274 electrically connected to one of the pair of conductive layers 325 is embedded in the insulating layer 265 , the insulating layer 329 and the insulating layer 264 . Here, the plug 274 preferably has a conductive layer 274a covering the side surfaces of the respective openings of the insulating layer 265, the insulating layer 329, the insulating layer 264 and the insulating layer 328 and a part of the top surface of the conductive layer 325, and is in contact with the top surface of the conductive layer 274a. conductive layer 274b. At this time, it is preferable to use a conductive material that does not easily diffuse hydrogen and oxygen as the conductive layer 274a.
图72示出图63B所示的显示装置10的一部分的截面结构例子。在图72所示的显示装置10中,层叠有沟道形成在层40所包括的衬底301A中的晶体管310A及沟道形成在层40所包括的衬底301A中的晶体管310B。衬底301A可以使用与衬底301同样的材料。FIG. 72 shows an example of a cross-sectional structure of a part of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 63B. In the display device 10 shown in FIG. 72 , a transistor 310A with a channel formed in the substrate 301A included in the layer 40 and a transistor 310B with a channel formed in the substrate 301A included in the layer 40 are stacked. The same material as the substrate 301 may be used for the substrate 301A.
在图72所示的显示装置10中,贴合设置有发光元件61的层60、设置有衬底301B、晶体管310B及电容器246的层50以及设置有衬底301A及晶体管310A的层40。In the display device 10 shown in FIG. 72 , the layer 60 on which the light-emitting element 61 is provided, the layer 50 on which the substrate 301B, the transistor 310B and the capacitor 246 are provided, and the layer 40 on which the substrate 301A and the transistor 310A are provided are bonded together.
衬底301B设置有贯通衬底301B的插头343。插头343被用作硅穿孔电极(TSV:Through Silicon Via)。插头343与设置在衬底301B的背面(与衬底420一侧相反一侧的表面)的导电层342电连接。另一方面,导电层341设置在衬底301A的绝缘层261上。The substrate 301B is provided with a plug 343 penetrating the substrate 301B. The plug 343 is used as a through silicon via (TSV). The plug 343 is electrically connected to the conductive layer 342 provided on the back surface of the substrate 301B (the surface opposite to the substrate 420 side). On the other hand, the conductive layer 341 is provided on the insulating layer 261 of the substrate 301A.
通过使导电层341与导电层342接合,层40与层50电连接。By bonding conductive layer 341 and conductive layer 342, layer 40 and layer 50 are electrically connected.
作为导电层341及导电层342优选使用相同的导电材料。例如,可以使用包含选自Al、Cr、Cu、Ta、Sn、Zn、Au、Ag、Pt、Ti、Mo及W中的元素的金属膜或以上述元素为成分的金属氮化物膜(氮化钛膜、氮化钼膜或氮化钨膜)等。尤其优选的是,作为导电层341及导电层342使用铜。由此,可以采用Cu-Cu(铜-铜)直接接合技术(通过彼此连接Cu(铜)的焊盘来进行电导通的技术)。此外,也可以通过凸块将导电层341和导电层342接合。It is preferable to use the same conductive material as the conductive layer 341 and the conductive layer 342 . For example, a metal film containing an element selected from Al, Cr, Cu, Ta, Sn, Zn, Au, Ag, Pt, Ti, Mo, and W or a metal nitride film (nitride film) containing the above elements as a component can be used. Titanium film, molybdenum nitride film or tungsten nitride film), etc. It is particularly preferable to use copper as the conductive layer 341 and the conductive layer 342 . Thus, it is possible to adopt Cu-Cu (copper-copper) direct bonding technology (a technology in which electrical conduction is achieved by connecting Cu (copper) pads to each other). In addition, the conductive layer 341 and the conductive layer 342 may be connected through bumps.
图73示出图72所示的截面结构例子的变形例子。在图73所示的显示装置10的截面结构例子中,层叠有沟道形成在衬底301A中的晶体管310A及在形成沟道的半导体层中含有金属氧化物的晶体管320。注意,有时省略与图70至图72同样的部分的说明。FIG. 73 shows a modified example of the cross-sectional structure example shown in FIG. 72 . In the cross-sectional structure example of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 73 , a transistor 310A in which a channel is formed in a substrate 301A and a transistor 320 in which a metal oxide is included in a semiconductor layer forming the channel are laminated. Note that description of the same parts as in FIGS. 70 to 72 may be omitted.
图73所示的层50具有从图71所示的层50去除衬底331的结构。此外,在图73所示的层40中,以覆盖晶体管310A的方式设置有绝缘层261,导电层251设置在绝缘层261上。此外,以覆盖导电层251的方式设置有绝缘层262,导电层252设置在绝缘层262上。导电层251及导电层252各自被用作布线。此外,以覆盖导电层252的方式设置有绝缘层263及绝缘层332,晶体管320设置在绝缘层332上。此外,以覆盖晶体管320的方式设置有绝缘层265,电容器246设置在绝缘层265上。电容器246与晶体管320通过插头274电连接。层50与层40所包括的绝缘层263重叠地设置。The layer 50 shown in FIG. 73 has a structure in which the substrate 331 is removed from the layer 50 shown in FIG. 71 . Furthermore, in layer 40 shown in FIG. 73 , insulating layer 261 is provided to cover transistor 310A, and conductive layer 251 is provided on insulating layer 261 . In addition, an insulating layer 262 is provided to cover the conductive layer 251 , and the conductive layer 252 is provided on the insulating layer 262 . The conductive layer 251 and the conductive layer 252 are each used as wiring. In addition, an insulating layer 263 and an insulating layer 332 are provided to cover the conductive layer 252, and the transistor 320 is provided on the insulating layer 332. In addition, an insulating layer 265 is provided to cover the transistor 320 , and the capacitor 246 is provided on the insulating layer 265 . Capacitor 246 and transistor 320 are electrically connected through plug 274 . The layer 50 is provided to overlap the insulating layer 263 included in the layer 40 .
晶体管320可以被用作构成像素电路51的晶体管。晶体管310可以被用作构成像素电路51的晶体管或构成外围驱动电路的晶体管。晶体管310及晶体管320例如可以被用作构成运算电路或存储电路等功能电路的晶体管。The transistor 320 may be used as a transistor constituting the pixel circuit 51 . The transistor 310 may be used as a transistor constituting the pixel circuit 51 or a transistor constituting a peripheral driving circuit. The transistor 310 and the transistor 320 may be used as transistors constituting a functional circuit such as an arithmetic circuit or a memory circuit, for example.
通过具有这种结构,在包括发光元件61的层60的正下除了像素电路51之外还可以形成外围驱动电路等。因此,与在显示区域的周边设置驱动电路的情况相比,可以实现显示装置的小型化。By having this structure, a peripheral drive circuit and the like can be formed in addition to the pixel circuit 51 just below the layer 60 including the light-emitting element 61 . Therefore, compared with the case where the drive circuit is provided around the display area, the display device can be miniaturized.
图74示出图64A及图64B所示的显示装置10的一部分的截面结构例子。图74是图70所示的截面结构例子的变形例子。在图74中,绝缘层263上设置有导电层701,导电层701上设置有绝缘层333。此外,绝缘层333上设置有绝缘层332。FIG. 74 shows an example of a cross-sectional structure of a part of the display device 10 shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B. FIG. 74 is a modified example of the cross-sectional structure example shown in FIG. 70 . In FIG. 74 , a conductive layer 701 is provided on the insulating layer 263 , and an insulating layer 333 is provided on the conductive layer 701 . In addition, an insulating layer 332 is provided on the insulating layer 333 .
导电层701不与用来将信号从层40中的电路供应到层50中的电路的导电体(插头等)电连接。同样地,导电层701不与用来将信号从层50中的电路供应到层40中的电路的导电体(插头等)电连接。Conductive layer 701 is not electrically connected to the electrical conductors (plugs, etc.) used to supply signals from the circuitry in layer 40 to the circuitry in layer 50 . Likewise, conductive layer 701 is not electrically connected to the electrical conductors (plugs, etc.) used to supply signals from the circuitry in layer 50 to the circuitry in layer 40 .
图74示出导电层701设置在层40与层50之间的截面结构例子,但是导电层701也可以设置在层40或层50中。FIG. 74 shows an example of the cross-sectional structure in which the conductive layer 701 is provided between the layer 40 and the layer 50 . However, the conductive layer 701 may also be provided in the layer 40 or the layer 50 .
图75示出图66所示的显示装置10的一部分的截面结构例子。图75也是图74所示的截面结构例子的变形例子。在图75中,在绝缘层263上设置有导电层702,在导电层702上设置有绝缘层334。此外,在绝缘层334上设置有导电层701,在导电层701上设置有绝缘层333。此外,在绝缘层333上设置有绝缘层332。FIG. 75 shows an example of a cross-sectional structure of a part of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 66 . FIG. 75 is also a modified example of the cross-sectional structure example shown in FIG. 74 . In FIG. 75 , the conductive layer 702 is provided on the insulating layer 263 , and the insulating layer 334 is provided on the conductive layer 702 . In addition, the conductive layer 701 is provided on the insulating layer 334, and the insulating layer 333 is provided on the conductive layer 701. In addition, an insulating layer 332 is provided on the insulating layer 333 .
与导电层701同样地,导电层702不与层40中的电路至层50中的电路供应信号的导电体(插头等)电连接。此外,导电层702不与层50中的电路至层40中的电路供应信号的导电体(插头等)电连接。注意,导电层701与导电层702也可以电连接。Like conductive layer 701 , conductive layer 702 is not electrically connected to a conductor (plug, etc.) that supplies a signal from the circuit in layer 40 to the circuit in layer 50 . Furthermore, conductive layer 702 is not electrically connected to conductors (plugs, etc.) that supply signals from the circuitry in layer 50 to the circuitry in layer 40 . Note that the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 may also be electrically connected.
图75示出导电层701及导电层702设置在层40与层50之间的截面结构例子,但是导电层701及导电层702也可以设置在层40或层50中。此外,导电层702也可以设置在层40中,导电层701也可以设置在层50中。FIG. 75 shows an example of the cross-sectional structure in which the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 are provided between the layer 40 and the layer 50 . However, the conductive layer 701 and the conductive layer 702 may also be provided in the layer 40 or the layer 50 . In addition, the conductive layer 702 may also be provided in the layer 40 , and the conductive layer 701 may also be provided in the layer 50 .
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式10)(Embodiment 10)
根据本发明的一个方式的显示装置10可以实现利用隔行扫描驱动的图像显示。在本实施方式中,对显示装置10的隔行扫描驱动进行说明。The display device 10 according to one embodiment of the present invention can realize image display using interlaced scanning drive. In this embodiment, interlaced scanning driving of the display device 10 will be described.
[驱动方法1][Drive method 1]
图76A示出显示装置10的方框图。在图76A中,示出配置为m行n列的矩阵状的像素230中的4行3列的像素230。第一行的像素230通过布线GLa[1]与第一驱动电路部231电连接。第二行的像素230通过布线GLa[2]与第一驱动电路部231电连接。第三行的像素230通过布线GLa[3]与第一驱动电路部231电连接。第四行的像素230通过布线GLa[4]与第一驱动电路部231电连接。布线GLa被用作扫描线。FIG. 76A shows a block diagram of the display device 10. FIG. 76A shows pixels 230 in four rows and three columns among the pixels 230 arranged in a matrix of m rows and n columns. The pixels 230 in the first row are electrically connected to the first drive circuit unit 231 through the wiring GLa[1]. The pixels 230 in the second row are electrically connected to the first drive circuit unit 231 through the wiring GLa[2]. The pixels 230 in the third row are electrically connected to the first drive circuit unit 231 through the wiring GLa[3]. The pixels 230 in the fourth row are electrically connected to the first drive circuit unit 231 through the wiring GLa[4]. The wiring GLa is used as a scan line.
此外,第一列的像素230通过布线DL[1]与第二驱动电路部232电连接。第二列的像素230通过布线DL[2]与第二驱动电路部232电连接。第三列的像素230通过布线DL[3]与第二驱动电路部232电连接。布线DL被用作视频信号线。In addition, the pixels 230 in the first column are electrically connected to the second drive circuit section 232 through the wiring DL[1]. The pixels 230 in the second column are electrically connected to the second drive circuit unit 232 through the wiring DL[2]. The pixels 230 in the third column are electrically connected to the second drive circuit unit 232 through the wiring DL[3]. The wiring DL is used as a video signal line.
在图76A中将第4行第3列的像素230表示为像素230[4,3]。此外,将第m行第3列的像素230表示为像素230[m,3]。注意,在图76A中,省略布线GLa及布线DL以外的布线的记载。In FIG. 76A, the pixel 230 in the 4th row and 3rd column is represented as pixel 230[4, 3]. In addition, the pixel 230 in the m-th row and the third column is represented as pixel 230[m, 3]. Note that in FIG. 76A , description of wirings other than the wiring GLa and the wiring DL is omitted.
对第一驱动电路部231供应起始脉冲VSP及时钟信号VCLK。The start pulse VSP and the clock signal VCLK are supplied to the first drive circuit unit 231 .
图76B是说明图76A所示的显示装置10的工作的时序图。在对第一驱动电路部231供应起始脉冲VSP时,与时钟信号VCLK同步地依次选择布线GLa。在布线GLa被选择的期间中,从第二驱动电路部232对像素230供应视频信号。将依次选择布线GLa[1]至布线GLa[m]的期间称为“帧”或“帧期间”。一般来说,在图像显示期间中,反复进行布线GLa[1]至布线GLa[m]的选择。因此,起始脉冲VSP按每个帧期间被供应。FIG. 76B is a timing chart explaining the operation of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 76A. When the start pulse VSP is supplied to the first drive circuit section 231, the wiring GLa is sequentially selected in synchronization with the clock signal VCLK. While the wiring GLa is selected, the video signal is supplied to the pixel 230 from the second drive circuit unit 232 . The period in which the wiring GLa[1] to the wiring GLa[m] are sequentially selected is called a "frame" or a "frame period." Generally speaking, during the image display period, selection of wiring GLa[1] to wiring GLa[m] is repeated. Therefore, the start pulse VSP is supplied every frame period.
例如,根据显示的映像源等,有时即使像素密度比显示装置10的像素密度低,显示品质也差不多。此时,通过按帧切换奇数行及偶数行的布线GLa的选择,可以在保持显示品质的同时减轻对发光元件61的负载。因此,可以提高显示装置10的可靠性。For example, depending on the image source of the display, etc., the display quality may be similar even if the pixel density is lower than that of the display device 10 . At this time, by switching the selection of wiring GLa in odd-numbered rows and even-numbered rows on a frame-by-frame basis, the load on the light-emitting element 61 can be reduced while maintaining display quality. Therefore, the reliability of the display device 10 can be improved.
在图76B所示的时序图中,示出在第一帧(奇数帧)依次选择奇数行的布线GLa而不选择偶数行的布线GLa的工作例子。此外,示出在第二帧(偶数帧)依次选择偶数行的布线GLa而不选择奇数行的布线GLa的工作例子。注意,也可以在奇数帧依次选择偶数行的布线GLa且在偶数帧依次选择奇数行的布线GLa。如此,将按帧切换写入视频信号的行的驱动方法称为“隔行扫描”或“隔行扫描驱动”。此外,将在1帧对所有的像素写入视频信号的驱动方法称为“逐行扫描”或“逐行扫描驱动”。The timing chart shown in FIG. 76B shows an operation example in which the wiring GLa of the odd-numbered rows is sequentially selected in the first frame (odd-numbered frame) without selecting the wiring GLa of the even-numbered rows. Furthermore, an operation example is shown in which the wiring GLa of the even-numbered rows is sequentially selected in the second frame (even-numbered frame) without selecting the wiring GLa of the odd-numbered rows. Note that the wiring GLa of even-numbered rows may be sequentially selected in odd-numbered frames and the wiring GLa of odd-numbered rows may be sequentially selected in even-numbered frames. In this way, the driving method of switching the lines in which the video signal is written frame by frame is called "interlaced scanning" or "interlaced scanning driving". In addition, the driving method of writing video signals to all pixels in one frame is called "progressive scan" or "progressive scan drive".
注意,在想要增大发光亮度时等,不进行隔行扫描驱动而使发光元件61a及发光元件61b同时发光,以逐行扫描驱动进行显示工作即可。或者,可以提高隔行扫描驱动中的帧频率。帧频率优选为60Hz以上,更优选为120Hz以上,进一步优选为240Hz以上。隔行扫描驱动与逐行扫描驱动可以适当地切换而进行。Note that when it is desired to increase the light emission brightness, the light-emitting element 61a and the light-emitting element 61b can emit light at the same time without interlaced scanning driving, and the display operation can be performed by progressive scanning driving. Alternatively, the frame frequency in interlaced drive can be increased. The frame frequency is preferably 60 Hz or more, more preferably 120 Hz or more, and still more preferably 240 Hz or more. Interlaced scanning driving and progressive scanning driving can be performed by switching appropriately.
[驱动方法2][Drive method 2]
接着,使用图77对作为像素230使用半导体装置100F或半导体装置100G的情况下的隔行扫描驱动进行说明。注意,为了减少反复说明,对与图76不同的部分主要进行说明。Next, interlaced scanning driving when the semiconductor device 100F or the semiconductor device 100G is used as the pixel 230 will be described using FIG. 77 . Note that, in order to reduce repeated explanation, parts different from those in FIG. 76 will be mainly explained.
如上述实施方式所示,半导体装置100F及半导体装置100G各自包括阴极与布线104a电连接的发光元件61a及阴极与布线104b电连接的发光元件61b。As shown in the above-described embodiment, the semiconductor device 100F and the semiconductor device 100G each include a light-emitting element 61 a having a cathode electrically connected to the wiring 104 a and a light-emitting element 61 b having a cathode electrically connected to the wiring 104 b.
图77A是作为像素230使用半导体装置100F或半导体装置100G的显示装置10的方框图。在图77A中奇数行的像素230与布线104a电连接且偶数行的像素230与布线104b电连接。注意,偶数行的像素230也可以与布线104a电连接且奇数行的像素230也可以与布线104b电连接。FIG. 77A is a block diagram of the display device 10 using the semiconductor device 100F or the semiconductor device 100G as the pixel 230. In FIG. 77A , the pixels 230 in the odd-numbered rows are electrically connected to the wiring 104 a and the pixels 230 in the even-numbered rows are electrically connected to the wiring 104 b. Note that the pixels 230 in the even rows may also be electrically connected to the wiring 104a and the pixels 230 in the odd rows may also be electrically connected to the wiring 104b.
注意,在图77A中省略布线GLa及布线DL以外的布线的记载。Note that description of wirings other than the wiring GLa and the wiring DL is omitted in FIG. 77A .
此外,在半导体装置100F及半导体装置100G中,由一个像素电路51能够驱动发光元件61a及发光元件61b,可以将布线GLa的个数减少一半。在图77A中,第一行的像素230及第二行的像素230与第一个布线GLa的布线GLa[1]电连接,第三行的像素230及第四行的像素230与第二个布线GLa的布线GLa[2]电连接。Furthermore, in the semiconductor device 100F and the semiconductor device 100G, the light-emitting element 61 a and the light-emitting element 61 b can be driven by one pixel circuit 51 , and the number of wirings GLa can be reduced by half. In FIG. 77A , the pixels 230 in the first row and the pixels 230 in the second row are electrically connected to the wiring GLa[1] of the first wiring GLa, and the pixels 230 in the third row and the pixels 230 in the fourth row are electrically connected to the wiring GLa[1] of the first wiring GLa. The wiring GLa[2] of the wiring GLa is electrically connected.
在图77A中,将与第m行的像素230电连接的布线GLa表示为布线GLa[p]。在m为偶数的情况下p为m的一半,在m为奇数的情况下p为m+1的一半。In FIG. 77A , the wiring GLa electrically connected to the pixel 230 in the m-th row is represented as wiring GLa[p]. When m is an even number, p is half of m, and when m is an odd number, p is half of m+1.
此外,作为奇数行的像素230使用发光元件61a,作为偶数行的像素230使用发光元件61b。注意,作为偶数行的像素230也可以使用发光元件61a且作为奇数行的像素230也可以使用发光元件61b。In addition, the light-emitting element 61a is used as the pixel 230 in the odd-numbered rows, and the light-emitting element 61b is used as the pixel 230 in the even-numbered rows. Note that the light-emitting element 61a can also be used as the pixels 230 of the even-numbered rows and the light-emitting element 61b can also be used as the pixels 230 of the odd-numbered rows.
图77B是说明图77A所示的显示装置10的工作的时序图。第一至第p个布线GLa在按帧与时钟信号VCLK同步地依次被选择。此外,在第一帧(奇数帧)中,对布线104a供应电位Vc且对布线104b供应电位Va。此外,在第二帧(偶数帧)中,对布线104a供应电位Va且对布线104b供应电位Vc。由此可以进行隔行扫描驱动。FIG. 77B is a timing chart explaining the operation of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 77A. The first to p-th wirings GLa are sequentially selected frame by frame in synchronization with the clock signal VCLK. Furthermore, in the first frame (odd-numbered frame), the wiring 104a is supplied with the potential Vc and the wiring 104b is supplied with the potential Va. Furthermore, in the second frame (even-numbered frame), the wiring 104a is supplied with the potential Va and the wiring 104b is supplied with the potential Vc. This enables interlaced scanning driving.
如上述实施方式所示那样,控制发光元件61的发光的像素电路51F及像素电路51G的占有面积小,因此在提高显示装置的清晰度的方面上半导体装置100F及半导体装置100G是优选的。通过以隔行扫描驱动使在像素230中使用半导体装置100F或半导体装置100G的显示装置10工作,可以显示像素密度高的显示装置。As shown in the above embodiment, the pixel circuit 51F and the pixel circuit 51G that control the light emission of the light emitting element 61 occupy a small area, and therefore the semiconductor device 100F and the semiconductor device 100G are preferable in terms of improving the resolution of the display device. By operating the display device 10 using the semiconductor device 100F or the semiconductor device 100G in the pixel 230 with interlaced scanning driving, a display device with a high pixel density can be displayed.
[驱动方法3][Drive method 3]
接着,使用图78对作为像素230使用半导体装置100H的情况的隔行扫描驱动进行说明。注意,图78是图77的变形例子。因此,为了减少反复说明,对与图77不同的部分主要进行说明。Next, interlaced scanning driving in the case of using the semiconductor device 100H as the pixel 230 will be described using FIG. 78 . Note that FIG. 78 is a modified example of FIG. 77 . Therefore, in order to reduce repetitive description, description will be mainly given on portions different from those in FIG. 77 .
如上述实施方式所示,半导体装置100H包括电路52a、电路52b、发光元件61a及发光元件61b。电路52a被用作选择使发光元件61a发光还是不发光的开关,电路52b被用作选择使发光元件61b发光还是不发光的开关。此外,电路52a与布线GLc电连接,电路52b与布线GLd电连接。As shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, the semiconductor device 100H includes the circuit 52a, the circuit 52b, the light-emitting element 61a, and the light-emitting element 61b. The circuit 52a is used as a switch for selecting whether the light-emitting element 61a emits light or not, and the circuit 52b is used as a switch for selecting whether the light-emitting element 61b emits light or not. Furthermore, the circuit 52a is electrically connected to the wiring GLc, and the circuit 52b is electrically connected to the wiring GLd.
在将发光元件61a用于奇数行的像素230的情况下,奇数行的像素230与布线GLc电连接。此外,在将发光元件61b用于偶数行的像素230的情况下,偶数行的像素230与布线GLd电连接。When the light-emitting element 61 a is used for the pixels 230 in odd-numbered rows, the pixels 230 in the odd-numbered rows are electrically connected to the wiring GLC. In addition, when the light-emitting element 61b is used for the pixels 230 of the even-numbered rows, the pixels 230 of the even-numbered rows are electrically connected to the wiring GLd.
图78B是说明图78A所示的显示装置10的工作的说明时序图。第一至第p个布线GLa在按帧与时钟信号VCLK同步地依次被选择。此外,在第一帧(奇数帧)中,与布线GLa同步地依次选择布线GLc。例如,在布线GLa[1]被选择的情况下,布线GLc[1]也被选择。在第一帧(奇数帧)中,所有的布线GLd不被选择。因此,发光元件61a发光且发光元件61b不发光。FIG. 78B is an explanatory timing chart illustrating the operation of the display device 10 shown in FIG. 78A. The first to p-th wirings GLa are sequentially selected frame by frame in synchronization with the clock signal VCLK. Furthermore, in the first frame (odd-numbered frame), the wiring GLC is sequentially selected in synchronization with the wiring GLa. For example, when the wiring GLa[1] is selected, the wiring GLC[1] is also selected. In the first frame (odd frame), all wiring GLd is not selected. Therefore, the light-emitting element 61a emits light and the light-emitting element 61b does not emit light.
在第二帧(偶数帧)中,布线GLd与布线GLa同步地依次被选择。例如,在布线GLa[1]被选择的情况下,布线GLd[1]也被选择。在第二帧(偶数帧)中,所有的布线GLc不被选择。因此,发光元件61b发光且发光元件61a不发光。由此可以进行隔行扫描驱动。In the second frame (even-numbered frame), the wiring GLd is sequentially selected in synchronization with the wiring GLa. For example, when the wiring GLa[1] is selected, the wiring GLd[1] is also selected. In the second frame (even-numbered frame), all wiring GLC is not selected. Therefore, the light-emitting element 61b emits light and the light-emitting element 61a does not emit light. This enables interlaced scanning driving.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式11)(Embodiment 11)
在本实施方式中,说明可以用于本发明的一个方式的半导体装置的晶体管。In this embodiment mode, a transistor that can be used in a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention is described.
<晶体管的结构例子><Structure example of transistor>
图79A、图79B及图79C是可以用于本发明的一个方式的半导体装置的晶体管500的俯视图及截面图。可以将晶体管500应用于本发明的一个方式的半导体装置。79A, 79B, and 79C are top views and cross-sectional views of a transistor 500 that can be used in a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention. The transistor 500 can be applied to a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention.
图79A是晶体管500的俯视图。此外,图79B及图79C是晶体管500的截面图。在此,图79B是沿着图79A中的点划线A1-A2的截面图,该截面图相当于晶体管500的沟道长度方向上的截面图。图79C是沿着图79A中的点划线A3-A4的截面图,该截面图相当于晶体管500的沟道宽度方向上的截面图。注意,为了容易理解,在图79A的俯视图中省略部分构成要素。FIG. 79A is a top view of transistor 500. In addition, FIG. 79B and FIG. 79C are cross-sectional views of the transistor 500. Here, FIG. 79B is a cross-sectional view along the chain line A1 - A2 in FIG. 79A , and this cross-sectional view corresponds to a cross-sectional view in the channel length direction of the transistor 500 . FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view along the dashed-dotted line A3 - A4 in FIG. 79A , and this cross-sectional view corresponds to a cross-sectional view in the channel width direction of the transistor 500 . Note that, for ease of understanding, some components are omitted in the plan view of FIG. 79A .
如图79所示,晶体管500包括:配置在衬底(未图示)上的金属氧化物531a;配置在金属氧化物531a上的金属氧化物531b;配置在金属氧化物531b上的相互分离的导电体542a及导电体542b;配置在导电体542a及导电体542b上并形成有导电体542a与导电体542b之间的开口的绝缘体580;配置在开口中的导电体560;配置在金属氧化物531b、导电体542a、导电体542b以及绝缘体580与导电体560之间的绝缘体550;以及配置在金属氧化物531b、导电体542a、导电体542b以及绝缘体580与绝缘体550之间的金属氧化物531c。在此,如图79B和图79C所示,导电体560的顶面优选与绝缘体550、绝缘体554、金属氧化物531c以及绝缘体580的顶面大致对齐。以下,金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b以及金属氧化物531c有时被统称为金属氧化物531。此外,导电体542a及导电体542b有时被统称为导电体542。As shown in FIG. 79, the transistor 500 includes: a metal oxide 531a arranged on a substrate (not shown); a metal oxide 531b arranged on the metal oxide 531a; and mutually separated electrodes arranged on the metal oxide 531b. Conductor 542a and conductor 542b; insulator 580 disposed on conductor 542a and conductor 542b and forming an opening between conductor 542a and conductor 542b; conductor 560 disposed in the opening; metal oxide disposed on 531b, conductor 542a, conductor 542b, and insulator 550 between insulator 580 and conductor 560; and metal oxide 531c disposed between metal oxide 531b, conductor 542a, conductor 542b, insulator 580, and insulator 550 . Here, as shown in FIGS. 79B and 79C , the top surface of the conductor 560 is preferably substantially aligned with the top surfaces of the insulator 550 , the insulator 554 , the metal oxide 531 c and the insulator 580 . Hereinafter, the metal oxide 531a, the metal oxide 531b, and the metal oxide 531c may be collectively referred to as the metal oxide 531. In addition, the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b may be collectively referred to as the conductor 542.
在图79所示的晶体管500中,导电体542a及导电体542b的位于导电体560一侧的侧面具有大致垂直的形状。此外,图79所示的晶体管500不局限于此,导电体542a及导电体542b的侧面和底面所形成的角度也可以为10°以上且80°以下,优选为30°以上且60°以下。此外,导电体542a和导电体542b的相对的侧面也可以具有多个面。In the transistor 500 shown in FIG. 79 , the side surfaces of the conductor 542 a and the conductor 542 b on the side of the conductor 560 have a substantially vertical shape. In addition, the transistor 500 shown in FIG. 79 is not limited to this, and the angle formed by the side surface and the bottom surface of the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b may be 10° or more and 80° or less, preferably 30° or more and 60° or less. In addition, the opposite side surfaces of the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b may have a plurality of surfaces.
如图79所示,优选绝缘体524、金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b、导电体542a、导电体542b及金属氧化物531c与绝缘体580之间配置有绝缘体554。在此,如图79B及图79C所示,绝缘体554优选与金属氧化物531c的侧面、导电体542a的顶面及侧面、导电体542b的顶面及侧面、金属氧化物531a及金属氧化物531b的侧面以及绝缘体524的顶面接触。As shown in FIG. 79 , the insulator 554 is preferably disposed between the insulator 524 , the metal oxide 531 a , the metal oxide 531 b , the conductor 542 a , the conductor 542 b , and the metal oxide 531 c , and the insulator 580 . Here, as shown in FIGS. 79B and 79C , the insulator 554 is preferably connected to the side surfaces of the metal oxide 531c, the top surface and side surfaces of the conductor 542a, the top surface and side surfaces of the conductor 542b, the metal oxide 531a, and the metal oxide 531b. and the top surface of insulator 524 are in contact.
注意,在晶体管500中,在形成沟道的区域(以下也称为沟道形成区域)及其附近具有层叠有金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b及金属氧化物531c的三层的结构,但是本发明不局限于此。例如,也可以具有金属氧化物531b与金属氧化物531c的两层结构或者四层以上的叠层结构。此外,在晶体管500中,导电体560具有两层结构,但是本发明不局限于此。例如,导电体560也可以具有单层结构或三层以上的叠层结构。此外,金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b以及金属氧化物531c也可以各自具有两层以上的叠层结构。Note that the transistor 500 has a three-layer structure in which a metal oxide 531a, a metal oxide 531b, and a metal oxide 531c are stacked in and around a region where a channel is formed (hereinafter also referred to as a channel formation region). However, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may have a two-layer structure of metal oxide 531b and metal oxide 531c or a stacked structure of four or more layers. Furthermore, in the transistor 500, the conductor 560 has a two-layer structure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the conductor 560 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure of three or more layers. In addition, the metal oxide 531a, the metal oxide 531b, and the metal oxide 531c may each have a laminated structure of two or more layers.
例如,在金属氧化物531c具有由第一金属氧化物和第一金属氧化物上的第二金属氧化物构成的叠层结构的情况下,优选的是,第一金属氧化物具有与金属氧化物531b同样的组成,而第二金属氧化物具有与金属氧化物531a同样的组成。For example, in the case where the metal oxide 531c has a stacked structure composed of a first metal oxide and a second metal oxide on the first metal oxide, it is preferable that the first metal oxide has a structure similar to that of the metal oxide. 531b has the same composition, and the second metal oxide has the same composition as metal oxide 531a.
在此,导电体560被用作晶体管的栅电极,导电体542a及导电体542b各被用作晶体管的源电极或漏电极。如上所述,导电体560以嵌入绝缘体580的开口及被夹在导电体542a与导电体542b之间的区域中的方式形成。在此,导电体560、导电体542a及导电体542b的配置相对于绝缘体580的开口自对准地被选择。也就是说,在晶体管500中,栅电极可以自对准地配置在源电极与漏电极之间。由此,可以以不设置用于对准的余地的方式形成导电体560,所以可以实现晶体管500的占有面积的缩小。由此,可以实现显示装置的高清晰化。此外,可以实现窄边框的显示装置。Here, the conductor 560 is used as the gate electrode of the transistor, and the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b are each used as the source electrode or the drain electrode of the transistor. As described above, the conductor 560 is formed so as to be embedded in the opening of the insulator 580 and sandwiched between the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b. Here, the arrangement of the conductor 560, the conductor 542a, and the conductor 542b is selected to be self-aligned with respect to the opening of the insulator 580. That is, in the transistor 500, the gate electrode may be arranged between the source electrode and the drain electrode in a self-aligned manner. This allows the conductor 560 to be formed without leaving any room for alignment, so the area occupied by the transistor 500 can be reduced. This makes it possible to realize a high-definition display device. In addition, a display device with a narrow frame can be realized.
如图79所示,导电体560优选包括配置在绝缘体550的内侧的导电体560a及以嵌入导电体560a的内侧的方式配置的导电体560b。As shown in FIG. 79 , the conductor 560 preferably includes a conductor 560 a disposed inside the insulator 550 and a conductor 560 b disposed to be embedded inside the conductor 560 a.
晶体管500优选包括配置在衬底(未图示)上的绝缘体514、配置在绝缘体514上的绝缘体516、以嵌入绝缘体516的方式配置的导电体505、配置在绝缘体516及导电体505上的绝缘体522以及配置在绝缘体522上的绝缘体524。优选在绝缘体524上配置有金属氧化物531a。The transistor 500 preferably includes an insulator 514 arranged on a substrate (not shown), an insulator 516 arranged on the insulator 514, a conductor 505 arranged to be embedded in the insulator 516, and an insulator arranged on the insulator 516 and the conductor 505. 522 and an insulator 524 arranged on the insulator 522. It is preferable that the metal oxide 531a is arranged on the insulator 524.
优选在晶体管500上配置有被用作层间膜的绝缘体574及绝缘体581。在此,绝缘体574优选与导电体560、绝缘体550、绝缘体554、金属氧化物531c以及绝缘体580的顶面接触。It is preferable that insulators 574 and 581 used as interlayer films are disposed on the transistor 500 . Here, the insulator 574 is preferably in contact with the conductor 560 , the insulator 550 , the insulator 554 , the metal oxide 531 c and the top surface of the insulator 580 .
绝缘体522、绝缘体554以及绝缘体574优选具有抑制氢(例如,氢原子和氢分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能。例如,绝缘体522、绝缘体554以及绝缘体574的氢透过性优选低于绝缘体524、绝缘体550以及绝缘体580。此外,绝缘体522及绝缘体554优选具有抑制氧(例如,氧原子和氧分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能。例如,绝缘体522及绝缘体554的氧透过性优选低于绝缘体524、绝缘体550以及绝缘体580。The insulator 522, the insulator 554, and the insulator 574 preferably have the function of suppressing the diffusion of hydrogen (for example, at least one of hydrogen atoms, hydrogen molecules, etc.). For example, the hydrogen permeability of the insulator 522 , the insulator 554 , and the insulator 574 is preferably lower than that of the insulator 524 , the insulator 550 , and the insulator 580 . In addition, the insulator 522 and the insulator 554 preferably have a function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, etc.). For example, the oxygen permeability of insulator 522 and insulator 554 is preferably lower than that of insulator 524 , insulator 550 and insulator 580 .
在此,绝缘体524、金属氧化物531以及绝缘体550与绝缘体580及绝缘体581由绝缘体554以及绝缘体574相隔。由此,可以抑制包含在绝缘体580及绝缘体581中的氢等杂质及过剩的氧混入绝缘体524、金属氧化物531以及绝缘体550中。Here, the insulator 524 , the metal oxide 531 and the insulator 550 are separated from the insulator 580 and the insulator 581 by the insulator 554 and the insulator 574 . This can prevent impurities such as hydrogen and excess oxygen contained in the insulator 580 and the insulator 581 from being mixed into the insulator 524 , the metal oxide 531 and the insulator 550 .
优选的是,设置与晶体管500电连接且被用作插头的导电体545(导电体545a及导电体545b)。此外,还包括与被用作插头的导电体545的侧面接触的绝缘体541(绝缘体541a及绝缘体541b)。也就是说,绝缘体541以与绝缘体554、绝缘体580、绝缘体574以及绝缘体581的开口的内壁接触的方式形成。此外,可以以与绝缘体541的侧面接触的方式设置有导电体545的第一导电体且在导电体545的第一导电体的内侧设置有导电体545的第二导电体。在此,导电体545的顶面的高度与绝缘体581的顶面的高度可以大致相同。此外,晶体管500示出层叠有导电体545的第一导电体及导电体545的第二导电体的结构,但是本发明不局限于此。例如,导电体545也可以具有单层结构或者三层以上的叠层结构。在结构体具有叠层结构的情况下,有时按形成顺序赋予序数以进行区別。It is preferable to provide conductors 545 (conductors 545a and 545b) that are electrically connected to the transistor 500 and serve as plugs. In addition, an insulator 541 (insulator 541a and insulator 541b) in contact with the side surface of the conductor 545 used as a plug is also included. That is, the insulator 541 is formed in contact with the inner walls of the openings of the insulators 554 , 580 , 574 and 581 . Furthermore, the first conductor of the conductor 545 may be provided in contact with the side surface of the insulator 541 and the second conductor of the conductor 545 may be provided inside the first conductor of the conductor 545 . Here, the height of the top surface of the conductor 545 and the height of the top surface of the insulator 581 may be substantially the same. In addition, although the transistor 500 has a structure in which the first conductor of the conductor 545 and the second conductor of the conductor 545 are laminated, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the conductor 545 may have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure of three or more layers. When a structure has a laminated structure, an ordinal number may be given in order of formation to distinguish them.
优选在晶体管500中将被用作氧化物半导体的金属氧化物(以下也称为氧化物半导体)用于包含沟道形成区域的金属氧化物531(金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b及金属氧化物531c)。例如,作为成为金属氧化物531的沟道形成区域的金属氧化物,优选使用其带隙为2eV以上,优选为2.5eV以上的金属氧化物。In the transistor 500, it is preferable to use a metal oxide (hereinafter also referred to as an oxide semiconductor) used as an oxide semiconductor for the metal oxide 531 (metal oxide 531a, metal oxide 531b and metal oxide 531) including the channel formation region. Object 531c). For example, as the metal oxide that forms the channel formation region of the metal oxide 531, it is preferable to use a metal oxide having a band gap of 2 eV or more, preferably 2.5 eV or more.
作为上述金属氧化物,优选至少包含铟(In)或锌(Zn)。尤其是,优选包含铟(In)及锌(Zn)。此外,除此之外,优选还包含元素M。元素M可以为铝(Al)、镓(Ga)、钇(Y)、锡(Sn)、硼(B)、钛(Ti)、铁(Fe)、镍(Ni)、锗(Ge)、锆(Zr)、钼(Mo)、镧(La)、铈(Ce)、钕(Nd)、铪(Hf)、钽(Ta)、钨(W)、镁(Mg)和钴(Co)中的一种以上。尤其是,元素M优选为铝(Al)、镓(Ga)、钇(Y)和锡(Sn)中的一种以上。另外,元素M更优选包含Ga和Sn中的任一方或双方。The metal oxide preferably contains at least indium (In) or zinc (Zn). In particular, indium (In) and zinc (Zn) are preferably contained. Furthermore, the element M is preferably contained in addition to this. Element M can be aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), yttrium (Y), tin (Sn), boron (B), titanium (Ti), iron (Fe), nickel (Ni), germanium (Ge), zirconium (Zr), molybdenum (Mo), lanthanum (La), cerium (Ce), neodymium (Nd), hafnium (Hf), tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W), magnesium (Mg) and cobalt (Co) More than one kind. In particular, the element M is preferably one or more types of aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), yttrium (Y), and tin (Sn). In addition, the element M more preferably contains one or both of Ga and Sn.
此外,如图79B所示,金属氧化物531b中的不与导电体542重叠的区域的厚度有时比其与导电体542重叠的区域的厚度薄。该厚度薄的区域在形成导电体542a及导电体542b时去除金属氧化物531b的顶面的一部分而形成。在此,当在金属氧化物531b的顶面上沉积成为导电体542的导电膜时,有时在与该导电膜的界面附近形成低电阻区域。如此,通过去除金属氧化物531b的顶面上的位于导电体542a与导电体542b之间的低电阻区域,可以抑制沟道形成在该区域中。In addition, as shown in FIG. 79B , the thickness of a region of the metal oxide 531 b that does not overlap with the conductor 542 may be thinner than the thickness of a region that overlaps with the conductor 542 . This thin region is formed by removing a part of the top surface of the metal oxide 531b when forming the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b. Here, when a conductive film serving as the conductor 542 is deposited on the top surface of the metal oxide 531b, a low-resistance region may be formed near the interface with the conductive film. In this way, by removing the low-resistance region between the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b on the top surface of the metal oxide 531b, the formation of a channel in this region can be suppressed.
通过本发明的一个方式包括尺寸小的晶体管,可以提供一种清晰度高的显示装置。此外,通过包括通态电流大的晶体管,可以提供一种亮度高的显示装置。此外,通过包括工作速度快的晶体管,可以提供一种工作速度快的显示装置。此外,通过包括电特性稳定的晶体管,可以提供一种可靠性高的显示装置。此外,通过包括关态电流小的晶体管,可以提供一种功耗低的显示装置。By including a small-sized transistor in one aspect of the present invention, a display device with high definition can be provided. In addition, by including a transistor with a large on-state current, a display device with high brightness can be provided. Furthermore, by including a fast operating speed transistor, it is possible to provide a fast operating speed display device. Furthermore, by including a transistor with stable electrical characteristics, a highly reliable display device can be provided. In addition, by including a transistor with a small off-state current, a display device with low power consumption can be provided.
说明可以用于本发明的一个方式的显示装置的晶体管500的详细结构。The detailed structure of the transistor 500 that can be used in the display device according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described.
导电体505以包括与金属氧化物531及导电体560重叠的区域的方式配置。此外,导电体505优选以嵌入绝缘体516中的方式设置。The conductor 505 is arranged to include a region overlapping the metal oxide 531 and the conductor 560 . Furthermore, the conductor 505 is preferably provided embedded in the insulator 516 .
导电体505包括导电体505a、导电体505b及导电体505c。导电体505a与设置在绝缘体516中的开口的底面及侧壁接触。导电体505b以嵌入于形成在导电体505a的凹部的方式设置。在此,导电体505b的顶面低于导电体505a的顶面及绝缘体516的顶面。导电体505c与导电体505b的顶面及导电体505a的侧面接触。在此,导电体505c的顶面的高度与导电体505a的顶面的高度及绝缘体516的顶面的高度大致一致。换言之,导电体505b由导电体505a及导电体505c包围。The conductor 505 includes a conductor 505a, a conductor 505b, and a conductor 505c. The conductor 505a is in contact with the bottom surface and side walls of the opening provided in the insulator 516. The conductor 505b is provided so as to be embedded in the recess formed in the conductor 505a. Here, the top surface of the conductor 505b is lower than the top surface of the conductor 505a and the top surface of the insulator 516. The conductor 505c is in contact with the top surface of the conductor 505b and the side surface of the conductor 505a. Here, the height of the top surface of the conductor 505c is substantially consistent with the height of the top surface of the conductor 505a and the height of the top surface of the insulator 516. In other words, the conductor 505b is surrounded by the conductor 505a and the conductor 505c.
作为导电体505a及导电体505c优选使用具有抑制氢原子、氢分子、水分子、氮原子、氮分子、氧化氮分子(,N2O、NO或NO2等)或铜原子等杂质的扩散的功能的导电材料。或者,优选使用具有抑制氧(例如,氧原子和氧分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能的导电材料。As the conductor 505a and the conductor 505c, it is preferable to use a conductor having the ability to suppress the diffusion of impurities such as hydrogen atoms, hydrogen molecules, water molecules, nitrogen atoms, nitrogen molecules, nitrogen oxide molecules (N 2 O, NO, NO 2, etc.) or copper atoms. Functional conductive materials. Alternatively, it is preferable to use a conductive material having a function of suppressing diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, etc.).
通过作为导电体505a及导电体505c使用具有抑制氢的扩散的功能的导电材料,可以抑制含在导电体505b中的氢等杂质通过绝缘体524等扩散到金属氧化物531。此外,通过作为导电体505a及导电体505c使用具有抑制氧的扩散的功能的导电材料,可以抑制导电体505b被氧化而导电率下降。作为具有抑制氧扩散的功能的导电材料,例如优选使用钛、氮化钛、钽、氮化钽、钌或氧化钌等。由此,导电体505a可以采用上述导电材料的单层或叠层。例如,作为导电体505a使用氮化钛即可。By using a conductive material having a function of suppressing the diffusion of hydrogen as the conductor 505a and the conductor 505c, impurities such as hydrogen contained in the conductor 505b can be suppressed from diffusing to the metal oxide 531 through the insulator 524 and the like. In addition, by using a conductive material that has a function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen as the conductor 505a and the conductor 505c, it is possible to prevent the conductor 505b from being oxidized and causing a decrease in conductivity. As the conductive material having a function of suppressing oxygen diffusion, for example, titanium, titanium nitride, tantalum, tantalum nitride, ruthenium or ruthenium oxide is preferably used. Therefore, the conductor 505a may be a single layer or a stack of the above-mentioned conductive materials. For example, titanium nitride may be used as the conductor 505a.
此外,导电体505b优选使用以钨、铜或铝为主要成分的导电材料。例如,导电体505b可以使用钨。In addition, it is preferable to use a conductive material mainly composed of tungsten, copper, or aluminum as the conductor 505b. For example, tungsten can be used as the conductor 505b.
在此,导电体560有时被用作第一栅极(也称为顶栅极)电极。此外,导电体505有时被用作第二栅极(也称为底栅极)电极。在此情况下,通过与供应到导电体560的电位独立地改变供应到导电体505的电位,可以控制晶体管500的Vth。尤其是,通过对导电体505供应负电位,可以使晶体管500的Vth大于0V且可以减小关态电流。因此,与不对导电体505供应负电位时相比,在对导电体505供应负电位的情况下,可以减小对导电体560供应的电位为0V时的漏极电流。Here, the conductor 560 is sometimes used as a first gate (also called a top gate) electrode. In addition, the conductor 505 is sometimes used as a second gate (also called a bottom gate) electrode. In this case, V th of the transistor 500 can be controlled by changing the potential supplied to the conductor 505 independently of the potential supplied to the conductor 560 . In particular, by supplying the conductor 505 with a negative potential, the Vth of the transistor 500 can be made greater than 0V and the off-state current can be reduced. Therefore, when the negative potential is supplied to the conductor 505 , the drain current when the potential supplied to the conductor 560 is 0 V can be reduced compared to when the negative potential is not supplied to the conductor 505 .
导电体505优选比金属氧化物531中的沟道形成区域大。尤其是,如图79C所示,导电体505优选延伸到与沟道宽度方向上的金属氧化物531交叉的端部的外侧的区域。就是说,优选在金属氧化物531的沟道宽度方向的侧面的外侧,导电体505和导电体560隔着绝缘体重叠。The conductor 505 is preferably larger than the channel formation area in the metal oxide 531 . In particular, as shown in FIG. 79C , the conductor 505 preferably extends to a region outside the end portion intersecting the metal oxide 531 in the channel width direction. That is, it is preferable that the conductor 505 and the conductor 560 overlap with each other via an insulator outside the side surface of the metal oxide 531 in the channel width direction.
通过具有上述结构,可以由被用作第一栅电极的导电体560的电场和被用作第二栅电极的导电体505的电场电围绕金属氧化物531的沟道形成区域。By having the above-described structure, a region can be electrically formed around the channel of the metal oxide 531 by the electric field of the conductor 560 used as the first gate electrode and the electric field of the conductor 505 used as the second gate electrode.
如图79C所示,将导电体505延伸来用作布线。但是不局限于此,也可以在导电体505下设置被用作布线的导电体。As shown in FIG. 79C , the conductor 505 is extended to serve as a wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a conductor used as a wiring may be provided under the conductor 505 .
绝缘体514优选被用作抑制水或氢等杂质从衬底一侧进入晶体管500的阻挡绝缘膜。因此,作为绝缘体514优选使用具有抑制氢原子、氢分子、水分子、氮原子、氮分子、氧化氮分子(N2O、NO或NO2等)或铜原子等杂质的扩散的功能(不容易使上述杂质透过)的绝缘材料。或者,优选使用具有抑制氧(例如,氧原子和氧分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能(不容易使上述氧透过)的绝缘材料。The insulator 514 is preferably used as a barrier insulating film that prevents impurities such as water or hydrogen from entering the transistor 500 from the substrate side. Therefore, it is preferable to use an insulator 514 that has the function (not easily Insulating material that allows the above-mentioned impurities to pass through). Alternatively, it is preferable to use an insulating material that has a function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, etc.) (making it difficult for the oxygen to permeate).
例如,优选的是,作为绝缘体514使用氧化铝或氮化硅等。由此,可以抑制水或氢等杂质从与绝缘体514相比更靠近衬底一侧扩散到晶体管500一侧。或者,可以抑制包含在绝缘体524等中的氧扩散到与绝缘体514相比更靠近衬底一侧。For example, it is preferable to use aluminum oxide, silicon nitride, or the like as the insulator 514 . This can suppress impurities such as water or hydrogen from diffusing from the side closer to the substrate than the insulator 514 to the transistor 500 side. Alternatively, oxygen contained in the insulator 524 and the like can be suppressed from diffusing to the side closer to the substrate than the insulator 514 .
被用作层间膜的绝缘体516、绝缘体580及绝缘体581的介电常数优选比绝缘体514低。通过将介电常数低的材料作为层间膜,可以减少产生在布线之间的寄生电容。例如,作为绝缘体516、绝缘体580及绝缘体581,适当地使用氧化硅、氧氮化硅、氮氧化硅、氮化硅、添加有氟的氧化硅、添加有碳的氧化硅、添加有碳及氮的氧化硅或具有空孔的氧化硅等。The dielectric constants of the insulators 516 , 580 and 581 used as interlayer films are preferably lower than those of the insulator 514 . By using a material with a low dielectric constant as an interlayer film, parasitic capacitance generated between wirings can be reduced. For example, as the insulator 516, the insulator 580 and the insulator 581, silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, fluorine-added silicon oxide, carbon-added silicon oxide, carbon- and nitrogen-added silicon oxide are appropriately used. Silicon oxide or silicon oxide with pores, etc.
绝缘体522及绝缘体524被用作栅极绝缘体。Insulator 522 and insulator 524 are used as gate insulators.
在此,在与金属氧化物531接触的绝缘体524中,优选通过加热使氧脱离。在本说明书中,有时将通过加热脱离的氧称为过剩氧。例如,作为绝缘体524适当地使用氧化硅或氧氮化硅等,即可。通过以与金属氧化物531接触的方式设置包含氧的绝缘体,可以减少金属氧化物531中的氧空位,从而可以提高晶体管500的可靠性。Here, in the insulator 524 in contact with the metal oxide 531, it is preferable to desorb oxygen by heating. In this specification, oxygen desorbed by heating may be called excess oxygen. For example, silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, or the like may be used as the insulator 524 as appropriate. By providing an insulator containing oxygen in contact with the metal oxide 531 , oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide 531 can be reduced, so that the reliability of the transistor 500 can be improved.
具体而言,作为绝缘体524,优选使用通过加热使一部分的氧脱离的氧化物材料。通过加热使氧脱离的氧化物是指在TDS(Thermal Desorption Spectroscopy:热脱附谱)分析中换算为氧原子的氧的脱离量为1.0×1018atoms/cm3以上,优选为1.0×1019atoms/cm3以上,进一步优选为2.0×1019atoms/cm3以上,或者3.0×1020atoms/cm3以上的氧化物膜。此外,进行上述TDS分析时的膜的表面温度优选在100℃以上且700℃以下,或者100℃以上且400℃以下的范围内。Specifically, as the insulator 524, it is preferable to use an oxide material that desorbs part of the oxygen by heating. An oxide that desorbs oxygen by heating means that the desorbed amount of oxygen converted into oxygen atoms in TDS (Thermal Desorption Spectroscopy) analysis is 1.0×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or more, preferably 1.0×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or more, more preferably 2.0×10 19 atoms/cm 3 or more, or an oxide film of 3.0×10 20 atoms/cm 3 or more. In addition, the surface temperature of the film when performing the above-mentioned TDS analysis is preferably in the range of 100°C or more and 700°C or less, or 100°C or more and 400°C or less.
如图79C所示,有时在绝缘体524中不与绝缘体554重叠并不与金属氧化物531b重叠的区域的厚度比其他区域的厚度薄。在绝缘体524中,不与绝缘体554重叠并不与金属氧化物531b重叠的区域优选具有足够使上述氧扩散的厚度。As shown in FIG. 79C , the thickness of a region of the insulator 524 that does not overlap the insulator 554 and the metal oxide 531 b may be thinner than that of other regions. In the insulator 524, a region that does not overlap the insulator 554 and does not overlap the metal oxide 531b preferably has a thickness sufficient to diffuse the above-mentioned oxygen.
与绝缘体514等同样,绝缘体522优选被用作抑制水或氢等杂质从衬底一侧混入晶体管500的阻挡绝缘膜。例如,绝缘体522的氢透过性优选比绝缘体524低。通过由绝缘体522、绝缘体554以及绝缘体574围绕绝缘体524、金属氧化物531以及绝缘体550等,可以抑制水或氢等杂质从外部进入晶体管500。Like the insulator 514 and the like, the insulator 522 is preferably used as a barrier insulating film that prevents impurities such as water and hydrogen from being mixed into the transistor 500 from the substrate side. For example, the hydrogen permeability of the insulator 522 is preferably lower than that of the insulator 524 . By surrounding the insulator 524 , the metal oxide 531 , the insulator 550 , and the like with the insulator 522 , the insulator 554 , and the insulator 574 , impurities such as water and hydrogen can be suppressed from entering the transistor 500 from the outside.
再者,绝缘体522优选具有抑制氧(例如,氧原子和氧分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能(不容易使上述氧透过)。例如,绝缘体522的氧透过性优选比绝缘体524低。通过使绝缘体522具有抑制氧及杂质的扩散的功能,优选减少金属氧化物531所含的氧扩散到衬底一侧。此外,可以抑制导电体505与绝缘体524及金属氧化物531所含的氧起反应。Furthermore, the insulator 522 preferably has a function of inhibiting the diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, etc.) (making it difficult for the oxygen to permeate). For example, the oxygen permeability of the insulator 522 is preferably lower than that of the insulator 524 . By providing the insulator 522 with a function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen and impurities, it is preferable to reduce the diffusion of oxygen contained in the metal oxide 531 to the substrate side. In addition, the conductor 505 can be suppressed from reacting with the oxygen contained in the insulator 524 and the metal oxide 531 .
绝缘体522优选使用包含作为绝缘材料的铝和铪中的一方或双方的氧化物的绝缘体。作为包含铝和铪中的一方或双方的氧化物的绝缘体,优选使用氧化铝、氧化铪、包含铝及铪的氧化物(铝酸铪)等。当使用这种材料形成绝缘体522时,绝缘体522被用作抑制氧从金属氧化物531释放以及氢等杂质从晶体管500的周围部进入金属氧化物531的层。The insulator 522 is preferably an insulator containing an oxide of one or both of aluminum and hafnium as insulating materials. As an insulator containing an oxide of one or both of aluminum and hafnium, it is preferable to use aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, an oxide containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate), or the like. When the insulator 522 is formed using such a material, the insulator 522 serves as a layer that suppresses oxygen from being released from the metal oxide 531 and impurities such as hydrogen from entering the metal oxide 531 from the peripheral portion of the transistor 500 .
或者,例如也可以对上述绝缘体添加氧化铝、氧化铋、氧化锗、氧化铌、氧化硅、氧化钛、氧化钨、氧化钇或氧化锆。或者,也可以对上述绝缘体进行氮化处理。还可以在上述绝缘体上层叠氧化硅、氧氮化硅或氮化硅。Alternatively, for example, aluminum oxide, bismuth oxide, germanium oxide, niobium oxide, silicon oxide, titanium oxide, tungsten oxide, yttrium oxide, or zirconium oxide may be added to the insulator. Alternatively, the insulator may be nitrided. Silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, or silicon nitride may be laminated on the above-mentioned insulator.
作为绝缘体522,例如也可以以单层或叠层使用包含氧化铝、氧化铪、氧化钽、氧化锆、锆钛酸铅(PZT)、钛酸锶(SrTiO3)或(Ba,Sr)TiO3(BST)等所谓的high-k材料的绝缘体。当进行晶体管的微型化及高集成化时,由于栅极绝缘体的薄膜化,有时发生泄漏电流等问题。通过作为被用作栅极绝缘体的绝缘体使用high-k材料,可以在保持物理厚度的同时降低晶体管工作时的栅极电位。As the insulator 522, for example, aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, zirconium oxide, lead zirconate titanate (PZT), strontium titanate (SrTiO 3 ) or (Ba, Sr) TiO 3 may be used in a single layer or a stacked layer. (BST) and other so-called high-k material insulators. When transistors are miniaturized and highly integrated, problems such as leakage current may occur due to the thinning of gate insulators. By using a high-k material as the insulator used as the gate insulator, the gate potential of the transistor can be reduced while maintaining the physical thickness.
此外,绝缘体522及绝缘体524也可以具有两层以上的叠层结构。此时,不局限于由相同材料构成的叠层结构,也可以是由不同材料构成的叠层结构。例如,也可以在绝缘体522下设置与绝缘体524同样的绝缘体。In addition, the insulator 522 and the insulator 524 may have a laminated structure of two or more layers. In this case, the structure is not limited to a laminated structure composed of the same material, but may also be a laminated structure composed of different materials. For example, the same insulator as the insulator 524 may be provided under the insulator 522 .
金属氧化物531包括金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531a上的金属氧化物531b及金属氧化物531b上的金属氧化物531c。当在金属氧化物531b下设置有金属氧化物531a时,可以抑制杂质从形成在金属氧化物531a下方的结构物扩散到金属氧化物531b。当在金属氧化物531b上设置有金属氧化物531c时,可以抑制杂质从形成在金属氧化物531c的上方的结构物扩散到金属氧化物531b。The metal oxide 531 includes a metal oxide 531a, a metal oxide 531b on the metal oxide 531a, and a metal oxide 531c on the metal oxide 531b. When the metal oxide 531a is provided under the metal oxide 531b, diffusion of impurities from the structure formed under the metal oxide 531a to the metal oxide 531b can be suppressed. When the metal oxide 531c is provided on the metal oxide 531b, diffusion of impurities from the structure formed above the metal oxide 531c to the metal oxide 531b can be suppressed.
此外,金属氧化物531优选具有各金属原子的原子个数比互不相同的氧化物层的叠层结构。例如,在金属氧化物531至少包含铟(In)及元素M的情况下,金属氧化物531a的构成元素中的元素M与其他元素的原子个数比优选大于金属氧化物531b的构成元素中的元素M与其他元素的原子个数比。此外,金属氧化物531a中的元素M与In的原子个数比优选大于金属氧化物531b中的元素M与In的原子个数比。在此,金属氧化物531c可以使用可用于金属氧化物531a或金属氧化物531b的金属氧化物。In addition, the metal oxide 531 preferably has a stacked structure of oxide layers in which the atomic number ratios of metal atoms are different from each other. For example, when the metal oxide 531 contains at least indium (In) and the element M, the atomic number ratio of the element M to other elements among the constituent elements of the metal oxide 531a is preferably greater than that of the constituent elements of the metal oxide 531b. The ratio of the number of atoms of element M to other elements. In addition, the atomic number ratio of the element M to In in the metal oxide 531a is preferably greater than the atomic number ratio of the element M to In in the metal oxide 531b. Here, as the metal oxide 531c, a metal oxide that can be used for the metal oxide 531a or the metal oxide 531b can be used.
优选的是,使金属氧化物531a及金属氧化物531c的导带底的能量高于金属氧化物531b的导带底的能量。换言之,金属氧化物531a及金属氧化物531c的电子亲和势优选小于金属氧化物531b的电子亲和势。在此情况下,金属氧化物531c优选使用可以用于金属氧化物531a的金属氧化物。具体而言,金属氧化物531c的构成元素中的元素M与其他元素的原子个数比优选大于金属氧化物531b的构成元素中的元素M与其他元素的原子个数比。此外,金属氧化物531c中的元素M与In的原子个数比优选大于金属氧化物531b中的元素M与In的原子个数比。It is preferable that the energy of the conduction band bottom of the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531c be higher than the energy of the conduction band bottom of the metal oxide 531b. In other words, the electron affinity of the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531c is preferably smaller than the electron affinity of the metal oxide 531b. In this case, the metal oxide 531c preferably uses a metal oxide that can be used for the metal oxide 531a. Specifically, the atomic number ratio between element M and other elements among the constituent elements of the metal oxide 531c is preferably greater than the atomic number ratio between the element M and other elements among the constituent elements of the metal oxide 531b. In addition, the atomic number ratio of the element M to In in the metal oxide 531c is preferably greater than the atomic number ratio of the element M to In in the metal oxide 531b.
在此,在金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b及金属氧化物531c的接合部中,导带底的能级平缓地变化。换言之,也可以将上述情况表达为金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b及金属氧化物531c的接合部的导带底的能级连续地变化或者连续地接合。为此,优选降低形成在金属氧化物531a与金属氧化物531b的界面以及金属氧化物531b与金属氧化物531c的界面的混合层的缺陷态密度。Here, in the junction of the metal oxide 531a, the metal oxide 531b, and the metal oxide 531c, the energy level of the conduction band bottom changes gently. In other words, the above situation can also be expressed as the energy level of the conduction band bottom of the joint portion of the metal oxide 531a, the metal oxide 531b, and the metal oxide 531c continuously changes or joins continuously. For this purpose, it is preferable to reduce the defect state density of the mixed layer formed at the interface between the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531b and the interface between the metal oxide 531b and the metal oxide 531c.
具体而言,通过使金属氧化物531a与金属氧化物531b以及金属氧化物531b与金属氧化物531c除了氧之外还包含共同元素(为主要成分),可以形成缺陷态密度低的混合层。例如,在金属氧化物531b为In-Ga-Zn氧化物的情况下,作为金属氧化物531a及金属氧化物531c可以使用In-Ga-Zn氧化物、Ga-Zn氧化物或氧化镓等。此外,金属氧化物531c可以具有叠层结构。例如,可以使用In-Ga-Zn氧化物和该In-Ga-Zn氧化物上的Ga-Zn氧化物的叠层结构,或者,可以使用In-Ga-Zn氧化物和该In-Ga-Zn氧化物上的氧化镓的叠层结构。换言之,作为金属氧化物531c,也可以使用In-Ga-Zn氧化物和不包含In的氧化物的叠层结构。Specifically, by making the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531b and the metal oxide 531b and the metal oxide 531c contain a common element (as a main component) in addition to oxygen, a mixed layer with a low defect state density can be formed. For example, when the metal oxide 531b is an In-Ga-Zn oxide, In-Ga-Zn oxide, Ga-Zn oxide, gallium oxide, etc. can be used as the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531c. In addition, the metal oxide 531c may have a stacked structure. For example, a stacked structure of In-Ga-Zn oxide and Ga-Zn oxide on the In-Ga-Zn oxide may be used, or a stacked structure of In-Ga-Zn oxide and the In-Ga-Zn oxide may be used. Gallium oxide on oxide stack structure. In other words, as the metal oxide 531c, a stacked structure of an In-Ga-Zn oxide and an oxide not containing In may be used.
具体而言,作为金属氧化物531a使用In:Ga:Zn=1:3:4[原子个数比]或1:1:0.5[原子个数比]的金属氧化物,即可。此外,作为金属氧化物531b使用In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]或3:1:2[原子个数比]的金属氧化物,即可。此外,作为金属氧化物531c使用In:Ga:Zn=1:3:4[原子个数比]、In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]、Ga:Zn=2:1[原子个数比]或Ga:Zn=2:5[原子个数比]的金属氧化物,即可。此外,作为金属氧化物531c具有叠层结构的情况下的具体例子,可以举出In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]和Ga:Zn=2:1[原子个数比]的叠层结构、In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]和Ga:Zn=2:5[原子个数比]的叠层结构或In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]和氧化镓的叠层结构等。Specifically, it is sufficient to use a metal oxide having In:Ga:Zn=1:3:4 [atomic number ratio] or 1:1:0.5 [atomic number ratio] as the metal oxide 531a. In addition, as the metal oxide 531b, a metal oxide having In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3 [atomic number ratio] or 3:1:2 [atomic number ratio] may be used. In addition, as the metal oxide 531c, In: Ga: Zn = 1: 3: 4 [atomic number ratio], In: Ga: Zn = 4: 2: 3 [ atomic number ratio], Ga: Zn = 2: A metal oxide with a ratio of 1 [atomic number] or Ga:Zn=2:5 [atomic number ratio] is sufficient. In addition, as a specific example when the metal oxide 531c has a laminated structure, In: Ga: Zn = 4: 2: 3 [atom number ratio] and Ga: Zn = 2: 1 [atom number ratio]. Ratio], a stacked structure of In: Ga: Zn = 4: 2: 3 [atom number ratio] and Ga: Zn = 2: 5 [atom number ratio] or In: Ga: Zn = 4 :2:3 [atomic number ratio] and gallium oxide stacked structure, etc.
此时,载流子的主要路径为金属氧化物531b。通过使金属氧化物531a及金属氧化物531c具有上述结构,可以降低金属氧化物531a与金属氧化物531b的界面及金属氧化物531b与金属氧化物531c的界面的缺陷态密度。因此,界面散射对载流子传导的影响减少,从而晶体管500可以得到大通态电流及高频率特性。此外,在金属氧化物531c具有叠层结构时,可以期待发挥降低上述金属氧化物531b和金属氧化物531c的界面的缺陷态密度的效果并抑制金属氧化物531c所含的构成元素扩散到绝缘体550一侧。更具体而言,金属氧化物531c具有叠层结构且其叠层结构的上方位置不包含In的氧化物,因此可以抑制In可扩散在绝缘体550一侧。绝缘体550被用作栅极绝缘体,因此在In扩散的情况下导致晶体管的特性不良。由此,通过使金属氧化物531c具有叠层结构,可以提供可靠性高的显示装置。At this time, the main path of carriers is the metal oxide 531b. By having the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531c have the above-mentioned structure, the defect state density at the interface between the metal oxide 531a and the metal oxide 531b and the interface between the metal oxide 531b and the metal oxide 531c can be reduced. Therefore, the impact of interface scattering on carrier conduction is reduced, so that the transistor 500 can obtain large on-state current and high-frequency characteristics. In addition, when the metal oxide 531c has a laminated structure, it is expected to exert an effect of reducing the density of defect states at the interface between the metal oxide 531b and the metal oxide 531c and suppress diffusion of constituent elements contained in the metal oxide 531c into the insulator 550 one side. More specifically, the metal oxide 531c has a stacked structure and does not contain In oxide at a position above the stacked structure. Therefore, In can be suppressed from diffusing on the insulator 550 side. The insulator 550 is used as a gate insulator, thus causing poor characteristics of the transistor when In is diffused. Therefore, by providing the metal oxide 531c with a laminated structure, a highly reliable display device can be provided.
在金属氧化物531b上设置被用作源电极及漏电极的导电体542(导电体542a及导电体542b)。作为导电体542,优选使用选自铝、铬、铜、银、金、铂、钽、镍、钛、钼、钨、铪、钒、铌、锰、镁、锆、铍、铟、钌、铱、锶和镧中的金属元素、以上述金属元素为成分的合金或者组合上述金属元素的合金等。例如,优选使用氮化钽、氮化钛、钨、包含钛和铝的氮化物、包含钽和铝的氮化物、氧化钌、氮化钌、包含锶和钌的氧化物或包含镧和镍的氧化物等。此外,氮化钽、氮化钛、包含钛和铝的氮化物、包含钽和铝的氮化物、氧化钌、氮化钌、包含锶和钌的氧化物或包含镧和镍的氧化物是不容易氧化的导电材料或者吸收氧也维持导电性的材料,所以是优选的。Conductors 542 (conductors 542a and conductors 542b) used as source electrodes and drain electrodes are provided on the metal oxide 531b. The conductor 542 is preferably selected from the group consisting of aluminum, chromium, copper, silver, gold, platinum, tantalum, nickel, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, indium, ruthenium, and iridium. , metal elements in strontium and lanthanum, alloys containing the above metal elements as components or alloys combining the above metal elements, etc. For example, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, tungsten, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium or oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are preferably used. Oxides etc. Furthermore, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium or oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are not Conductive materials that are easily oxidized or materials that maintain conductivity even after absorbing oxygen are preferred.
通过以与金属氧化物531接触的方式形成上述导电体542,金属氧化物531中的导电体542附近的氧浓度有时降低。此外,在金属氧化物531中的导电体542附近有时形成包括包含在导电体542中的金属及金属氧化物531的成分的金属化合物层。在此情况下,金属氧化物531的导电体542附近的区域中的载流子浓度增加,该区域的电阻降低。By forming the conductor 542 in contact with the metal oxide 531 , the oxygen concentration in the vicinity of the conductor 542 in the metal oxide 531 may be reduced. In addition, a metal compound layer including the metal contained in the conductor 542 and components of the metal oxide 531 may be formed near the conductor 542 in the metal oxide 531. In this case, the carrier concentration in the region near the conductor 542 of the metal oxide 531 increases, and the resistance of this region decreases.
在此,导电体542a与导电体542b之间的区域以与绝缘体580的开口重叠的方式形成。因此,可以在导电体542a与导电体542b之间自对准地配置导电体560。Here, the area between the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b is formed so as to overlap with the opening of the insulator 580. Therefore, the conductor 560 can be arranged in a self-aligned manner between the conductor 542a and the conductor 542b.
绝缘体550被用作栅极绝缘体。绝缘体550优选与金属氧化物531c的顶面接触地配置。绝缘体550可以使用氧化硅、氧氮化硅、氮氧化硅、氮化硅、添加有氟的氧化硅、添加有碳的氧化硅、添加有碳及氮的氧化硅或具有空孔的氧化硅。尤其是,氧化硅及氧氮化硅具有热稳定性,所以是优选的。Insulator 550 is used as a gate insulator. The insulator 550 is preferably disposed in contact with the top surface of the metal oxide 531c. The insulator 550 may use silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, fluorine-added silicon oxide, carbon-added silicon oxide, carbon-nitrogen-added silicon oxide, or silicon oxide having pores. In particular, silicon oxide and silicon oxynitride are preferred because of their thermal stability.
与绝缘体524同样,优选降低绝缘体550中的水或氢等杂质的浓度。绝缘体550的厚度优选为1nm以上且20nm以下。Like the insulator 524 , it is preferable to reduce the concentration of impurities such as water and hydrogen in the insulator 550 . The thickness of the insulator 550 is preferably 1 nm or more and 20 nm or less.
也可以在绝缘体550与导电体560之间设置金属氧化物。该金属氧化物优选抑制氧从绝缘体550扩散到导电体560。由此,可以抑制因绝缘体550中的氧所导致的导电体560的氧化。A metal oxide may be provided between the insulator 550 and the conductor 560 . The metal oxide preferably inhibits diffusion of oxygen from insulator 550 to conductor 560 . This can suppress oxidation of the conductor 560 due to oxygen in the insulator 550 .
该金属氧化物有时被用作栅极绝缘体的一部分。因此,在将氧化硅或氧氮化硅等用于绝缘体550的情况下,作为该金属氧化物优选使用作为相对介电常数高的high-k材料的金属氧化物。通过使栅极绝缘体具有绝缘体550与该金属氧化物的叠层结构,可以形成具有热稳定性且相对介电常数高的叠层结构。因此,可以在保持栅极绝缘体的物理厚度的同时降低在晶体管工作时施加的栅极电位。此外,可以减少被用作栅极绝缘体的绝缘体的等效氧化物厚度(EOT:Equivalent oxide thickness)。This metal oxide is sometimes used as part of the gate insulator. Therefore, when silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, or the like is used for the insulator 550 , it is preferable to use a metal oxide that is a high-k material with a high relative dielectric constant as the metal oxide. By providing the gate insulator with a laminated structure of the insulator 550 and the metal oxide, a laminated structure having thermal stability and a high relative dielectric constant can be formed. Therefore, the gate potential applied during operation of the transistor can be reduced while maintaining the physical thickness of the gate insulator. In addition, the equivalent oxide thickness (EOT) of an insulator used as a gate insulator can be reduced.
具体而言,可以使用包含选自铪、铝、镓、钇、锆、钨、钛、钽、镍、锗和镁等中的一种或两种以上的金属氧化物。特别是,优选使用作为包含铝及铪中的一方或双方的氧化物的绝缘体的氧化铝、氧化铪或包含铝及铪的氧化物(铝酸铪)等。Specifically, a metal oxide containing one or two or more types selected from the group consisting of hafnium, aluminum, gallium, yttrium, zirconium, tungsten, titanium, tantalum, nickel, germanium, magnesium, and the like can be used. In particular, it is preferable to use aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, an oxide containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate), etc. which are insulators containing oxides of one or both of aluminum and hafnium.
虽然在图79中,导电体560具有两层结构,但是也可以具有单层结构或三层以上的叠层结构。Although the conductor 560 has a two-layer structure in FIG. 79, it may have a single-layer structure or a stacked structure of three or more layers.
作为导电体560a优选使用上述具有抑制氢原子、氢分子、水分子、氮原子、氮分子、氧化氮分子(N2O、NO或NO2等)或铜原子等杂质的扩散的功能的导电体。此外,优选使用具有抑制氧(例如,氧原子和氧分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能的导电材料。As the conductor 560a, it is preferable to use the conductor described above that has the function of suppressing the diffusion of impurities such as hydrogen atoms, hydrogen molecules, water molecules, nitrogen atoms, nitrogen molecules, nitrogen oxide molecules (N 2 O, NO, NO 2, etc.) or copper atoms. . Furthermore, it is preferable to use a conductive material having a function of suppressing diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, etc.).
当导电体560a具有抑制氧的扩散的功能时,可以抑制绝缘体550所包含的氧使导电体560b氧化而导致导电率的下降。作为具有抑制氧的扩散的功能的导电材料,例如,优选使用钽、氮化钽、钌或氧化钌等。When the conductor 560a has the function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen, it can be suppressed that the oxygen contained in the insulator 550 oxidizes the conductor 560b and causes a decrease in conductivity. As the conductive material having the function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen, for example, tantalum, tantalum nitride, ruthenium or ruthenium oxide is preferably used.
作为导电体560b优选使用以钨、铜或铝为主要成分的导电材料。此外,由于导电体560还被用作布线,所以优选使用导电性高的导电体。例如,可以使用以钨、铜或铝为主要成分的导电材料。此外,导电体560b可以具有叠层结构,例如,可以具有钛或氮化钛与上述导电材料的叠层结构。As the conductor 560b, it is preferable to use a conductive material containing tungsten, copper, or aluminum as a main component. In addition, since the conductor 560 is also used as a wiring, it is preferable to use a conductor with high conductivity. For example, a conductive material mainly composed of tungsten, copper or aluminum can be used. In addition, the conductor 560b may have a laminated structure. For example, it may have a laminated structure of titanium or titanium nitride and the above-mentioned conductive materials.
如图79A和图79C所示,在金属氧化物531b的不与导电体542重叠的区域,即金属氧化物531的沟道形成区域中,金属氧化物531的侧面被导电体560覆盖。由此,可以容易将被用作第一栅电极的导电体560的电场影响到金属氧化物531的侧面。由此,可以提高晶体管500的通态电流及频率特性。As shown in FIGS. 79A and 79C , in the region of the metal oxide 531 b that does not overlap the conductor 542 , that is, in the channel formation region of the metal oxide 531 , the side surfaces of the metal oxide 531 are covered with the conductor 560 . Thereby, the electric field of the conductor 560 used as the first gate electrode can be easily affected on the side surface of the metal oxide 531 . As a result, the on-state current and frequency characteristics of the transistor 500 can be improved.
绝缘体554与绝缘体514等同样地优选被用作抑制水或氢等杂质从绝缘体580一侧混入晶体管500的阻挡绝缘膜。例如,绝缘体554的氢透过性优选比绝缘体524低。再者,如图79B及图79C所示,绝缘体554优选与金属氧化物531c的侧面、导电体542a的顶面及侧面、导电体542b的顶面及侧面、金属氧化物531a及金属氧化物531b的侧面以及绝缘体524的顶面接触。通过采用这种结构,可以抑制绝缘体580所包含的氢从导电体542a、导电体542b、金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b及绝缘体524的顶面或侧面进入金属氧化物531。Like the insulator 514 and the like, the insulator 554 is preferably used as a barrier insulating film that prevents impurities such as water and hydrogen from being mixed into the transistor 500 from the insulator 580 side. For example, the hydrogen permeability of insulator 554 is preferably lower than that of insulator 524 . Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 79B and 79C , the insulator 554 is preferably in contact with the side surfaces of the metal oxide 531c, the top surface and side surfaces of the conductor 542a, the top surface and side surfaces of the conductor 542b, the metal oxide 531a, and the metal oxide 531b. and the top surface of insulator 524 are in contact. By adopting this structure, hydrogen contained in the insulator 580 can be prevented from entering the metal oxide 531 from the top or side surfaces of the conductors 542a, 542b, metal oxides 531a, 531b, and the insulator 524.
再者,绝缘体554还具有抑制氧(例如,氧原子和氧分子等中的至少一个)的扩散的功能(不容易使上述氧透过)。例如,绝缘体554的氧透过性优选比绝缘体580或绝缘体524低。In addition, the insulator 554 also has a function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen (for example, at least one of oxygen atoms, oxygen molecules, etc.) (making it difficult for the oxygen to permeate). For example, insulator 554 preferably has lower oxygen permeability than insulator 580 or insulator 524 .
绝缘体554优选通过溅射法沉积。通过在包含氧的气氛下使用溅射法沉积绝缘体554,可以对绝缘体524的与绝缘体554接触的区域附近添加氧。由此,可以将氧从该区域通过绝缘体524供应到金属氧化物531中。在此,通过使绝缘体554具有抑制氧扩散到上方的功能,可以防止氧从金属氧化物531扩散到绝缘体580。此外,通过使绝缘体522具有抑制氧扩散到下方的功能,可以防止氧从金属氧化物531扩散到衬底一侧。如此,对金属氧化物531中的沟道形成区域供应氧。由此,可以减少金属氧化物531的氧空位并抑制晶体管的常开启化。Insulator 554 is preferably deposited by sputtering. By depositing insulator 554 using sputtering in an atmosphere containing oxygen, oxygen can be added to the vicinity of the area of insulator 524 that is in contact with insulator 554 . Thereby, oxygen can be supplied from this area through the insulator 524 into the metal oxide 531 . Here, by providing the insulator 554 with a function of suppressing diffusion of oxygen upward, it is possible to prevent oxygen from diffusing from the metal oxide 531 to the insulator 580 . In addition, by providing the insulator 522 with a function of suppressing the diffusion of oxygen downward, it is possible to prevent oxygen from diffusing from the metal oxide 531 to the substrate side. In this way, oxygen is supplied to the channel formation region in the metal oxide 531 . Thereby, the oxygen vacancies in the metal oxide 531 can be reduced and the normally-on state of the transistor can be suppressed.
作为绝缘体554,例如可以沉积包含铝及铪中的一方或双方的氧化物的绝缘体。注意,作为包含铝和铪中的一方或双方的氧化物的绝缘体,优选使用氧化铝、氧化铪或包含铝及铪的氧化物(铝酸铪)等。As the insulator 554, for example, an insulator containing an oxide of one or both of aluminum and hafnium may be deposited. Note that as an insulator containing an oxide of one or both of aluminum and hafnium, it is preferable to use aluminum oxide, hafnium oxide, an oxide containing aluminum and hafnium (hafnium aluminate), or the like.
通过由对氢具有阻挡性的绝缘体554覆盖绝缘体524、绝缘体550以及金属氧化物531,绝缘体580由绝缘体554与绝缘体524、金属氧化物531以及绝缘体550分开。由此,可以抑制从晶体管500的外部进入氢等杂质。因此,可以对晶体管500赋予良好的电特性及可靠性。Insulator 580 is separated from insulator 524 , metal oxide 531 and insulator 550 by insulator 554 covering insulator 524 , insulator 550 and metal oxide 531 with insulator 554 having a barrier to hydrogen. This can prevent impurities such as hydrogen from entering from outside the transistor 500 . Therefore, good electrical characteristics and reliability can be provided to the transistor 500 .
绝缘体580优选隔着绝缘体554设置在绝缘体524、金属氧化物531及导电体542上。例如,作为绝缘体580,优选包括氧化硅、氧氮化硅、氮氧化硅、添加有氟的氧化硅、添加有碳的氧化硅、添加有碳及氮的氧化硅或具有空孔的氧化硅等。尤其是,氧化硅及氧氮化硅具有热稳定性,所以是优选的。特别是,因为氧化硅、氧氮化硅或具有空孔的氧化硅等的材料容易形成包含通过加热脱离的氧的区域,所以是优选的。The insulator 580 is preferably provided on the insulator 524, the metal oxide 531, and the conductor 542 with the insulator 554 interposed therebetween. For example, the insulator 580 preferably includes silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon oxynitride, fluorine-added silicon oxide, carbon-added silicon oxide, carbon-nitrogen-added silicon oxide, or silicon oxide having pores. . In particular, silicon oxide and silicon oxynitride are preferred because of their thermal stability. In particular, materials such as silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, or silicon oxide having pores are preferred because a region containing oxygen desorbed by heating is easily formed.
优选绝缘体580中的水或氢等杂质的浓度得到降低。此外,绝缘体580的顶面也可以被平坦化。It is preferable that the concentration of impurities such as water and hydrogen in the insulator 580 is reduced. Additionally, the top surface of insulator 580 may also be planarized.
绝缘体574优选与绝缘体514等同样地被用作抑制水或氢等杂质从上方混入到绝缘体580的阻挡绝缘膜。作为绝缘体574,例如可以使用能够用于绝缘体514或绝缘体554等的绝缘体。The insulator 574 is preferably used as a barrier insulating film that prevents impurities such as water and hydrogen from being mixed into the insulator 580 from above, like the insulator 514 and the like. As the insulator 574, for example, an insulator that can be used for the insulator 514, the insulator 554, etc. can be used.
优选在绝缘体574上设置被用作层间膜的绝缘体581。与绝缘体524等同样,优选绝缘体581中的水或氢等杂质的浓度得到降低。It is preferable to provide an insulator 581 serving as an interlayer film on the insulator 574 . Like the insulator 524 and the like, it is preferable that the concentration of impurities such as water and hydrogen in the insulator 581 be reduced.
在形成于绝缘体581、绝缘体574、绝缘体580及绝缘体554中的开口中配置导电体545a及导电体545b。另外,导电体545a及导电体545b以中间夹着导电体560的方式设置。此外,导电体545a及导电体545b的顶面的高度与绝缘体581的顶面可以位于同一平面上。The conductor 545a and the conductor 545b are arranged in the openings formed in the insulator 581, the insulator 574, the insulator 580, and the insulator 554. In addition, the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b are provided with the conductor 560 sandwiched therebetween. In addition, the heights of the top surfaces of the conductors 545a and 545b and the top surface of the insulator 581 may be located on the same plane.
此外,以与绝缘体581、绝缘体574、绝缘体580以及绝缘体554的开口的内壁接触的方式设置有绝缘体541a,以与绝缘体541a的侧面接触的方式形成有导电体545a的第一导电体。导电体542a位于该开口的底部的至少一部分且与导电体545a接触。同样,以与绝缘体581、绝缘体574、绝缘体580以及绝缘体554的开口的内壁接触的方式设置有绝缘体541b,以与绝缘体541b的侧面接触的方式形成有导电体545b的第一导电体。导电体542b位于该开口的底部的至少一部分且与导电体545b接触。In addition, the insulator 541a is provided in contact with the inner wall of the opening of the insulator 581, 574, 580 and the insulator 554, and the first conductor 545a of the conductor 545a is formed in contact with the side surface of the insulator 541a. The conductor 542a is located in at least a portion of the bottom of the opening and is in contact with the conductor 545a. Similarly, the insulator 541b is provided in contact with the inner wall of the opening of the insulator 581, 574, 580 and the insulator 554, and the first conductor 545b is formed in contact with the side surface of the insulator 541b. The conductor 542b is located in at least a portion of the bottom of the opening and is in contact with the conductor 545b.
导电体545a及导电体545b优选使用以钨、铜或铝为主要成分的导电材料。此外,导电体545a及导电体545b也可以具有叠层结构。It is preferable to use a conductive material containing tungsten, copper or aluminum as a main component for the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b. In addition, the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b may have a laminated structure.
当作为导电体545采用叠层结构时,作为与金属氧化物531a、金属氧化物531b、导电体542、绝缘体554、绝缘体580、绝缘体574及绝缘体581接触的导电体优选使用上述具有抑制水或氢等杂质的扩散的功能的导电体。例如,优选使用钽、氮化钽、钛、氮化钛、钌或氧化钌等。可以以单层或叠层使用具有抑制水或氢等杂质的扩散的功能的导电材料。通过使用该导电材料,可以防止添加到绝缘体580的氧被导电体545a及导电体545b吸收。此外,可以防止水或氢等杂质从绝缘体581的上方的层通过导电体545a及导电体545b进入金属氧化物531。When a laminated structure is adopted as the conductor 545, it is preferable to use the above-mentioned conductor having the ability to inhibit water or hydrogen as the conductor in contact with the metal oxide 531a, the metal oxide 531b, the conductor 542, the insulator 554, the insulator 580, the insulator 574 and the insulator 581. A conductor with the function of diffusion of impurities. For example, tantalum, tantalum nitride, titanium, titanium nitride, ruthenium, ruthenium oxide, etc. are preferably used. A conductive material having a function of suppressing the diffusion of impurities such as water or hydrogen can be used in a single layer or a stacked layer. By using this conductive material, oxygen added to the insulator 580 can be prevented from being absorbed by the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b. In addition, impurities such as water and hydrogen can be prevented from entering the metal oxide 531 from the layer above the insulator 581 through the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b.
作为绝缘体541a及绝缘体541b,例如使用能够用于绝缘体554等的绝缘体,即可。因为绝缘体541a及绝缘体541b与绝缘体554接触地设置,所以可以抑制水或氢等杂质从绝缘体580等经过导电体545a及导电体545b混入金属氧化物531。此外,绝缘体541a及绝缘体541b可以抑制绝缘体580所包含的氧被导电体545a及导电体545b吸收。As the insulator 541a and the insulator 541b, for example, an insulator that can be used for the insulator 554 and the like may be used. Since the insulator 541a and the insulator 541b are provided in contact with the insulator 554, impurities such as water and hydrogen can be suppressed from being mixed into the metal oxide 531 from the insulator 580 and the like through the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b. In addition, the insulator 541a and the insulator 541b can prevent oxygen contained in the insulator 580 from being absorbed by the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b.
虽然未图示,但是可以以与导电体545a的顶面及导电体545b的顶面接触的方式配置被用作布线的导电体。被用作布线的导电体优选使用以钨、铜或铝为主要成分的导电材料。此外,该导电体可以具有叠层结构。例如,可以具有钛或氮化钛与上述导电材料的叠层结构。该导电体也可以以嵌入绝缘体的开口中的方式形成。Although not shown in the figure, the conductor used as a wiring may be arranged so as to be in contact with the top surfaces of the conductor 545a and the conductor 545b. It is preferable to use a conductive material containing tungsten, copper, or aluminum as a main component as a conductor used for wiring. Furthermore, the conductor may have a laminated structure. For example, it may have a laminated structure of titanium or titanium nitride and the above-mentioned conductive material. The electrical conductor may also be formed to be embedded in the opening of the insulator.
<晶体管的构成材料><Materials constituting transistors>
以下,说明可用于晶体管的构成材料。The following describes the constituent materials that can be used for transistors.
[衬底][Substrate]
作为形成晶体管500的衬底例如可以使用绝缘体衬底、半导体衬底或导电体衬底。作为绝缘体衬底,例如可以举出玻璃衬底、石英衬底、蓝宝石衬底、稳定氧化锆衬底(例如,氧化钇稳定氧化锆衬底等)或树脂衬底等。此外,作为半导体衬底,例如可以举出由硅或锗等构成的半导体衬底、或者由碳化硅、硅锗、砷化镓、磷化铟、氧化锌或氧化镓等构成的化合物半导体衬底等。再者,还可以举出在上述半导体衬底内部具有绝缘体区域的半导体衬底,例如有SOI(Silicon On Insulator;绝缘体上硅)衬底等。作为导电体衬底,可以举出石墨衬底、金属衬底、合金衬底或导电树脂衬底等。另外,可以举出包含金属氮化物的衬底或包含金属氧化物的衬底等。再者,还可以举出设置有导电体或半导体的绝缘体衬底、设置有导电体或绝缘体的半导体衬底或者设置有半导体或绝缘体的导电体衬底等。另外,也可以使用在这些衬底上设置有元件的衬底。作为设置在衬底上的元件,可以举出电容元件、电阻元件、开关元件、发光元件或存储元件等。As a substrate on which the transistor 500 is formed, an insulating substrate, a semiconductor substrate, or a conductive substrate can be used, for example. Examples of the insulating substrate include a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a sapphire substrate, a stabilized zirconia substrate (for example, a yttria-stabilized zirconia substrate, etc.), a resin substrate, and the like. Examples of the semiconductor substrate include a semiconductor substrate made of silicon, germanium, or the like, or a compound semiconductor substrate made of silicon carbide, silicon germanium, gallium arsenide, indium phosphide, zinc oxide, gallium oxide, or the like. wait. Furthermore, there may also be mentioned a semiconductor substrate having an insulator region inside the semiconductor substrate, such as an SOI (Silicon On Insulator) substrate. Examples of the conductive substrate include a graphite substrate, a metal substrate, an alloy substrate, a conductive resin substrate, and the like. Examples of the substrate include a substrate containing metal nitride, a substrate containing metal oxide, and the like. Furthermore, an insulator substrate provided with a conductor or a semiconductor, a semiconductor substrate provided with a conductor or an insulator, or a conductor substrate provided with a semiconductor or an insulator, etc. are also included. In addition, substrates in which elements are provided on these substrates can also be used. Examples of elements provided on the substrate include capacitive elements, resistive elements, switching elements, light-emitting elements, memory elements, and the like.
[绝缘体][insulator]
作为绝缘体,有具有绝缘性的氧化物、氮化物、氧氮化物、氮氧化物、金属氧化物、金属氧氮化物或者金属氮氧化物等。Examples of insulators include insulating oxides, nitrides, oxynitrides, oxynitrides, metal oxides, metal oxynitrides, or metal oxynitrides.
例如,当进行晶体管的微型化及高集成化时,由于栅极绝缘体的薄膜化,有时发生泄漏电流等的问题。通过作为被用作栅极绝缘体的绝缘体使用high-k材料,可以在保持物理厚度的同时实现晶体管工作时的低电压化。另一方面,通过将相对介电常数较低的材料用于被用作层间膜的绝缘体,可以减少产生在布线之间的寄生电容。因此,优选根据功能选择绝缘体的材料。For example, when transistors are miniaturized and highly integrated, problems such as leakage current may occur due to thinning of gate insulators. By using high-k materials as insulators used as gate insulators, it is possible to achieve lower voltages during transistor operation while maintaining physical thickness. On the other hand, by using a material with a low relative dielectric constant for an insulator used as an interlayer film, parasitic capacitance generated between wirings can be reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to select the material of the insulator according to the function.
作为相对介电常数较高的绝缘体,可以举出氧化镓、氧化铪、氧化锆、含有铝及铪的氧化物、含有铝及铪的氧氮化物、含有硅及铪的氧化物、含有硅及铪的氧氮化物或者含有硅及铪的氮化物等。Examples of insulators with high relative dielectric constants include gallium oxide, hafnium oxide, zirconium oxide, oxides containing aluminum and hafnium, oxynitrides containing aluminum and hafnium, oxides containing silicon and hafnium, oxides containing silicon and Hafnium oxynitride or nitride containing silicon and hafnium, etc.
作为相对介电常数较低的绝缘体,可以举出氧化硅、氧氮化硅、氮氧化硅、氮化硅、添加有氟的氧化硅、添加有碳的氧化硅、添加有碳及氮的氧化硅、具有空孔的氧化硅或树脂等。Examples of insulators with a low relative dielectric constant include silicon oxide, silicon oxynitride, silicon oxynitride, silicon nitride, fluorine-added silicon oxide, carbon-added silicon oxide, and carbon and nitrogen-added oxide. Silicon, silica with pores or resin, etc.
通过由具有抑制氢等杂质及氧的透过的功能的绝缘体(绝缘体514、绝缘体522、绝缘体554及绝缘体574等)围绕使用氧化物半导体的晶体管,可以使晶体管的电特性稳定。作为具有抑制氢等杂质及氧的透过的功能的绝缘体,例如可以以单层或叠层使用包含硼、碳、氮、氧、氟、镁、铝、硅、磷、氯、氩、镓、锗、钇、锆、镧、钕、铪或钽的绝缘体。具体而言,作为具有抑制氢等杂质及氧的透过的功能的绝缘体,可以使用氧化铝、氧化镁、氧化镓、氧化锗、氧化钇、氧化锆、氧化镧、氧化钕、氧化铪或氧化钽等金属氧化物、氮化铝、氮化铝钛、氮化钛、氮氧化硅或氮化硅等金属氮化物。By surrounding a transistor using an oxide semiconductor with an insulator (insulator 514, insulator 522, insulator 554, insulator 574, etc.) that has the function of suppressing the transmission of impurities such as hydrogen and oxygen, the electrical characteristics of the transistor can be stabilized. As the insulator having the function of suppressing the transmission of impurities such as hydrogen and oxygen, for example, boron, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine, magnesium, aluminum, silicon, phosphorus, chlorine, argon, gallium, etc. can be used in a single layer or a stacked layer. Insulators of germanium, yttrium, zirconium, lanthanum, neodymium, hafnium or tantalum. Specifically, as the insulator having the function of suppressing the transmission of impurities such as hydrogen and oxygen, aluminum oxide, magnesium oxide, gallium oxide, germanium oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, lanthanum oxide, neodymium oxide, hafnium oxide or oxide Metal oxides such as tantalum, metal nitrides such as aluminum nitride, titanium aluminum nitride, titanium nitride, silicon oxynitride or silicon nitride.
被用作栅极绝缘体的绝缘体优选为具有包含通过加热脱离的氧的区域的绝缘体。例如,通过采用具有包含通过加热脱离的氧的区域的氧化硅或者氧氮化硅接触于金属氧化物531的结构,可以填补金属氧化物531所包含的氧空位。The insulator used as the gate insulator is preferably an insulator having a region containing oxygen desorbed by heating. For example, by employing a structure in which silicon oxide or silicon oxynitride having a region containing oxygen desorbed by heating is in contact with the metal oxide 531 , oxygen vacancies contained in the metal oxide 531 can be filled.
[导电体][Conductor]
作为导电体,优选使用选自铝、铬、铜、银、金、铂、钽、镍、钛、钼、钨、铪、钒、铌、锰、镁、锆、铍、铟、钌、铱、锶和镧等中的金属元素、以上述金属元素为成分的合金或者组合上述金属元素的合金等。例如,优选使用氮化钽、氮化钛、钨、包含钛和铝的氮化物、包含钽和铝的氮化物、氧化钌、氮化钌、包含锶和钌的氧化物或包含镧和镍的氧化物等。此外,氮化钽、氮化钛、包含钛和铝的氮化物、包含钽和铝的氮化物、氧化钌、氮化钌、包含锶和钌的氧化物或包含镧和镍的氧化物是不容易氧化的导电材料或者吸收氧也维持导电性的材料,所以是优选的。此外,也可以使用以包含磷等杂质元素的多晶硅为代表的导电率高的半导体或者镍硅化物等硅化物。As the conductor, it is preferable to use one selected from the group consisting of aluminum, chromium, copper, silver, gold, platinum, tantalum, nickel, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, hafnium, vanadium, niobium, manganese, magnesium, zirconium, beryllium, indium, ruthenium, iridium, Metal elements such as strontium and lanthanum, alloys containing the above metal elements as components, or alloys combining the above metal elements, etc. For example, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, tungsten, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium or oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are preferably used. Oxides etc. Furthermore, tantalum nitride, titanium nitride, nitrides containing titanium and aluminum, nitrides containing tantalum and aluminum, ruthenium oxide, ruthenium nitride, oxides containing strontium and ruthenium or oxides containing lanthanum and nickel are not Conductive materials that are easily oxidized or materials that maintain conductivity even after absorbing oxygen are preferred. In addition, a highly conductive semiconductor such as polycrystalline silicon containing impurity elements such as phosphorus or a silicide such as nickel silicide may also be used.
也可以层叠多个由上述材料形成的导电体。例如,也可以采用组合包含上述金属元素的材料和包含氧的导电材料的叠层结构。此外,也可以采用组合包含上述金属元素的材料和包含氮的导电材料的叠层结构。此外,也可以采用组合包含上述金属元素的材料、包含氧的导电材料和包含氮的导电材料的叠层结构。A plurality of conductors made of the above-mentioned materials may be laminated. For example, a laminated structure in which a material containing the above-mentioned metal element and a conductive material containing oxygen are combined may be adopted. In addition, a laminated structure in which a material containing the above-mentioned metal element and a conductive material containing nitrogen are combined may be adopted. In addition, a laminated structure in which a material containing the above-mentioned metal element, a conductive material containing oxygen, and a conductive material containing nitrogen are combined may be adopted.
此外,在将金属氧化物用于晶体管的沟道形成区域的情况下,作为被用作栅电极的导电体优选采用组合包含上述金属元素的材料和包含氧的导电材料的叠层结构。在此情况下,优选将包含氧的导电材料设置在沟道形成区域一侧。通过将包含氧的导电材料设置在沟道形成区域一侧,从该导电材料脱离的氧容易被供应到沟道形成区域。Furthermore, when a metal oxide is used for a channel formation region of a transistor, it is preferable that a conductor used as a gate electrode adopt a laminated structure in which a material containing the above-mentioned metal element and a conductive material containing oxygen are combined. In this case, it is preferable to provide the conductive material containing oxygen on the channel formation region side. By arranging the conductive material containing oxygen on the channel formation region side, oxygen detached from the conductive material is easily supplied to the channel formation region.
尤其是,作为被用作栅电极的导电体,优选使用含有包含在形成沟道的金属氧化物中的金属元素及氧的导电材料。此外,也可以使用含有上述金属元素及氮的导电材料。例如,也可以使用氮化钛或氮化钽等包含氮的导电材料。此外,可以使用铟锡氧化物、包含氧化钨的铟氧化物、包含氧化钨的铟锌氧化物、包含氧化钛的铟氧化物、包含氧化钛的铟锡氧化物、铟锌氧化物或添加有硅的铟锡氧化物。此外,也可以使用包含氮的铟镓锌氧化物。通过使用上述材料,有时可以俘获形成沟道的金属氧化物所包含的氢。另外,有时可以俘获从外方的绝缘体等进入的氢。In particular, as a conductor used as a gate electrode, it is preferable to use a conductive material containing a metal element contained in a metal oxide forming a channel and oxygen. In addition, a conductive material containing the above-mentioned metal elements and nitrogen may also be used. For example, a conductive material containing nitrogen such as titanium nitride or tantalum nitride can also be used. In addition, indium tin oxide, indium oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium zinc oxide or added Indium tin oxide of silicon. In addition, nitrogen-containing indium gallium zinc oxide may also be used. By using the above materials, hydrogen contained in the metal oxide forming the channel can sometimes be trapped. In addition, hydrogen entering from an external insulator or the like may be trapped.
本实施方式的至少一部分可以与本说明书所记载的其他实施方式适当地组合而实施。At least part of this embodiment can be implemented in appropriate combination with other embodiments described in this specification.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而实施。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be combined appropriately with the structure shown in other embodiment modes and examples and implemented.
(实施方式12)(Embodiment 12)
在本实施方式中,说明可用于上述实施方式中说明的OS晶体管的金属氧化物(以下称为氧化物半导体)。In this embodiment mode, a metal oxide (hereinafter referred to as an oxide semiconductor) usable for the OS transistor described in the above embodiment mode will be described.
<结晶结构的分类><Classification of crystal structures>
首先,对氧化物半导体中的结晶结构的分类参照图80A进行说明。图80A是说明氧化物半导体,典型为IGZO(包含In、Ga及Zn的金属氧化物)的结晶结构的分类的图。First, the classification of crystal structures in oxide semiconductors will be described with reference to FIG. 80A. 80A is a diagram illustrating the classification of crystal structures of oxide semiconductors, typically IGZO (metal oxide containing In, Ga, and Zn).
如图80A所示那样,氧化物半导体大致分为“Amorphous(无定形)”、“Crystalline(结晶性)”及“Crystal(结晶)”。此外,在“Amorphous”中包含completely amorphous。此外,在“Crystalline”中包含CAAC(c-axis-alignedcrystalline)、nc(nanocrystalline)及CAC(cloud-aligned composite)(excluding single crystal and poly crystal)。此外,在“Crystalline”的分类中不包含single crystal(单晶)、poly crystal(多晶)及completely amorphous。此外,在“Crystal”的分类中包含single crystal及polycrystal。As shown in FIG. 80A , oxide semiconductors are roughly classified into "Amorphous (amorphous)", "Crystalline (crystalline)" and "Crystal (crystalline)". Also, in "Amorphous" includes completely amorphous. In addition, "Crystalline" includes CAAC (c-axis-aligned crystalline), nc (nanocrystalline), and CAC (cloud-aligned composite) (excluding single crystal and poly crystal). In addition, single crystal (single crystal), poly crystal (polycrystalline) and completely amorphous are not included in the "Crystalline" classification. In addition, the "Crystal" category includes single crystal and polycrystal.
此外,图80A所示的外框线被加粗的部分中的结构是介于“Amorphous(无定形)”与“Crystal(结晶)”之间的中间状态,是属于新的边界区域(New crystalline phase)的结构。就是说,将该结构可以说是与“Crystal(结晶)”或在能量性上不稳定的“Amorphous(无定形)”完全不同的结构。In addition, the structure in the portion with a thickened outer frame shown in Figure 80A is an intermediate state between "Amorphous (amorphous)" and "Crystal (crystalline)" and belongs to the new boundary region (New crystalline). phase) structure. In other words, this structure can be said to be a completely different structure from "Crystal" or "Amorphous" which is energetically unstable.
此外,可以使用X射线衍射(XRD:X-Ray Diffraction)光谱对膜或衬底的结晶结构进行评价。图80B示出被分类为“Crystalline”的CAAC-IGZO膜的通过GIXD(Grazing-Incidence XRD)测量而得到的XRD谱。此外,将GIXD法也称为薄膜法或Seemann-Bohlin法。下面,将图80B所示的通过GIXD测量而得到的XRD谱简单地记为XRD谱。此外,图80B所示的CAAC-IGZO膜的组成是In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]附近。此外,图80B所示的CAAC-IGZO膜的厚度为500nm。In addition, X-ray diffraction (XRD: X-Ray Diffraction) spectroscopy can be used to evaluate the crystal structure of the film or substrate. FIG. 80B shows the XRD spectrum measured by GIXD (Grazing-Incidence XRD) of the CAAC-IGZO film classified as "Crystalline". In addition, the GIXD method is also called the thin film method or the Seemann-Bohlin method. Next, the XRD spectrum obtained by GLCD measurement shown in FIG. 80B is simply referred to as an XRD spectrum. In addition, the composition of the CAAC-IGZO film shown in FIG. 80B is around In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3 [atomic number ratio]. In addition, the thickness of the CAAC-IGZO film shown in FIG. 80B is 500 nm.
如图80B所示,在CAAC-IGZO膜的XRD谱中检测出表示明确的结晶性的峰。具体而言,在CAAC-IGZO膜的XRD谱中,2θ=31°附近检测出表示c轴取向的峰。此外,如图80B所示那样,2θ=31°附近的峰在以检测出峰强度(Intensity)的角度为轴时左右非对称。As shown in FIG. 80B , a peak indicating clear crystallinity was detected in the XRD spectrum of the CAAC-IGZO film. Specifically, in the XRD spectrum of the CAAC-IGZO film, a peak indicating c-axis orientation was detected near 2θ=31°. In addition, as shown in FIG. 80B , the peak near 2θ=31° is asymmetrical around the axis at which the peak intensity (Intensity) is detected.
可以使用纳米束电子衍射法(NBED:Nano Beam Electron Diffraction)观察的衍射图案(也称为纳米束电子衍射图案)对膜或衬底的结晶结构进行评价。图80C示出CAAC-IGZO膜的衍射图案。图80C是通过将电子束向平行于衬底的方向入射的NBED观察的衍射图案。此外,图80C所示的CAAC-IGZO膜的组成是In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3[原子个数比]附近。此外,在纳米束电子衍射法中,进行束径为1nm的电子衍射。The crystal structure of the film or substrate can be evaluated using a diffraction pattern (also called a nanobeam electron diffraction pattern) observed by nanobeam electron diffraction (NBED). Figure 80C shows the diffraction pattern of the CAAC-IGZO film. Figure 80C is a diffraction pattern observed by NBED in which the electron beam is incident in a direction parallel to the substrate. In addition, the composition of the CAAC-IGZO film shown in FIG. 80C is around In:Ga:Zn=4:2:3 [atomic number ratio]. Furthermore, in the nanobeam electron diffraction method, electron diffraction with a beam diameter of 1 nm was performed.
如图80C所示那样,在CAAC-IGZO膜的衍射图案中观察到表示c轴取向的多个斑点。As shown in FIG. 80C , a plurality of spots indicating the c-axis orientation were observed in the diffraction pattern of the CAAC-IGZO film.
[氧化物半导体的结构][Structure of Oxide Semiconductor]
此外,在注目于氧化物半导体的结晶结构的情况下,有时氧化物半导体的分类与图80A不同。例如,氧化物半导体可以分类为单晶氧化物半导体和除此之外的非单晶氧化物半导体。作为非单晶氧化物半导体,例如可以举出上述CAAC-OS及nc-OS。此外,在非单晶氧化物半导体中包含多晶氧化物半导体、a-like OS(amorphous-like oxidesemiconductor)及非晶氧化物半导体等。In addition, when focusing on the crystal structure of the oxide semiconductor, the classification of the oxide semiconductor may be different from that in FIG. 80A . For example, oxide semiconductors can be classified into single crystal oxide semiconductors and other than single crystal oxide semiconductors. Examples of non-single crystal oxide semiconductors include the above-mentioned CAAC-OS and nc-OS. In addition, non-single crystal oxide semiconductors include polycrystalline oxide semiconductors, a-like OS (amorphous-like oxide semiconductor), amorphous oxide semiconductors, and the like.
在此,对上述CAAC-OS、nc-OS及a-like OS的详细内容进行说明。Here, the details of the above-mentioned CAAC-OS, nc-OS and a-like OS are explained.
[CAAC-OS][CAAC-OS]
CAAC-OS是包括多个结晶区域且该多个结晶区域的c轴取向于特定的方向的氧化物半导体。此外,特定的方向是指CAAC-OS膜的厚度方向、CAAC-OS膜的被形成面的法线方向、或者CAAC-OS膜的表面的法线方向。此外,结晶区域是具有原子排列的周期性的区域。注意,在将原子排列看作晶格排列时结晶区域也是晶格排列一致的区域。再者,CAAC-OS具有在a-b面方向上多个结晶区域连接的区域,有时该区域具有畸变。此外,畸变是指在多个结晶区域连接的区域中,晶格排列一致的区域和其他晶格排列一致的区域之间的晶格排列的方向变化的部分。换言之,CAAC-OS是指c轴取向并在a-b面方向上没有明显的取向的氧化物半导体。CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor including a plurality of crystallized regions and the c-axes of the plurality of crystallized regions are oriented in a specific direction. In addition, the specific direction refers to the thickness direction of the CAAC-OS film, the normal direction of the surface on which the CAAC-OS film is formed, or the normal direction of the surface of the CAAC-OS film. Furthermore, the crystalline region is a region having periodicity in the arrangement of atoms. Note that when considering the atomic arrangement as a lattice arrangement, the crystalline region is also an area in which the lattice arrangement is consistent. Furthermore, CAAC-OS has a region in which a plurality of crystal regions are connected in the a-b plane direction, and this region may have distortion. In addition, distortion refers to a portion in which the direction of the lattice arrangement changes between a region in which a plurality of crystallographic regions are connected and a region in which the lattice arrangement is consistent with another region in which the lattice arrangement is consistent. In other words, CAAC-OS refers to an oxide semiconductor with a c-axis orientation and no obvious orientation in the a-b plane direction.
此外,上述多个结晶区域的每一个由一个或多个微小结晶(最大径小于10nm的结晶)构成。在结晶区域由一个微小结晶构成的情况下,该结晶区域的最大径小于10nm。此外,结晶区域由多个微小结晶构成的情况下,有时该结晶区域的尺寸为几十nm左右。In addition, each of the plurality of crystal regions is composed of one or more fine crystals (crystals with a maximum diameter less than 10 nm). When the crystalline region is composed of one microcrystal, the maximum diameter of the crystalline region is less than 10 nm. In addition, when the crystal region is composed of a plurality of fine crystals, the size of the crystal region may be on the order of several tens of nanometers.
在In-M-Zn氧化物(元素M为选自铝、镓、钇、锡及钛等中的一种或多种)中,CAAC-OS有包括含有层叠有铟(In)及氧的层(以下,In层)和含有元素M、锌(Zn)及氧的层(以下,(M,Zn)层)的层状结晶结构(也称为层状结构)的趋势。此外,铟和元素M可以彼此置换。因此,有时(M,Zn)层包含铟。此外,有时In层包含元素M。注意,有时In层包含Zn。该层状结构例如在高分辨率TEM(Transmission Electron Microscope:透射电子显微镜)图像中被观察作为晶格像。In In-M-Zn oxide (element M is one or more selected from aluminum, gallium, yttrium, tin, titanium, etc.), CAAC-OS includes a layer containing stacked indium (In) and oxygen. (Hereinafter, In layer) and a layer containing elements M, zinc (Zn), and oxygen (Hereinafter, (M, Zn) layer) tend to have a layered crystal structure (also called a layered structure). Furthermore, indium and element M may be substituted for each other. Therefore, the (M, Zn) layer sometimes contains indium. Furthermore, sometimes the In layer contains element M. Note that sometimes the In layer contains Zn. This layered structure is observed as a lattice image in a high-resolution TEM (Transmission Electron Microscope) image, for example.
例如,当对CAAC-OS膜使用XRD装置进行结构分析时,在使用θ/2θ扫描的Out-of-plane XRD测量中,在2θ=31°或其附近检测出表示c轴取向的峰。注意,表示c轴取向的峰的位置(2θ值)有时根据构成CAAC-OS的金属元素的种类、组成等变动。For example, when structural analysis was performed on the CAAC-OS film using an XRD apparatus, a peak indicating c-axis orientation was detected at or near 2θ = 31° in Out-of-plane XRD measurement using θ/2θ scanning. Note that the position (2θ value) of the peak indicating c-axis orientation may vary depending on the type, composition, etc. of the metal elements constituting CAAC-OS.
例如,在CAAC-OS膜的电子衍射图案中观察到多个亮点(斑点)。此外,在以透过样品的入射电子束的斑点(也称为直接斑点)为对称中心时,某一个斑点和其他斑点被观察在点对称的位置。For example, multiple bright spots (spots) were observed in the electron diffraction pattern of the CAAC-OS film. In addition, when the spot of the incident electron beam transmitted through the sample (also called a direct spot) is the center of symmetry, a certain spot and other spots are observed at point-symmetric positions.
在从上述特定的方向观察结晶区域的情况下,该结晶区域中的晶格排列基本上是六方晶格,但是单位晶格并不局限于正六角形,有是非正六角形的情况。此外,在上述畸变中,有时具有五角形或七角形等晶格排列。此外,在CAAC-OS中,畸变附近不可以观察明确的晶界(grain boundary)。也就是说,晶格排列的畸变抑制晶界的形成。这可以考虑到由于CAAC-OS因为a-b面方向上的氧原子的排列的低密度或因金属元素被取代而使原子间的键合距离产生变化等而能够包容畸变。When a crystal region is viewed from the above-mentioned specific direction, the lattice arrangement in the crystal region is basically a hexagonal lattice. However, the unit lattice is not limited to a regular hexagon and may be a non-regular hexagon. In addition, the above-mentioned distortion may have a lattice arrangement such as a pentagon or a heptagon. In addition, in CAAC-OS, clear grain boundaries cannot be observed near distortion. That is, distortion of the lattice arrangement inhibits the formation of grain boundaries. This is considered because CAAC-OS can accommodate distortion due to the low density of oxygen atoms arranged in the a-b plane direction or the change in the bonding distance between atoms due to substitution of metal elements.
此外,确认到明确的晶界的结晶结构被称为所谓的多晶(polycrystal)。晶界成为再结合中心而载流子被俘获,有可能例如导致晶体管的通态电流的降低或场效应迁移率的降低等。因此,确认不到明确的晶界的CAAC-OS是对晶体管的半导体层提供具有优异的结晶结构的结晶性氧化物之一。注意,CAAC-OS优选具有包含Zn的结构。例如,与In氧化物相比,In-Zn氧化物及In-Ga-Zn氧化物能够进一步地抑制晶界的发生,所以是优选的。In addition, a crystal structure in which clear grain boundaries are confirmed is called a so-called polycrystal (polycrystal). The grain boundary becomes a recombination center and carriers are trapped, which may lead to, for example, a decrease in the on-state current of the transistor or a decrease in field-effect mobility. Therefore, CAAC-OS, in which clear grain boundaries are not confirmed, is one of the crystalline oxides that provides an excellent crystal structure to the semiconductor layer of the transistor. Note that CAAC-OS preferably has a structure containing Zn. For example, In-Zn oxide and In-Ga-Zn oxide are preferred because they can further suppress the occurrence of grain boundaries compared to In oxide.
CAAC-OS是结晶性高且确认不到明确的晶界的氧化物半导体。因此,可以说在CAAC-OS中,不容易发生起因于晶界的电子迁移率的降低。此外,氧化物半导体的结晶性有时因杂质的混入及缺陷的生成等中而降低,因此可以说CAAC-OS是杂质及缺陷(氧空位等)少的氧化物半导体。因此,包含CAAC-OS的氧化物半导体的物理性质稳定。因此,包含CAAC-OS的氧化物半导体具有高耐热性及高可靠性。此外,CAAC-OS对制造工序中的高温度(所谓热积存:thermal budget)也很稳定。由此,通过在OS晶体管中使用CAAC-OS,可以扩大制造工序的自由度。CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor with high crystallinity and no clear grain boundaries can be recognized. Therefore, it can be said that in CAAC-OS, a decrease in electron mobility due to grain boundaries is less likely to occur. In addition, the crystallinity of an oxide semiconductor may be reduced due to the mixing of impurities and the generation of defects. Therefore, it can be said that CAAC-OS is an oxide semiconductor with few impurities and defects (oxygen vacancies, etc.). Therefore, the physical properties of the oxide semiconductor including CAAC-OS are stable. Therefore, the oxide semiconductor including CAAC-OS has high heat resistance and high reliability. In addition, CAAC-OS is also stable against high temperatures (so-called thermal budget) in the manufacturing process. Therefore, by using CAAC-OS in the OS transistor, the degree of freedom of the manufacturing process can be expanded.
[nc-OS][nc-OS]
在nc-OS中,微小的区域(例如1nm以上且10nm以下的区域,特别是1nm以上且3nm以下的区域)中的原子排列具有周期性。换言之,nc-OS具有微小的结晶。此外,例如,该微小的结晶的尺寸为1nm以上且10nm以下,尤其为1nm以上且3nm以下。由此,将该微小的结晶也称为纳米晶。此外,nc-OS在不同的纳米晶之间观察不到结晶取向的规律性。因此,在膜整体中观察不到取向性。所以,有时nc-OS在某些分析方法中与a-like OS及非晶氧化物半导体没有差别。例如,在对nc-OS膜使用XRD装置进行结构分析时,在使用θ/2θ扫描的Out-of-planeXRD测量中,检测不出表示结晶性的峰。此外,在对nc-OS膜进行使用其束径比纳米晶大(例如,50nm以上)的电子束的电子衍射(也称为选区电子衍射)时,观察到类似光晕图案的衍射图案。另一方面,在对nc-OS膜进行使用其束径近于或小于纳米晶的尺寸(例如1nm以上且30nm以下)的电子束的电子衍射(也称为纳米束电子衍射)的情况下,有时得到在以直接斑点为中心的环状区域内观察到多个斑点的电子衍射图案。In nc-OS, the atomic arrangement in a minute region (for example, a region of 1 nm or more and 10 nm or less, especially a region of 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less) has periodicity. In other words, nc-OS has tiny crystals. Furthermore, for example, the size of the minute crystals is 1 nm or more and 10 nm or less, particularly 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less. Therefore, these tiny crystals are also called nanocrystals. In addition, no regularity in crystallographic orientation is observed between different nanocrystals in nc-OS. Therefore, no orientation is observed in the entire film. Therefore, sometimes nc-OS is no different from a-like OS and amorphous oxide semiconductor in some analysis methods. For example, when the nc-OS film was structurally analyzed using an XRD device, no peak indicating crystallinity was detected in Out-of-plane XRD measurement using θ/2θ scanning. Furthermore, when the nc-OS film was subjected to electron diffraction (also called selected area electron diffraction) using an electron beam whose beam diameter is larger than that of the nanocrystal (for example, 50 nm or more), a diffraction pattern similar to a halo pattern was observed. On the other hand, when the nc-OS film is subjected to electron diffraction (also called nanobeam electron diffraction) using an electron beam whose beam diameter is close to or smaller than the size of the nanocrystal (for example, 1 nm or more and 30 nm or less), Sometimes an electron diffraction pattern is obtained in which multiple spots are observed in a ring-shaped area centered on a direct spot.
[a-like OS][a-like OS]
a-like OS是具有介于nc-OS与非晶氧化物半导体之间的结构的氧化物半导体。a-like OS包含空洞或低密度区域。也就是说,a-like OS的结晶性比nc-OS及CAAC-OS的结晶性低。此外,a-like OS的膜中的氢浓度比nc-OS及CAAC-OS的膜中的氢浓度高。a-like OS is an oxide semiconductor with a structure between nc-OS and amorphous oxide semiconductor. A-like OS contains holes or low-density areas. In other words, the crystallinity of a-like OS is lower than that of nc-OS and CAAC-OS. In addition, the hydrogen concentration in the membrane of a-like OS is higher than that in the membranes of nc-OS and CAAC-OS.
[氧化物半导体的构成][Constitution of Oxide Semiconductor]
接着,说明上述的CAC-OS的详细内容。此外,CAC-OS与材料构成有关。Next, the details of the above-mentioned CAC-OS will be described. In addition, CAC-OS is related to material composition.
[CAC-OS][CAC-OS]
CAC-OS例如是指包含在金属氧化物中的元素不均匀地分布的构成,其中包含不均匀地分布的元素的材料的尺寸为0.5nm以上且10nm以下,优选为1nm以上且3nm以下或近似的尺寸。注意,在下面也将在金属氧化物中一个或多个金属元素不均匀地分布且包含该金属元素的区域混合的状态称为马赛克状或补丁(patch)状,该区域的尺寸为0.5nm以上且10nm以下,优选为1nm以上且3nm以下或近似的尺寸。CAC-OS, for example, refers to a structure in which elements contained in a metal oxide are unevenly distributed, and the size of the material containing the unevenly distributed elements is 0.5 nm or more and 10 nm or less, preferably 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less, or approximately size of. Note that in the following, a state in which one or more metal elements are unevenly distributed in a metal oxide and regions containing the metal elements are mixed is also called a mosaic-like or patch-like state, and the size of this region is 0.5 nm or more. And 10 nm or less, preferably 1 nm or more and 3 nm or less or a similar size.
再者,CAC-OS是指其材料分开为第一区域与第二区域而成为马赛克状且该第一区域分布于膜中的构成(下面也称为云状)。就是说,CAC-OS是指具有该第一区域和该第二区域混合的构成的复合金属氧化物。In addition, CAC-OS refers to a structure in which the material is divided into a first region and a second region to form a mosaic shape, and the first region is distributed in the film (hereinafter also referred to as a cloud shape). That is, CAC-OS refers to a composite metal oxide having a composition in which the first region and the second region are mixed.
在此,将相对于构成In-Ga-Zn氧化物的CAC-OS的金属元素的In、Ga及Zn的原子个数比的每一个记为[In]、[Ga]及[Zn]。例如,在In-Ga-Zn氧化物的CAC-OS中,第一区域是其[In]大于CAC-OS膜的组成中的[In]的区域。此外,第二区域是其[Ga]大于CAC-OS膜的组成中的[Ga]的区域。此外,例如,第一区域是其[In]大于第二区域中的[In]且其[Ga]小于第二区域中的[Ga]的区域。此外,第二区域是其[Ga]大于第一区域中的[Ga]且其[In]小于第一区域中的[In]的区域。Here, each of the atomic number ratios of In, Ga, and Zn with respect to the metal elements constituting the CAC-OS of the In-Ga-Zn oxide is expressed as [In], [Ga], and [Zn]. For example, in CAC-OS of In-Ga-Zn oxide, the first region is a region in which [In] is larger than [In] in the composition of the CAC-OS film. Furthermore, the second region is a region whose [Ga] is larger than [Ga] in the composition of the CAC-OS film. Furthermore, for example, the first region is a region whose [In] is larger than [In] in the second region and whose [Ga] is smaller than [Ga] in the second region. Furthermore, the second region is a region whose [Ga] is larger than [Ga] in the first region and whose [In] is smaller than [In] in the first region.
具体而言,上述第一区域是以铟氧化物或铟锌氧化物等为主要成分的区域。此外,上述第二区域是以镓氧化物或镓锌氧化物等为主要成分的区域。换言之,可以将上述第一区域称为以In为主要成分的区域。此外,可以将上述第二区域称为以Ga为主要成分的区域。Specifically, the first region is a region containing indium oxide, indium zinc oxide, or the like as a main component. In addition, the above-mentioned second region is a region containing gallium oxide, gallium zinc oxide, or the like as a main component. In other words, the above-mentioned first region can be called a region containing In as a main component. In addition, the above-mentioned second region can be called a region containing Ga as a main component.
注意,有时不可以观察上述第一区域和上述第二区域的明确的边界。Note that sometimes it is not possible to observe a clear boundary between the first region and the second region.
例如,在In-Ga-Zn氧化物的CAC-OS中,根据通过能量分散型X射线分析法(EDX:Energy Dispersive X-ray spectroscopy)取得的EDX面分析(mapping)图像,可确认到具有以In为主要成分的区域(第一区域)及以Ga为主要成分的区域(第二区域)不均匀地分布且混合的构成。For example, in CAC-OS of In-Ga-Zn oxide, based on the EDX surface analysis (mapping) image obtained by energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDX: Energy Dispersive X-ray spectroscopy), it can be confirmed that the A region in which In is a main component (first region) and a region in which Ga is a main component (second region) are unevenly distributed and mixed.
在将CAC-OS用于晶体管的情况下,通过起因于第一区域的导电性和起因于第二区域的绝缘性的互补作用,可以使CAC-OS具有开关功能(控制开启/关闭的功能)。换言之,在CAC-OS的材料的一部分中具有导电性的功能且在另一部分中具有绝缘性的功能,在材料的整体中具有半导体的功能。通过使导电性的功能和绝缘性的功能分离,可以最大限度地提高各功能。因此,通过将CAC-OS用于晶体管,可以实现大通态电流(Ion)、高场效应迁移率(μ)及良好的开关工作。When CAC-OS is used for a transistor, the CAC-OS can have a switching function (function to control on/off) through the complementary effects of conductivity due to the first region and insulation due to the second region. . In other words, one part of the CAC-OS material has a conductive function and another part has an insulating function, and the entire material has a semiconductor function. By separating the conductive function and the insulating function, each function can be maximized. Therefore, by using CAC-OS for transistors, large on-state current (I on ), high field-effect mobility (μ), and good switching operation can be achieved.
氧化物半导体具有各种结构及各种特性。本发明的一个方式的氧化物半导体也可以包括非晶氧化物半导体、多晶氧化物半导体、a-likeOS、CAC-OS、nc-OS和CAAC-OS中的两种以上。Oxide semiconductors have various structures and various properties. The oxide semiconductor according to one aspect of the present invention may include two or more types of amorphous oxide semiconductors, polycrystalline oxide semiconductors, a-likeOS, CAC-OS, nc-OS, and CAAC-OS.
<具有氧化物半导体的晶体管><Transistor with oxide semiconductor>
接着,说明将上述氧化物半导体用于晶体管的情况。Next, a case in which the above-mentioned oxide semiconductor is used in a transistor will be described.
通过将上述氧化物半导体用于晶体管,可以实现场效应迁移率高的晶体管。此外,可以实现可靠性高的晶体管。By using the above-mentioned oxide semiconductor for a transistor, a transistor with high field effect mobility can be realized. In addition, a highly reliable transistor can be realized.
尤其是,作为形成沟道的半导体层,优选使用包含铟(In)、镓(Ga)及锌(Zn)的氧化物(也记载为“IGZO”)。或者,作为半导体层,也可以使用包含铟(In)、铝(Al)及锌(Zn)的氧化物(也记载为“IAZO”)。或者,作为半导体层,也可以使用包含铟(In)、铝(Al)、镓(Ga)及锌(Zn)的氧化物(也记载为“IAGZO”)。In particular, as the semiconductor layer forming the channel, it is preferable to use an oxide containing indium (In), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn) (also described as "IGZO"). Alternatively, as the semiconductor layer, an oxide (also described as "IAZO") containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), and zinc (Zn) may be used. Alternatively, as the semiconductor layer, an oxide (also described as "IAGZO") containing indium (In), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and zinc (Zn) may be used.
优选将载流子浓度低的氧化物半导体用于晶体管。例如,氧化物半导体的载流子浓度可以为1×1017cm-3以下,优选为1×1015cm-3以下,更优选为1×1013cm-3以下,进一步优选为1×1011cm-3以下,更进一步优选低于1×1010cm-3,且为1×10-9cm-3以上。在以降低氧化物半导体中的载流子浓度为目的的情况下,可以降低氧化物半导体中的杂质浓度以降低缺陷态密度。在本说明书等中,将杂质浓度低且缺陷态密度低的状态称为高纯度本征或实质上高纯度本征。此外,有时将载流子浓度低的氧化物半导体称为高纯度本征或实质上高纯度本征的氧化物半导体。An oxide semiconductor with a low carrier concentration is preferably used for a transistor. For example, the carrier concentration of the oxide semiconductor may be 1×10 17 cm -3 or less, preferably 1×10 15 cm -3 or less, more preferably 1×10 13 cm -3 or less, still more preferably 1×10 11 cm -3 or less, more preferably less than 1×10 10 cm -3 and 1×10 -9 cm -3 or more. When the purpose is to reduce the carrier concentration in the oxide semiconductor, the impurity concentration in the oxide semiconductor can be reduced to reduce the defect state density. In this specification and the like, a state in which the impurity concentration is low and the density of defect states is low is called high-purity intrinsic or substantially high-purity intrinsic. In addition, an oxide semiconductor with a low carrier concentration is sometimes referred to as a high-purity intrinsic or substantially high-purity intrinsic oxide semiconductor.
因为高纯度本征或实质上高纯度本征的氧化物半导体具有较低的缺陷态密度,所以有可能具有较低的陷阱态密度。Because a high-purity intrinsic or substantially high-purity intrinsic oxide semiconductor has a lower density of defect states, it is possible to have a lower density of trap states.
被氧化物半导体的陷阱态俘获的电荷到消失需要较长的时间,有时像固定电荷那样动作。因此,有时在陷阱态密度高的氧化物半导体中形成沟道形成区域的晶体管的电特性不稳定。It takes a long time for the charges trapped in the trap state of the oxide semiconductor to disappear, and sometimes they behave like fixed charges. Therefore, the electrical characteristics of a transistor in which a channel formation region is formed in an oxide semiconductor with a high trap state density may become unstable.
因此,为了使晶体管的电特性稳定,降低氧化物半导体的杂质浓度是有效的。为了降低氧化物半导体的杂质浓度,优选还降低附近膜的杂质浓度。作为杂质例如有氢、氮、碱金属、碱土金属、铁、镍或硅等。Therefore, in order to stabilize the electrical characteristics of the transistor, it is effective to reduce the impurity concentration of the oxide semiconductor. In order to reduce the impurity concentration of the oxide semiconductor, it is preferable to also reduce the impurity concentration of the nearby film. Examples of impurities include hydrogen, nitrogen, alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, iron, nickel, silicon, and the like.
<杂质><Impurities>
在此,说明氧化物半导体中的各杂质的影响。Here, the influence of each impurity in the oxide semiconductor will be described.
在氧化物半导体包含第14族元素之一的硅或碳时,在氧化物半导体中形成缺陷态。因此,将氧化物半导体中的硅或碳的浓度及与氧化物半导体的界面附近的贵或碳的浓度(通过SIMS(Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry:二次离子质谱分析法)测得的浓度)设定为2×1018atoms/cm3以下,优选为2×1017atoms/cm3以下。When the oxide semiconductor contains silicon or carbon, which is one of the Group 14 elements, a defect state is formed in the oxide semiconductor. Therefore, the concentration of silicon or carbon in the oxide semiconductor and the concentration of silicon or carbon near the interface with the oxide semiconductor (the concentration measured by SIMS (Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry)) are set It is 2×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 2×10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
当氧化物半导体包含碱金属或碱土金属时,有时形成缺陷态而形成载流子。因此,使用包含碱金属或碱土金属的氧化物半导体的晶体管容易具有常开启特性。因此,使通过SIMS测得的氧化物半导体中的碱金属或碱土金属的浓度为1×1018atoms/cm3以下,优选为2×1016atoms/cm3以下。When the oxide semiconductor contains an alkali metal or an alkaline earth metal, a defect state may be formed to form a carrier. Therefore, transistors using oxide semiconductors containing alkali metals or alkaline earth metals tend to have normally-on characteristics. Therefore, the concentration of the alkali metal or alkaline earth metal in the oxide semiconductor measured by SIMS is 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, preferably 2×10 16 atoms/cm 3 or less.
当氧化物半导体包含氮时,由于产生作为载流子的电子,使载流子浓度增高,而容易n型化。其结果是,在使用包含氮的氧化物半导体的晶体管容易具有常开启特性。或者,在氧化物半导体包含氮时,有时形成陷阱态。其结果,有时晶体管的电特性不稳定。因此,将利用SIMS测得的氧化物半导体中的氮浓度设定为低于5×1019atoms/cm3,优选为5×1018atoms/cm3以下,更优选为1×1018atoms/cm3以下,进一步优选为5×1017atoms/cm3以下。When the oxide semiconductor contains nitrogen, electrons as carriers are generated, thereby increasing the carrier concentration and easily becoming n-type. As a result, transistors using oxide semiconductors containing nitrogen tend to have normally-on characteristics. Alternatively, when the oxide semiconductor contains nitrogen, a trap state may be formed. As a result, the electrical characteristics of the transistor may become unstable. Therefore, the nitrogen concentration in the oxide semiconductor measured by SIMS is set to less than 5×10 19 atoms/cm 3 , preferably 5×10 18 atoms/cm 3 or less, and more preferably 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 cm 3 or less, more preferably 5×10 17 atoms/cm 3 or less.
包含在氧化物半导体中的氢与键合于金属原子的氧起反应生成水,因此有时形成氧空位。当氢进入该氧空位时,有时产生作为载流子的电子。此外,有时由于氢的一部分与键合于金属原子的氧键合,产生作为载流子的电子。因此,使用包含氢的氧化物半导体的晶体管容易具有常开启特性。由此,优选尽可能地减少氧化物半导体中的氢。具体而言,在氧化物半导体中,将利用SIMS测得的氢浓度设定为低于1×1020atoms/cm3,优选低于1×1019atoms/cm3,更优选低于5×1018atoms/cm3,进一步优选低于1×1018atoms/cm3。Hydrogen contained in the oxide semiconductor reacts with oxygen bonded to the metal atom to generate water, so an oxygen vacancy may be formed. When hydrogen enters this oxygen vacancy, electrons as carriers are sometimes generated. In addition, electrons as carriers may be generated because part of the hydrogen is bonded to oxygen bonded to the metal atom. Therefore, transistors using oxide semiconductors containing hydrogen tend to have normally-on characteristics. Therefore, it is preferable to reduce hydrogen in the oxide semiconductor as much as possible. Specifically, in the oxide semiconductor, the hydrogen concentration measured by SIMS is set to less than 1×10 20 atoms/cm 3 , preferably less than 1×10 19 atoms/cm 3 , and more preferably less than 5× 10 18 atoms/cm 3 , more preferably less than 1×10 18 atoms/cm 3 .
通过将杂质被充分降低的氧化物半导体用于晶体管的沟道形成区域,可以具有稳定的电特性。By using an oxide semiconductor in which impurities are sufficiently reduced for the channel formation region of a transistor, it is possible to have stable electrical characteristics.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
(实施方式13)(Embodiment 13)
在本实施方式中,对可以适用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置的电子设备进行说明。In this embodiment, an electronic device to which a semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied will be described.
可以将本发明的一个方式的半导体装置用于电子设备的显示部。由此,可以实现显示品质高的电子设备。或者,可以实现极高精密度的电子设备。或者,可以实现可靠性高的电子设备。The semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention can be used in a display unit of an electronic device. This makes it possible to realize an electronic device with high display quality. Alternatively, extremely high precision electronics can be achieved. Alternatively, highly reliable electronic devices can be realized.
作为使用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置等的电子设备,可以举出电视机、显示器等显示装置、照明装置、台式或笔记本型个人计算机、文字处理机、再现储存在DVD(Digital Versatile Disc:数字通用光盘)等记录介质中的静态图像或动态图像的图像再现装置、便携式CD播放器、收音机、磁带录音机、头戴式耳机立体音响、立体音响、台钟、挂钟、无绳电话子机、无线电收发机、车载电话、移动电话、便携式信息终端、平板终端、便携式游戏机、弹珠机等固定型游戏机、计算器、电子笔记本、电子书阅读器终端、电子翻译器、声音输入器、摄像机、数字静态照相机、电动刮刀、微波炉等高频加热装置、电饭煲、电动洗衣机、电动吸尘器、热水器、电扇、电吹风、空调设备诸如空调器、加湿器、除湿器等、餐具洗涤机、餐具干燥机、干衣机、烘被机、电冰箱、电冷冻箱、电冷冻冷藏箱、DNA保存用冰冻器、手电筒、链锯等工具、烟探测器或透析装置等医疗设备等。再者,还可以举出工业设备等诸如引导灯、信号机、传送带、电梯、自动扶梯、工业机器人、蓄电系统或用于电力均匀化、智能电网的蓄电装置等。另外,通过使用燃料的发动机或利用来自蓄电体的电力的电动机推进的移动体等也有时包括在电子设备的范畴内。作为上述移动体,例如可以举出电动汽车(EV)、兼具内燃机和电动机的混合动力汽车(HV)、插电式混合动力汽车(PHV)、使用履带代替这些的车轮的履带式车辆、包括电动辅助自行车的带有发动机的自行车、摩托车、电动轮椅、高尔夫球车、小型或大型船舶、潜水艇、直升机、飞机、火箭、人造卫星、太空探测器、行星探测器或宇宙飞船等。Examples of electronic equipment such as semiconductor devices using one embodiment of the present invention include display devices such as televisions and monitors, lighting devices, desktop or notebook personal computers, word processors, and DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs) that reproduce and store data on DVDs. Image reproducing devices for still images or moving images from recording media such as general-purpose optical discs, portable CD players, radios, tape recorders, headphone stereos, stereos, desk clocks, wall clocks, cordless telephones, radio transceivers Machines, car phones, mobile phones, portable information terminals, tablet terminals, portable game consoles, pinball machines and other fixed game consoles, calculators, electronic notebooks, e-book reader terminals, electronic translators, voice input devices, cameras, Digital still cameras, electric scrapers, high-frequency heating devices such as microwave ovens, rice cookers, electric washing machines, electric vacuum cleaners, water heaters, electric fans, hair dryers, air conditioning equipment such as air conditioners, humidifiers, dehumidifiers, etc., dishwashers, dish dryers, Clothes dryers, quilt dryers, refrigerators, electric freezers, electric freezers, DNA preservation freezers, flashlights, chain saws and other tools, smoke detectors or dialysis devices and other medical equipment, etc. Furthermore, industrial equipment such as guide lights, signals, conveyor belts, elevators, escalators, industrial robots, power storage systems, power storage devices for power equalization and smart grids, etc. can also be cited. In addition, mobile objects propelled by an engine using fuel or an electric motor using electric power from a storage device may also be included in the category of electronic equipment. Examples of the mobile body include electric vehicles (EV), hybrid vehicles (HV) having both an internal combustion engine and an electric motor, plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHV), and crawler vehicles using crawlers instead of wheels. Electrically assisted bicycles, bicycles with engines, motorcycles, electric wheelchairs, golf carts, small or large ships, submarines, helicopters, airplanes, rockets, satellites, space probes, planetary probes or spacecraft, etc.
本发明的一个方式的电子设备也可以包括二次电池(电池),优选通过非接触电力传送能够对该二次电池充电。An electronic device according to one aspect of the present invention may include a secondary battery (battery), and preferably the secondary battery can be charged by non-contact power transmission.
作为二次电池,例如,可以举出锂离子二次电池、镍氢电池、镍镉电池、有机自由基电池、铅蓄电池、空气二次电池、镍锌电池或银锌电池等。Examples of secondary batteries include lithium ion secondary batteries, nickel hydrogen batteries, nickel cadmium batteries, organic radical batteries, lead acid batteries, air secondary batteries, nickel zinc batteries, and silver zinc batteries.
本发明的一个方式的电子设备也可以包括天线。通过由天线接收信号,可以在显示部上显示图像及信息等。另外,在电子设备包括天线及二次电池时,可以将天线用于非接触电力传送。An electronic device according to one aspect of the present invention may include an antenna. By receiving signals via the antenna, images, information, etc. can be displayed on the display unit. In addition, when the electronic device includes an antenna and a secondary battery, the antenna can be used for non-contact power transmission.
本发明的一个方式的电子设备也可以包括传感器(该传感器具有测量如下因素的功能:力、位移、位置、速度、加速度、角速度、转速、距离、光、液、磁、温度、化学物质、声音、时间、硬度、电场、电流、电压、电力、辐射线、流量、湿度、倾斜度、振动、气味或红外线等)。An electronic device according to one aspect of the present invention may also include a sensor (the sensor has the function of measuring the following factors: force, displacement, position, speed, acceleration, angular velocity, rotational speed, distance, light, liquid, magnetism, temperature, chemical substances, sound , time, hardness, electric field, current, voltage, electricity, radiation, flow, humidity, inclination, vibration, smell or infrared, etc.).
本发明的一个方式的电子设备可以具有各种功能。例如,可以具有如下功能:将各种信息(静态图像、动态图像或文字图像等)显示在显示部上的功能;触摸面板的功能;显示日历、日期或时间等的功能;执行各种软件(程序)的功能;进行无线通信的功能;或者读出储存在存储介质中的程序或数据的功能;等。An electronic device according to one aspect of the present invention may have various functions. For example, it may have the following functions: a function of displaying various information (still images, dynamic images, text images, etc.) on the display unit; a touch panel function; a function of displaying calendar, date, time, etc.; and executing various software ( program) function; the function of wireless communication; or the function of reading programs or data stored in storage media; etc.
此外,包括多个显示部的电子设备可以具有在显示部的一部分主要显示图像信息而在显示部的其他部分主要显示文本信息的功能,或者具有通过将考虑了视差的图像显示于多个显示部上来显示三维图像的功能等。并且,具有图像接收部的电子设备可以具有如下功能:拍摄静态图像;拍摄动态图像;对所拍摄的图像进行自动或手工校正;将所拍摄的图像存储在记录介质(外部或内置于电子设备中)中;或者将所拍摄的图像显示在显示部上;等。另外,本发明的一个方式的电子设备所具有的功能不局限于此,可以具有各种功能。Furthermore, an electronic device including a plurality of display units may have a function of mainly displaying image information on a part of the display unit and mainly displaying text information on other parts of the display unit, or may have a function of displaying an image taking parallax into consideration on the plurality of display units. Come up with the function of displaying three-dimensional images, etc. Furthermore, the electronic device having the image receiving unit may have the following functions: capture still images; capture dynamic images; automatically or manually correct the captured images; store the captured images in a recording medium (external or built-in in the electronic device) ); or display the captured image on the display; etc. In addition, the functions of the electronic device according to one aspect of the present invention are not limited to this, and may have various functions.
本发明的一个方式的半导体装置可以显示高清晰的图像。由此,尤其可以适当地用于携带式电子设备(穿戴式电子设备)及电子书阅读器等。例如,可以适当地用于VR设备或AR设备等xR设备。A semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention can display high-definition images. This makes it particularly suitable for use in portable electronic devices (wearable electronic devices), e-book readers, and the like. For example, it can be suitably used for xR devices such as VR devices and AR devices.
图81A是安装有取景器8100的照相机8000的外观图。FIG. 81A is an external view of the camera 8000 with the viewfinder 8100 attached.
照相机8000包括框体8001、显示部8002、操作按钮8003及快门按钮8004等。另外,照相机8000安装有可装卸的镜头8006。在照相机8000中,镜头8006和框体也可以被形成为一体。The camera 8000 includes a housing 8001, a display unit 8002, operation buttons 8003, a shutter button 8004, and the like. In addition, the camera 8000 is equipped with a detachable lens 8006. In the camera 8000, the lens 8006 and the frame may be integrated.
照相机8000通过按下快门按钮8004或者触摸用作触摸面板的显示部8002,可以进行摄像。The camera 8000 can capture images by pressing the shutter button 8004 or touching the display portion 8002 serving as a touch panel.
框体8001包括具有电极的嵌入器,除了可以与取景器8100连接以外,还可以与闪光灯装置等连接。The frame 8001 includes an inserter having electrodes, and can be connected to a flash device, etc. in addition to the viewfinder 8100 .
取景器8100包括框体8101、显示部8102以及按钮8103等。Viewfinder 8100 includes a frame 8101, a display unit 8102, buttons 8103, and the like.
框体8101通过嵌合到照相机8000的嵌入器装到照相机8000。取景器8100可以将从照相机8000接收的影像等显示到显示部8102上。The frame 8101 is attached to the camera 8000 via an inserter fitted to the camera 8000 . The viewfinder 8100 can display images and the like received from the camera 8000 on the display unit 8102 .
按钮8103被用作电源按钮等。Button 8103 is used as a power button or the like.
本发明的一个方式的半导体装置可以用于照相机8000的显示部8002及取景器8100的显示部8102。此外,也可以在照相机8000中内置有取景器8100。The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display unit 8002 of the camera 8000 and the display unit 8102 of the viewfinder 8100 . In addition, the camera 8000 may have a built-in viewfinder 8100 .
图81B是头戴显示器8200的外观图。FIG. 81B is an external view of the head-mounted display 8200.
头戴显示器8200包括安装部8201、透镜8202、主体8203、显示部8204以及电缆8205等。此外,在安装部8201中内置有电池8206。The head mounted display 8200 includes a mounting part 8201, a lens 8202, a main body 8203, a display part 8204, a cable 8205, and the like. In addition, a battery 8206 is built into the mounting part 8201.
电缆8205具有将电力从电池8206供应到主体8203的功能。主体8203包括无线接收器等,能够将所接收的影像信息等显示到显示部8204上。此外,主体8203具有照相机,由此可以作为输入方法利用使用者的眼球或眼睑的动作的信息。The cable 8205 has a function of supplying power from the battery 8206 to the main body 8203. The main body 8203 includes a wireless receiver and the like, and can display received image information and the like on the display unit 8204. Furthermore, since the main body 8203 has a camera, information on the movement of the user's eyeballs or eyelids can be used as an input method.
此外,也可以对安装部8201的被使用者接触的位置设置多个电极,以检测出根据使用者的眼球的动作而流过电极的电流,由此实现识别使用者的视线的功能。此外,还可以具有根据流过该电极的电流监视使用者的脉搏的功能。安装部8201可以具有温度传感器、压力传感器或加速度传感器等各种传感器,也可以具有将使用者的生物信息显示在显示部8204上的功能或与使用者的头部的动作同步地使显示在显示部8204上的影像变化的功能等。In addition, a plurality of electrodes may be provided at the position of the mounting part 8201 that is contacted by the user to detect the current flowing through the electrodes according to the movement of the user's eyeballs, thereby realizing the function of identifying the user's line of sight. In addition, it may also have a function of monitoring the user's pulse based on the current flowing through the electrode. The mounting part 8201 may have various sensors such as a temperature sensor, a pressure sensor, or an acceleration sensor, and may have a function of displaying the user's biological information on the display part 8204 or displaying it on the display in synchronization with the movement of the user's head. The function of image change on the part 8204, etc.
可以将本发明的一个方式的半导体装置用于显示部8204。The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display unit 8204.
图81C至图81E是头戴显示器8300的外观图。头戴显示器8300包括框体8301、显示部8302、带状固定工具8304以及一对透镜8305。81C to 81E are appearance views of the head-mounted display 8300. The head mounted display 8300 includes a frame 8301, a display unit 8302, a belt-shaped fixing tool 8304, and a pair of lenses 8305.
使用者可以通过透镜8305看到显示部8302上的显示。优选弯曲配置显示部8302,这是因为使用者可以感受高真实感。此外,通过透镜8305分别看到显示在显示部8302的不同区域上的图像,从而可以进行利用视差的三维显示等。此外,本发明的一个方式不局限于设置有一个显示部8302的结构,也可以设置两个显示部8302以对使用者的一对眼睛分别配置一个显示部。The user can see the display on the display part 8302 through the lens 8305. It is preferable to arrange the display portion 8302 in a curved manner because the user can experience a high sense of reality. In addition, images displayed on different areas of the display unit 8302 can be viewed through the lens 8305, so that three-dimensional display using parallax, etc. can be performed. In addition, one aspect of the present invention is not limited to a structure in which one display unit 8302 is provided. Two display units 8302 may be provided so that one display unit is arranged for each pair of eyes of the user.
可以将本发明的一个方式的半导体装置用于显示部8302。本发明的一个方式的半导体装置还可以实现极高的清晰度。例如,如图81E所示,即使使用透镜8305对显示进行放大观看,像素也不容易被使用者看到。就是说,可以利用显示部8302使使用者看到现实感更高的影像。The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display unit 8302. The semiconductor device according to one aspect of the present invention can also achieve extremely high definition. For example, as shown in Figure 81E, even if the display is magnified using lens 8305, the pixels are not easily visible to the user. In other words, the display unit 8302 can be used to allow the user to view images with a higher sense of reality.
图81F是护目镜型头戴显示器8400的外观图。头戴显示器8400包括一对框体8401、安装部8402及缓冲构件8403。一对框体8401内各自设置有显示部8404及透镜8405。通过使一对显示部8404显示互不相同的图像,可以进行利用视差的三维显示。FIG. 81F is an appearance view of the goggle-type head-mounted display 8400. The head mounted display 8400 includes a pair of frames 8401, a mounting part 8402, and a buffer member 8403. A display unit 8404 and a lens 8405 are respectively provided in the pair of frames 8401. By causing the pair of display units 8404 to display mutually different images, three-dimensional display using parallax can be performed.
使用者可以通过透镜8405看到显示部8404。透镜8405具有焦点调整机构,该焦点调整机构可以根据使用者的视力调整透镜8405的位置。显示部8404优选为正方形或横向长的矩形。由此,可以提高真实感。The user can see the display part 8404 through the lens 8405. The lens 8405 has a focus adjustment mechanism, which can adjust the position of the lens 8405 according to the user's vision. The display portion 8404 is preferably square or laterally elongated rectangular. Thus, the sense of realism can be improved.
安装部8402优选具有塑性及弹性以可以根据使用者的脸尺寸调整并没有掉下来。另外,安装部8402的一部分优选具有被用作骨传导耳机的振动机构。由此,只要安装就可以享受影像及声音,而不需耳机或扬声器等音响设备。此外,也可以具有通过无线通信将声音数据输出到框体8401内的功能。The mounting part 8402 preferably has plasticity and elasticity so that it can be adjusted according to the user's face size without falling off. In addition, it is preferable that a part of the mounting portion 8402 has a vibration mechanism used as a bone conduction earphone. As a result, you can enjoy images and sounds just by installing them, without the need for audio equipment such as headphones or speakers. In addition, it may also have a function of outputting sound data into the housing 8401 through wireless communication.
安装部8402及缓冲构件8403是与使用者的脸(额头或脸颊等)接触的部分。通过使缓冲构件8403与使用者的脸密接,可以防止漏光,从而可以进一步提高沉浸感。缓冲构件8403优选使用柔软的材料以在使用者装上头戴显示器8400时与使用者的脸密接。例如,可以使用橡胶、硅酮橡胶、聚氨酯或海绵等材料。另外,当作为缓冲构件8403使用用布或皮革(天然皮革或合成皮革)等覆盖海绵等的表面的构件时,在使用者的脸和缓冲构件8403之间不容易产生空隙,从而可以适当地防止漏光。另外,在使用这种材料时,不仅让使用者感觉亲肤,而且当在较冷的季节等装上的情况下不让使用者感到寒意,所以是优选的。在缓冲构件8403或安装部8402等接触于使用者的皮肤的构件采用可拆卸的结构时,容易进行清洗及交换,所以是优选的。The mounting part 8402 and the buffer member 8403 are parts that come into contact with the user's face (forehead, cheeks, etc.). By bringing the buffer member 8403 into close contact with the user's face, light leakage can be prevented, thereby further improving the immersion feeling. The cushioning member 8403 is preferably made of soft material so that it can be in close contact with the user's face when the user puts on the head-mounted display 8400 . For example, materials such as rubber, silicone rubber, polyurethane or sponge can be used. In addition, when a member covering the surface of a sponge or the like with cloth or leather (natural leather or synthetic leather) or the like is used as the cushioning member 8403, a gap is less likely to occur between the user's face and the cushioning member 8403, thereby appropriately preventing Light leakage. In addition, when using this material, it not only makes the user feel skin-friendly, but also prevents the user from feeling cold when installed in cold seasons, etc., so it is preferable. It is preferable that the members that come into contact with the user's skin, such as the buffer member 8403 or the mounting portion 8402, have a detachable structure because they can be easily cleaned and replaced.
图82A示出电视装置的一个例子。在电视装置7100中,框体7101中组装有显示部7000。在此示出利用支架7103支撑框体7101的结构。FIG. 82A shows an example of a television device. In the television device 7100, a display unit 7000 is incorporated in a housing 7101. Here, a structure in which the frame 7101 is supported by the bracket 7103 is shown.
可以对显示部7000应用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置。The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display unit 7000 .
可以通过利用框体7101所包括的操作开关或另外提供的遥控操作机7111进行图82A所示的电视装置7100的操作。或者,也可以在显示部7000中包括触摸传感器,通过用指头等触摸显示部7000来进行电视装置7100的操作。此外,也可以在遥控操作机7111中包括显示从该遥控操作机7111输出的信息的显示部。通过利用遥控操作机7111所包括的操作键或触摸面板,可以进行频道或音量的操作。另外,可以对显示在显示部7000上的影像进行操作。The operation of the television device 7100 shown in FIG. 82A can be performed by using an operation switch included in the housing 7101 or a separately provided remote control operating device 7111. Alternatively, the display unit 7000 may include a touch sensor, and the television device 7100 may be operated by touching the display unit 7000 with a finger or the like. Furthermore, the remote control unit 7111 may include a display unit that displays information output from the remote control unit 7111 . By using the operation keys or the touch panel included in the remote control unit 7111, the channel or volume can be operated. In addition, the image displayed on the display unit 7000 can be operated.
此外,电视装置7100包括接收机及调制解调器等。可以通过利用接收机接收一般的电视广播。再者,通过调制解调器连接到有线或无线方式的通信网络,从而进行单向(从发送者到接收者)或双向(发送者和接收者之间或接收者之间等)的信息通信。In addition, the television device 7100 includes a receiver, a modem, and the like. General television broadcasts can be received by using a receiver. Furthermore, by connecting to a wired or wireless communication network through a modem, one-way (from the sender to the receiver) or two-way (between the sender and the receiver, or between receivers, etc.) information communication is performed.
图82B示出笔记本型个人计算机的一个例子。笔记本型个人计算机7200包括框体7211、键盘7212、指向装置7213及外部连接端口7214等。在框体7211中组装有显示部7000。FIG. 82B shows an example of a notebook personal computer. The notebook personal computer 7200 includes a frame 7211, a keyboard 7212, a pointing device 7213, an external connection port 7214, and the like. The display unit 7000 is assembled in the housing 7211.
可以对显示部7000应用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置。The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display unit 7000 .
图82C和图82D示出数字标牌的一个例子。Figures 82C and 82D illustrate an example of digital signage.
图82C所示的数字标牌7300包括框体7301、显示部7000及扬声器7303等。此外,还可以包括LED灯、操作键(包括电源开关或操作开关)、连接端子、各种传感器或麦克风等。Digital signage 7300 shown in FIG. 82C includes a frame 7301, a display unit 7000, a speaker 7303, and the like. In addition, it can also include LED lights, operation keys (including power switches or operation switches), connection terminals, various sensors or microphones, etc.
图82D是示出设置于圆柱状柱子7401上的数字标牌7400。数字标牌7400包括沿着柱子7401的曲面设置的显示部7000。Figure 82D shows a digital signage 7400 installed on a cylindrical pillar 7401. Digital signage 7400 includes a display portion 7000 disposed along the curved surface of pillar 7401.
在图82C和图82D中,可以对显示部7000应用本发明的一个方式的半导体装置。In FIGS. 82C and 82D , the semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be applied to the display unit 7000 .
显示部7000越大,一次能够提供的信息量越多。显示部7000越大,越容易吸引人的注意,例如可以提高广告宣传效果。The larger the display unit 7000 is, the greater the amount of information that can be provided at one time. The larger the display unit 7000 is, the easier it is to attract attention, which can improve the effect of advertising, for example.
通过将触摸面板用于显示部7000,不仅可以在显示部7000上显示静态图像或动态图像,使用者还能够直觉性地进行操作,所以是优选的。此外,在用于提供线路信息或交通信息等信息的用途时,可以通过直觉性的操作提高易用性。By using a touch panel for the display unit 7000, not only a still image or a moving image can be displayed on the display unit 7000, but also the user can perform operations intuitively, which is preferable. In addition, when used to provide information such as route information or traffic information, the usability can be improved through intuitive operations.
如图82C和图82D所示,数字标牌7300或数字标牌7400优选可以通过无线通信与使用者所携带的智能手机等信息终端设备7311或信息终端设备7411联动。例如,显示在显示部7000上的广告信息可以显示在信息终端设备7311或信息终端设备7411的屏幕上。此外,通过操作信息终端设备7311或信息终端设备7411,可以切换显示部7000的显示。As shown in FIGS. 82C and 82D , the digital signage 7300 or the digital signage 7400 can preferably be linked to the information terminal device 7311 or the information terminal device 7411 such as a smartphone carried by the user through wireless communication. For example, the advertisement information displayed on the display part 7000 may be displayed on the screen of the information terminal device 7311 or the information terminal device 7411. In addition, by operating the information terminal device 7311 or the information terminal device 7411, the display of the display unit 7000 can be switched.
此外,可以在数字标牌7300或数字标牌7400上以信息终端设备7311或信息终端设备7411的屏幕为操作单元(控制器)执行游戏。由此,不特定多个使用者可以同时参加游戏,享受游戏的乐趣。In addition, the game can be executed on the digital signage 7300 or the digital signage 7400 using the screen of the information terminal device 7311 or the information terminal device 7411 as an operating unit (controller). As a result, multiple unspecified users can participate in the game at the same time and enjoy the fun of the game.
图82E所示的信息终端7550包括框体7551、显示部7552、麦克风7557、扬声器部7554、摄像头7553及操作开关7555等。可以将本发明的一个方式的半导体装置用于显示部7552。显示部7552可以被用作触摸面板。另外,信息终端7550在框体7551的内侧可以具有天线及电池等。信息终端7550例如可以被用作智能手机、移动电话、平板信息终端、平板电脑或电子书阅读器终端等。The information terminal 7550 shown in FIG. 82E includes a housing 7551, a display unit 7552, a microphone 7557, a speaker unit 7554, a camera 7553, an operation switch 7555, and the like. The semiconductor device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used in the display unit 7552 . The display part 7552 can be used as a touch panel. In addition, the information terminal 7550 may have an antenna, a battery, etc. inside the housing 7551. The information terminal 7550 may be used, for example, as a smartphone, a mobile phone, a tablet information terminal, a tablet computer, or an e-book reader terminal.
图82F示出手表型信息终端的一个例子。信息终端7660包括框体7661、显示部7662、表带7663、带扣7664、操作开关7665及输入输出端子7666等。另外,信息终端7660在框体7661的内侧具有天线及电池等。信息终端7660可以执行移动电话、电子邮件、文章的阅读及编写、音乐播放、网络通信或电脑游戏等各种应用程序。FIG. 82F shows an example of a watch-type information terminal. The information terminal 7660 includes a housing 7661, a display unit 7662, a watch strap 7663, a buckle 7664, an operation switch 7665, an input/output terminal 7666, and the like. In addition, the information terminal 7660 has an antenna, a battery, etc. inside the housing 7661. The information terminal 7660 can execute various applications such as mobile phone calls, emails, article reading and writing, music playback, network communication, or computer games.
此外,显示部7662包括触摸传感器,可以用指头或触屏笔等触摸屏幕来进行操作。例如,通过触摸显示于显示部7662的图标7667,可以启动应用程序。操作开关7665除了时刻设定之外,还可以具有电源开关、无线通信的开关、静音模式的设置或取消或者省电模式的设置或取消等各种功能。例如,通过利用组装在信息终端7660中的操作系统,也可以设定操作开关7665的功能。In addition, the display unit 7662 includes a touch sensor and can be operated by touching the screen with a finger, a stylus pen, or the like. For example, the application can be started by touching the icon 7667 displayed on the display unit 7662. In addition to time setting, the operation switch 7665 may also have various functions such as a power switch, a wireless communication switch, setting or canceling the silent mode, or setting or canceling the power saving mode. For example, by using the operating system incorporated in the information terminal 7660, the function of the operation switch 7665 can also be set.
另外,便携式信息终端7660可以执行被通信标准化的近距离无线通信。例如,通过与可无线通信的耳麦通信,可以进行免提通话。此外,信息终端7660可以具有输入输出端子7666且通过输入输出端子7666与其他信息终端发送和接收数据。另外,也可以通过输入输出端子7666进行充电。另外,充电工作也可以利用无线供电进行,而不通过输出输入端子7666。In addition, the portable information terminal 7660 can perform short-range wireless communication standardized by communication. For example, hands-free calls can be made by communicating with a headset that can communicate wirelessly. In addition, the information terminal 7660 may have an input/output terminal 7666 and transmit and receive data with other information terminals through the input/output terminal 7666. In addition, charging can also be performed through the input and output terminal 7666. In addition, charging can also be performed using wireless power supply instead of through the output and input terminals 7666.
图83A示出汽车9700的外观。图83B示出汽车9700的驾驶座。汽车9700包括车体9701、车轮9702、仪表盘9703及灯9704等。本发明的一个方式的显示装置可以用于汽车9700的显示部等。例如,可以将本发明的一个方式的显示装置用于图83B所示的显示部9710至显示部9715各自中。FIG. 83A shows the appearance of car 9700. Figure 83B shows the driver's seat of automobile 9700. The car 9700 includes a body 9701, wheels 9702, an instrument panel 9703, lights 9704, etc. A display device according to one aspect of the present invention can be used in a display unit of a car 9700 or the like. For example, the display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be used in each of the display portions 9710 to 9715 shown in FIG. 83B .
显示部9710和显示部9711是设置在汽车的挡风玻璃上的显示装置。通过使用具有透光性的导电材料来制造显示装置中的电极,可以使本发明的一个方式的显示装置成为能看到对面的所谓的透视式显示装置。透视式显示装置即使在驾驶汽车9700时也不会成为视野的障碍。因此,可以将本发明的一个方式的显示装置设置在汽车9700的挡风玻璃上。另外,当在显示装置中设置用来驱动该显示装置的晶体管等时,优选采用使用有机半导体材料的有机晶体管或使用氧化物半导体的晶体管等具有透光性的晶体管。The display unit 9710 and the display unit 9711 are display devices provided on the windshield of the automobile. By using a light-transmissive conductive material to manufacture the electrodes in the display device, the display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be a so-called see-through display device in which the opposite side can be viewed. The see-through display device does not obstruct the view even when driving the 9700. Therefore, the display device according to one embodiment of the present invention can be installed on the windshield of automobile 9700. When a display device is provided with a transistor for driving the display device, it is preferable to use a light-transmitting transistor such as an organic transistor using an organic semiconductor material or a transistor using an oxide semiconductor.
显示部9712是设置在立柱部分的显示装置。例如,通过将设置于车体的摄像单元所拍摄的影像显示在显示部9712,可以弥补被立柱遮挡的视野。显示部9713是设置在仪表盘部分的显示装置。例如,通过将设置于车体的摄像单元所拍摄的影像显示在显示部9713,可以弥补被仪表盘遮挡的视野。即,通过将设置于汽车的外侧的摄像单元所拍摄的影像显示,可以弥补死角,从而提高安全性。此外,通过显示弥补看不到的部分的影像,可以更自然、更舒适地确认安全。The display unit 9712 is a display device provided on the column. For example, by displaying an image captured by a camera unit installed on the vehicle body on the display unit 9712, the field of view blocked by the pillar can be compensated. The display unit 9713 is a display device provided on the instrument panel. For example, by displaying an image captured by a camera unit installed on the vehicle body on the display unit 9713, the field of view blocked by the instrument panel can be compensated. That is, by displaying the image captured by the camera unit installed on the outside of the car, blind spots can be compensated and safety can be improved. In addition, by displaying images that make up for invisible parts, safety can be confirmed more naturally and comfortably.
另外,图84示出作为驾驶座和副驾驶座采用了长条座椅的汽车室内。显示部9721是设置在车门部分的显示装置。例如,通过将设置于车体的摄像单元所拍摄的影像显示在显示部9721,可以弥补被车门遮挡的视野。另外,显示部9722是设置在方向盘的显示装置。显示部9723是设置在长条座椅的座位中央部的显示装置。In addition, FIG. 84 shows a car interior using bench seats as the driver's seat and the passenger's seat. The display unit 9721 is a display device provided in the vehicle door. For example, by displaying an image captured by a camera unit installed on the vehicle body on the display unit 9721, the field of view blocked by the vehicle door can be compensated. In addition, the display unit 9722 is a display device provided on the steering wheel. The display unit 9723 is a display device provided in the center of the seat of the bench seat.
显示部9714、显示部9715或显示部9722通过显示导航信息、行车速度、发动机的转速数、行车距离、燃量的剩余量、排档的状态或空调的设定等,可以提供各种信息。另外,使用者可以适当地改变显示部所显示的显示内容及布置。另外,显示部9710至显示部9713、显示部9721和显示部9723也可以显示上述信息。显示部9710至显示部9715以及显示部9721至显示部9723还可以被用作照明装置。The display unit 9714, the display unit 9715, or the display unit 9722 can provide various information by displaying navigation information, driving speed, engine speed, driving distance, remaining fuel capacity, gear status, air conditioning settings, and the like. In addition, the user can appropriately change the display content and arrangement displayed on the display unit. In addition, the display portions 9710 to 9713, the display portion 9721, and the display portion 9723 may display the above information. The display portions 9710 to 9715 and the display portions 9721 to 9723 may also be used as lighting devices.
本实施方式所示的结构可以与其他实施方式及实施例所示的结构适当地组合而使用。The structure shown in this embodiment mode can be used in appropriate combination with the structures shown in other embodiment modes and examples.
[实施例1][Example 1]
在本实施例中,对通过模拟而估计的Si晶体管和实际上制造的OS晶体管的Id-Vd特性的评价结果进行说明。In this embodiment, the evaluation results of the Id-Vd characteristics of a Si transistor estimated through simulation and an actually manufactured OS transistor will be described.
图85A、图85B及图85C是示出Id-Vd特性的评价结果的图表。在图85A、图85B及图85C各自中,横轴表示源极与漏极之间的电压(也称为“电压Vd”)的绝对值,纵轴表示流过源极与漏极之间的电流(也称为“电流Id”)的绝对值。此外,图85A、图85B及图85C分别示出按每隔0.025V使源极与栅极之间的电压(也称为“电压Vg”)变化而评价的多个Id-Vd特性。85A, 85B, and 85C are graphs showing evaluation results of Id-Vd characteristics. In each of FIGS. 85A, 85B, and 85C, the horizontal axis represents the absolute value of the voltage between the source and the drain (also referred to as "voltage Vd"), and the vertical axis represents the voltage flowing between the source and the drain. The absolute value of the current (also called "current Id"). In addition, FIG. 85A , FIG. 85B , and FIG. 85C each show a plurality of Id-Vd characteristics evaluated by changing the voltage between the source and the gate (also referred to as “voltage Vg”) every 0.025 V.
图85A示出通过模拟而估计的Si晶体管801的Id-Vd特性的计算结果。Si晶体管801是沟道长度L为1.5μm且沟道宽度W为1.4μm的单栅型p沟道型晶体管。注意,作为模拟软件使用SPICE。FIG. 85A shows calculation results of the Id-Vd characteristics of the Si transistor 801 estimated through simulation. The Si transistor 801 is a single-gate p-channel transistor with a channel length L of 1.5 μm and a channel width W of 1.4 μm. Note that SPICE is used as the simulation software.
图85A所示的Id-Vd曲线811a表示电压Vg为0.775V时的Id-Vd特性。Id-Vd曲线811b表示电压Vg为0.750V时的Id-Vd特性。Id-Vd曲线811c表示电压Vg为0.725V时的Id-Vd特性。除此之外,图85A还示出按每隔0.025V使电压Vg变化的多个Id-Vd特性的计算结果。The Id-Vd curve 811a shown in FIG. 85A shows the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 0.775V. The Id-Vd curve 811b shows the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 0.750V. The Id-Vd curve 811c represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 0.725V. In addition, FIG. 85A also shows the calculation results of a plurality of Id-Vd characteristics in which the voltage Vg is changed every 0.025V.
图85B示出实际制造的OS晶体管802的Id-Vd特性的测量结果。OS晶体管802是沟道长度L为200nm且沟道宽度W为60nm的单栅型n沟道型晶体管。OS晶体管802包括与用作OS晶体管802的源极的端子电连接的背栅极。FIG. 85B shows the measurement results of the Id-Vd characteristics of the actually manufactured OS transistor 802. The OS transistor 802 is a single-gate n-channel transistor with a channel length L of 200 nm and a channel width W of 60 nm. OS transistor 802 includes a back gate electrically connected to a terminal serving as a source of OS transistor 802 .
图85B所示的Id-Vd曲线821a表示电压Vg为0.925V时的Id-Vd特性。Id-Vd曲线821b表示电压Vg为0.900V时的Id-Vd特性。Id-Vd曲线821c表示电压Vg为0.875V时的Id-Vd特性。除此之外,图85B还示出随着电压Vg以0.025V每变化而测量的多个Id-Vd特性。The Id-Vd curve 821a shown in FIG. 85B represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 0.925V. The Id-Vd curve 821b represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 0.900V. The Id-Vd curve 821c represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 0.875V. In addition, FIG. 85B also shows a plurality of Id-Vd characteristics measured as the voltage Vg changes by 0.025V.
图85C示出实际上制造的OS晶体管803的Id-Vd特性的测量结果。OS晶体管803是多栅型晶体管,其中使六个沟道长度L为200nm且沟道宽度W为60nm的单栅型n沟道型OS晶体管串联连接,并使各栅极电连接。OS晶体管803所包括的六个晶体管分别包括背栅极。各背栅极与用作OS晶体管803的源极的端子电连接。FIG. 85C shows the measurement results of the Id-Vd characteristics of the actually manufactured OS transistor 803. The OS transistor 803 is a multi-gate transistor in which six single-gate n-channel OS transistors with a channel length L of 200 nm and a channel width W of 60 nm are connected in series and the respective gates are electrically connected. Each of the six transistors included in the OS transistor 803 includes a back gate. Each back gate is electrically connected to a terminal serving as the source of the OS transistor 803 .
图85C所示的Id-Vd曲线831a表示电压Vg为2.125V时的Id-Vd特性。Id-Vd曲线831b表示电压Vg为2.100V时的Id-Vd特性。Id-Vd曲线831c表示电压Vg为2.075V时的Id-Vd特性。除此之外,图85C还示出随着电压Vg以0.025V每变化而测量的多个Id-Vd特性。The Id-Vd curve 831a shown in FIG. 85C represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 2.125V. The Id-Vd curve 831b represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 2.100V. The Id-Vd curve 831c represents the Id-Vd characteristic when the voltage Vg is 2.075V. In addition, FIG. 85C also shows a plurality of Id-Vd characteristics measured as the voltage Vg changes by 0.025V.
从图85A及图85B可以确认到:OS晶体管802的噪声成分比Si晶体管801多,但是两者也可以由电压Vg控制电流Id。另一方面,在两者中,电流Id容易受到电压Vd变化的影响,没有得到良好的饱和特性。It can be confirmed from FIGS. 85A and 85B that the OS transistor 802 has more noise components than the Si transistor 801, but both can control the current Id with the voltage Vg. On the other hand, among the two, the current Id is easily affected by changes in the voltage Vd, and good saturation characteristics are not obtained.
此外,从图85C可以确认到:与Si晶体管801及OS晶体管802相比,多栅型晶体管的OS晶体管803的相对于电压Vd变化的电流Id变化少。也就是说,多栅型晶体管的OS晶体管803的饱和特性比Si晶体管801及OS晶体管802高。In addition, it can be confirmed from FIG. 85C that the OS transistor 803 of the multi-gate transistor has less change in the current Id with respect to the change in the voltage Vd than the Si transistor 801 and the OS transistor 802 . That is, the OS transistor 803 of the multi-gate transistor has higher saturation characteristics than the Si transistor 801 and the OS transistor 802 .
此外,与OS晶体管802相比,OS晶体管803的噪声成分得到抑制,因此能够实现由电压Vg更精确地控制电流Id。例如,通过将OS晶体管803用作上述实施方式所示的晶体管M2,因此能够实现发光元件61的发光亮度的更精确的控制。In addition, since the noise component of the OS transistor 803 is suppressed compared with the OS transistor 802, more precise control of the current Id by the voltage Vg can be achieved. For example, by using the OS transistor 803 as the transistor M2 shown in the above-described embodiment, more precise control of the light emission brightness of the light emitting element 61 can be achieved.
作为晶体管M2可以使用如Si晶体管801或OS晶体管802那样的单栅型晶体管,但是优选使用如OS晶体管803那样的多栅型晶体管。多栅型晶体管包括的晶体管的个数(直列个数)优选为两个以上,更优选为四个以上,进一步优选为六个以上。As the transistor M2, a single-gate transistor such as the Si transistor 801 or the OS transistor 802 can be used, but a multi-gate transistor such as the OS transistor 803 is preferably used. The number of transistors (number of transistors in series) included in the multi-gate transistor is preferably two or more, more preferably four or more, and still more preferably six or more.
[实施例2][Example 2]
在本实施例中,对实际上制造的OS晶体管的源极和漏极间的绝缘耐压的评价结果进行说明。In this embodiment, the evaluation results of the dielectric breakdown voltage between the source and the drain of an OS transistor actually manufactured will be described.
图86是示出实际上制造的OS晶体管802的绝缘耐压的评价结果的图表。如上述实施例所说明,OS晶体管802是沟道长度L为200nm且沟道宽度W为60nm的单栅型n沟道型晶体管。OS晶体管802包括与用作OS晶体管802的源极的端子电连接的背栅极。FIG. 86 is a graph showing the evaluation results of the insulation breakdown voltage of the OS transistor 802 actually manufactured. As explained in the above embodiment, the OS transistor 802 is a single-gate n-channel transistor with a channel length L of 200 nm and a channel width W of 60 nm. OS transistor 802 includes a back gate electrically connected to a terminal serving as a source of OS transistor 802 .
图86的横轴表示电压Vd,纵轴表示电流Id。图86示出电压Vg为0V且使电压Vd从0V变化到30V时的电流Id的变化。也就是说,示出OS晶体管802为关闭状态时的相对于电压Vd的电流Id的变化。The horizontal axis of FIG. 86 represents voltage Vd, and the vertical axis represents current Id. FIG. 86 shows changes in current Id when voltage Vg is 0V and voltage Vd is changed from 0V to 30V. That is, the change in the current Id with respect to the voltage Vd when the OS transistor 802 is in the off state is shown.
由图86可知,OS晶体管802中在电压Vd大致为20V时产生绝缘破坏。此外,即使电压Vd上升,到产生绝缘破坏的电流Id的上升程度也很小。由此可知,即使OS晶体管的电压Vd上升时也关态电流的增加少,OS晶体管是源极和漏极间的绝缘耐压高的晶体管。As shown in FIG. 86 , dielectric breakdown occurs in the OS transistor 802 when the voltage Vd is approximately 20V. In addition, even if the voltage Vd rises, the current Id rises to a small extent to cause dielectric breakdown. From this, it can be seen that even when the voltage Vd of the OS transistor increases, the increase in off-state current is small, and the OS transistor has a high insulation breakdown voltage between the source and the drain.
例如,优选将OS晶体管用作上述实施方式所示的晶体管M2和晶体管M5中的一方或双方。通过使用OS晶体管,即使上述实施方式所示的电位Va与电位Vc之电位差大半导体装置的工作也稳定,因此可以实现可靠性良好的半导体装置。For example, it is preferable to use an OS transistor as one or both of the transistor M2 and the transistor M5 shown in the above-mentioned embodiment. By using the OS transistor, the operation of the semiconductor device is stable even if the potential difference between the potential Va and the potential Vc shown in the above-described embodiment is large, and therefore a highly reliable semiconductor device can be realized.
[符号说明][Symbol Description]
10:显示装置、23:CPU、24:GPU、25:存储电路部、29:输入输出端子部、40:层、50:层、51:像素电路、60:层、61:发光元件、100:半导体装置、101:布线、102:布线、103:布线、104:布线、105:布线、171:导电层、172:EL层、173:导电层、230:像素。10: Display device, 23: CPU, 24: GPU, 25: Storage circuit section, 29: Input and output terminal section, 40: Layer, 50: Layer, 51: Pixel circuit, 60: Layer, 61: Light emitting element, 100: Semiconductor device, 101: Wiring, 102: Wiring, 103: Wiring, 104: Wiring, 105: Wiring, 171: Conductive layer, 172: EL layer, 173: Conductive layer, 230: Pixel.
Claims (42)
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2021-069693 | 2021-04-16 | ||
| JP2021-081559 | 2021-05-13 | ||
| JP2021-100982 | 2021-06-17 | ||
| JP2021-132894 | 2021-08-17 | ||
| JP2021-208061 | 2021-12-22 | ||
| JP2022001844 | 2022-01-07 | ||
| JP2022-001844 | 2022-01-07 | ||
| PCT/IB2022/053053 WO2022219447A1 (en) | 2021-04-16 | 2022-04-01 | Display device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN117203696A true CN117203696A (en) | 2023-12-08 |
Family
ID=89005701
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202280028422.2A Pending CN117203696A (en) | 2021-04-16 | 2022-04-01 | display device |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN117203696A (en) |
-
2022
- 2022-04-01 CN CN202280028422.2A patent/CN117203696A/en active Pending
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP7642615B2 (en) | Display device and electronic device | |
| US20240179946A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| JP2025181889A (en) | Semiconductor Devices | |
| US20250157404A1 (en) | Semiconductor device and method for driving semiconductor device | |
| WO2022118141A1 (en) | Display device and display correction system | |
| US12400605B2 (en) | Semiconductor device, display apparatus, and electronic device | |
| CN117203696A (en) | display device | |
| US20240373709A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| WO2022153146A1 (en) | Display device and electronic equipment | |
| US20250133906A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| CN116802720A (en) | Electronic equipment | |
| US20240234310A1 (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| CN117529770A (en) | Semiconductor device and method for driving semiconductor device | |
| JP7761601B2 (en) | Display devices, electronic equipment | |
| US20250054432A1 (en) | Semiconductor Device | |
| US20240306423A1 (en) | Light-Emitting Element, Display Apparatus, and Electronic Device | |
| US12488752B2 (en) | Display apparatus and method for driving the display apparatus | |
| US20250238183A1 (en) | Method for operating display system | |
| CN117678345A (en) | Semiconductor device | |
| CN116783639A (en) | Display devices, electronic equipment |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination |